AnyMedia Access System (30 Channel) - Nokia

AnyMedia ® Access System(30 Channel)Applications and Planning GuideOverview

Releases up to R1.38.1 and R3.6

363-211-585CC109562744

Issue 8September 2008

Alcatel, Lucent, Alcatel-Lucent and the Alcatel-Lucent logo are trademarks of Alcatel-Lucent. All other trademarks are the property of theirrespective owners.

The information presented is subject to change without notice. Alcatel-Lucent assumes no responsibility for inaccuracies contained herein.

Copyright © 2008 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.

Notice

Every effort has been made to ensure that the information contained in this information product was accurate at the time of printing. However,information is subject to change.

Ordering information

See“How to order” (p. xv).

Technical support

Technical support is available forAnyMediaAccess System indoor/outdoor applications, forAnyMediaLAG System, and forAnyMediaElement Manager (Navis AnyMediaElement Manager).

AnyMediaservice is complemented by a full range of services available to support planning, maintaining and operating your system.Applications testing, network integration, and upgrade conversion support is available.

Alcatel-Lucent service personnel will troubleshoot field problems 24 h a day over the phone and on site (if necessary) based on Alcatel-Lucentservice contracts by Local/Regional Customer Support (LCS/RCS) and by Remote Technical Support (RTS).

Contacting your Alcatel-Lucent support: For Europe call the International Customer Management Center (ICMC): +353 1692 4579 or call thetoll free number: 00 800 00 58 2368. For Asia Pacific, Caribbean and Latin America Region, Saudi Arabia, Middle East and Africa call thelocal Alcatel-Lucent Customer Technical Support Team.

Contents

About this information product

Purpose............................................................................................................................................................................................ ixix

Reason for reissue....................................................................................................................................................................... ixix

Safety information....................................................................................................................................................................... ixix

Intended audience........................................................................................................................................................................ xx

Conventions used.......................................................................................................................................................................... xx

Related documentation........................................................................................................................................................... xiiixiii

How to order ................................................................................................................................................................................ xvxv

How to comment........................................................................................................................................................................ xvxv

1 Executive summary

Overview ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 1-11-1

System features and benefits................................................................................................................................................ 1-31-3

Applications and services...................................................................................................................................................... 1-51-5

Housing configurations........................................................................................................................................................... 1-81-8

Shelves and components........................................................................................................................................................ 1-91-9

Interfaces ofAnyMedia® ETSI V5 Shelf and LAG Shelves for narrowband services............................. 1-151-15

Interfaces ofAnyMedia® ETSI V5 Shelf and LAG Shelves for ATM xDSL services............................. 1-181-18

Network element management tools.............................................................................................................................. 1-201-20

Operations, administration, maintenance & provisioning...................................................................................... 1-211-21

2 Applications

Overview ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 2-12-1

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................363-211-585Issue 8, September 2008

iii

AnyMedia® Access System applications......................................................................................................................... 2-22-2

Remote terminal applications.............................................................................................................................................. 2-42-4

Extension via host/remote terminal application for large sites.............................................................................. 2-62-6

3 Housing configurations

Overview ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 3-13-1

Housing configurations........................................................................................................................................................... 3-23-2

DC-powered rack forAnyMedia® LAG 1900 Shelves............................................................................................. 3-33-3

DC-powered racks forAnyMedia® ETSI V5 Shelves............................................................................................... 3-73-7

AnyMedia® LAG 4300 Shelf configurations.............................................................................................................. 3-123-12

SingleAnyMedia® ETSI V5 Shelf ................................................................................................................................. 3-183-18

4 Shelf types and their components

Overview ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 4-14-1

AnyMedia® LAG 1900 Shelf and components............................................................................................................ 4-24-2

AnyMedia® LAG 4300 Shelf and components.......................................................................................................... 4-114-11

AnyMedia® ETSI V5 Shelf and components............................................................................................................. 4-184-18

AnyMedia® LAG 200 Shelf and components............................................................................................................ 4-234-23

5 List of common packs and APs

Overview ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 5-15-1

Packs in theAnyMedia® Access System........................................................................................................................ 5-25-2

Common packs for use in theAnyMedia® LAG 1900 Shelf................................................................................. 5-65-6

Common packs for use in theAnyMedia® LAG 4300 Shelf................................................................................. 5-75-7

Common packs for use in theAnyMedia® ETSI V5 Shelf .................................................................................... 5-95-9

Common packs and application packs in theAnyMedia® LAG 200 Shelf ................................................... 5-105-10

Application packs in theAnyMedia® LAG 1900 Shelf ......................................................................................... 5-115-11

Application packs in theAnyMedia® LAG 4300 Shelf ......................................................................................... 5-145-14

Application packs in theAnyMedia® ETSI V5 Shelf............................................................................................. 5-175-17

6 Network element management tools

Overview ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 6-16-1

Contents

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

iv 363-211-585Issue 8, September 2008

Introduction ................................................................................................................................................................................. 6-36-3

Navis™ AnyMedia® Element Management System................................................................................................... 6-76-7

AnyMedia® Management Interface.................................................................................................................................. 6-86-8

AnyMedia® Access System Graphical System Interface Software...................................................................... 6-96-9

Network Maintenance Manager....................................................................................................................................... 6-126-12

PC requirements...................................................................................................................................................................... 6-136-13

7 General system planning and engineering

Overview ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 7-17-1

Environment conditions

Introduction ................................................................................................................................................................................. 7-37-3

Environmental conditions for storage, transport and operation............................................................................. 7-47-4

Grounding, powering and ringing

Overview ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 7-67-6

Grounding concept................................................................................................................................................................... 7-77-7

Grounding concept for the LAG 4300 System............................................................................................................ 7-97-9

AnyMedia® LAG 1900 Shelf powering and ringing - Overview...................................................................... 7-127-12

Centralized powering forAnyMedia® LAG 1900 Shelf........................................................................................ 7-147-14

Internal and external ringing forAnyMedia® LAG 1900 Shelf ......................................................................... 7-157-15

AnyMedia® LAG 4300 Shelf configuration powering and ringing - Overview.......................................... 7-177-17

Centralized powering for LAG 4300 Shelves............................................................................................................ 7-187-18

Internal and external ringing for LAG 4300 Shelves............................................................................................. 7-207-20

AnyMedia® ETSI V5 Shelf powering and ringing - Overview.......................................................................... 7-237-23

Centralized powering and ringing for ETSI V5 Shelves....................................................................................... 7-247-24

Internal ringing for ETSI V5 Shelves........................................................................................................................... 7-277-27

AnyMedia® LAG 200 Shelf powering and ringing................................................................................................. 7-287-28

Usage of fan units.................................................................................................................................................................. 7-327-32

Alarming

Overview .................................................................................................................................................................................... 7-347-34

Contents

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................363-211-585Issue 8, September 2008

v

Alarming concept for environmental alarms inAnyMedia® ETSI V5 Shelf ................................................ 7-357-35

Alarming concept for environmental alarms inAnyMedia® LAG 1900 Shelf ............................................ 7-377-37

Alarming concept for environmental alarms inAnyMedia® LAG 4300 Shelf ............................................ 7-407-40

Synchronization and timing

Considerations for synchronization and timing......................................................................................................... 7-457-45

Passive clock distribution for LAG 4300 Shelves................................................................................................... 7-477-47

On-demand testing

Overview .................................................................................................................................................................................... 7-487-48

Integrated testing.................................................................................................................................................................... 7-497-49

Manual testing......................................................................................................................................................................... 7-567-56

Monitoring ................................................................................................................................................................................. 7-577-57

Wiring ......................................................................................................................................................................................... 7-587-58

Circuit testing........................................................................................................................................................................... 7-597-59

Subscriber line test via external test head................................................................................................................... 7-607-60

8 DCN configurations for OAM&P

Overview ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 8-18-1

General data communications network (DCN) configurations

Overview ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 8-58-5

PLL-based ROC........................................................................................................................................................................ 8-68-6

Cross-connect............................................................................................................................................................................. 8-78-7

Router/bridge.............................................................................................................................................................................. 8-88-8

Transport network..................................................................................................................................................................... 8-98-9

Example of a PLL-based ROC using aWaveStar® ADM 4/1 ............................................................................ 8-108-10

MNI for PLL- or SPLL-based ROC.............................................................................................................................. 8-128-12

SPLL-based ROC................................................................................................................................................................... 8-158-15

Examples of POTS dial-up DCN.................................................................................................................................... 8-178-17

Examples of ISDN dial-up DCN..................................................................................................................................... 8-208-20

Communication with remoteAnyMedia® Access Systems using BB ATM Operations Channel withinPVC .......................................................................................................................................................................................... 8-238-23

Contents

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

vi 363-211-585Issue 8, September 2008

Remote operations via ATM Operations Channel for mixed configuration.................................................. 8-268-26

Specific data communications network (DCN) configurations

Overview .................................................................................................................................................................................... 8-298-29

SDH point-to-point access network based onWaveStar® ADM 4/1 ................................................................ 8-308-30

Managing multipleAnyMedia® Access Systems in aWaveStar® ADM 4/1 ring configuration overF1-byte..................................................................................................................................................................................... 8-328-32

Using SynCom PDH equipment in a point-to-point structure............................................................................. 8-348-34

Access to remoteAnyMedia® Access Systems via IP networks........................................................................ 8-378-37

Access to remoteAnyMedia® Access Systems via an X.25 DCN.................................................................. 8-398-39

Access to remoteAnyMedia® Access Systems via TCP/IP over DCC........................................................... 8-428-42

Access to remoteAnyMedia® Access Systems via AM 1 Plus over DCC.................................................... 8-458-45

9 Technical specifications

Overview ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 9-19-1

Overview ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 9-29-2

System performance................................................................................................................................................................ 9-39-3

External transmission interfaces network side.............................................................................................................. 9-49-4

External transmission interfaces subscriber side......................................................................................................... 9-89-8

Other external transmission interfaces........................................................................................................................... 9-159-15

External OAM&P interfaces for narrowband services........................................................................................... 9-169-16

External OAM&P interfaces for ATM xDSL services............................................................................................ 9-189-18

Environmental conditions................................................................................................................................................... 9-199-19

Environmental classification.............................................................................................................................................. 9-209-20

Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC)........................................................................................................................... 9-219-21

Resistibility ............................................................................................................................................................................... 9-229-22

Standards compliance........................................................................................................................................................... 9-239-23

10 Safety

Overview .................................................................................................................................................................................... 10-110-1

Structure of hazard statements.......................................................................................................................................... 10-210-2

General safety information................................................................................................................................................. 10-410-4

Contents

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................363-211-585Issue 8, September 2008

vii

Appearance of the safety instructions............................................................................................................................ 10-710-7

Relevant safety instructions............................................................................................................................................... 10-910-9

Electrostatic discharge considerations......................................................................................................................... 10-1110-11

Laser safety guidelines...................................................................................................................................................... 10-1310-13

A Product Support

Overview ..................................................................................................................................................................................... A-1A-1

Training ........................................................................................................................................................................................ A-2A-2

Engineering and Installation Services............................................................................................................................. A-3A-3

Technical support..................................................................................................................................................................... A-4A-4

Customer Assistance Requests Entry System (CARES)......................................................................................... A-5A-5

B Product conformance

Overview ..................................................................................................................................................................................... B-1B-1

European conformity (CE) statements............................................................................................................................ B-2B-2

Eco-environmental statements............................................................................................................................................ B-5B-5

Glossary

Index

Contents

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

viii 363-211-585Issue 8, September 2008

About this information productAbout this information product

Purpose

The Applications and Planning Guide (APOG) for theAnyMedia® Access Systemconsists of three parts which are closely related to each other. They arenot consideredto be independent information products. The titles of the three APOG parts are:

• AnyMedia® Access System, Overview (363-211-585)

• AnyMedia® Access System, Narrowband and ATM xDSL services (363-211-586)

• AnyMedia® Access System, IP-based services (363-211-587).

The two APOG partsOverviewandNarrowband and ATM xDSL servicesreplace theformer combined APOG with the ordering number 363-211-110.

This APOG partOverviewprovides a general service - independent overview of theAnyMedia® Access System. The following information is provided in this informationproduct:

• An overview about applications and services

• A description of housing configurations

• Shelf types and their components

• Network element management tools

• General system planning and engineering

• DCN configurations for OA&M

• Technical specifications.

Reason for reissue

This is the first issue of this document. Information that is added, deleted, or changedin future releases will be summarized in this notice.

Safety information

This information product contains hazard statements for your safety. Hazard statementsare given at points where safety consequences to personnel, equipment, and operationmay exist. Failure to follow these statements may result in serious consequences.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................363-211-585Issue 8, September 2008,

ix

Intended audience

Customers who use this APOG include the following:

• Standardization groups

• Product evaluators

• Network planners

• Engineers.

Conventions used

The following conventions are used throughout thisApplications and Planning Guide,Overview.

Acronyms and abbreviations

In the text acronyms are expanded the first time they are used in the main text of achapter (for example permanent leased line (PLL)). If the acronym is a trademark, itwill not be spelled out. A list of acronyms is provided at the end of this document.

Apparatus code followed by empty parentheses

An apparatus code followed by empty parentheses″()″ includes the letter-suffixedversions of the circuit pack. For example, ADSL4p LPA400( ) represents the ADSL4pLPA400 AP and/or the ADSL4p LPA400B AP.

Commands

AnyMedia® Access System TL1 command names and messages are displayed inconstant-width font and are uppercase (for example RTRV-COND).

Terms used (alphabetically ordered)

The following are terms used in this information product that may have a differentmeaning than the general or common use of the term.

• a/b-cablesrefer generically to the tip/ring pair cables that attach to the faceplate ofall application packs (APs).

• In the AnyMedia® Access System, the termaccessmeans that the system providesthe primary service interface for the subscriber to enter the network.

• ADSL linerefers to the twisted copper pair carrying ADSL and narrowbandservices.

• ADSL modemmeans the ADSL data circuit-terminating equipment at thesubscriber’s site.

• ADSL servicesrefers to all services provided by ADSL APs and by the ADSL partof combo APs.

• ADSL2/ADSL2+is the ADSL technology which refers to the ITU-T standardG.992.3 to G.992.5. This term will be used to distinguish between the legacyADSL technology and the next ADSL generation.

• AFM refers to all ATM feeder multiplexers regardless of the feeder type.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

x 363-211-585Issue 8, September 2008

,

• The ATM feeder multiplexerAFME3 provides an E3 ATM user network interface.If a DS3 interface is required the ATM feeder multiplexerAFMDS3has to be usedinstead, if an E1 interface is required the ATM feeder multiplexerAFME1 has to beused, or if an STM-1/OC-3c interface is required the ATM feeder multiplexerAFMO has to be used.

• The termAnyMedia® ETSI V5 Shelf is used when the text especially refers to thebasic ETSI shelf with 16 AP slots. It houses the COMDAC(s), CIU and AFM(s).The AnyMedia® ETSI V5 Shelf can house narrowband services and ATM xDSLservices.

• The termAnyMedia® LAG Shelf is generally used for anAnyMedia® shelf with ahigh capacity backplane, independently of the physical design of the shelf. It mayhouse COMDAC(s), CIU, AFM(s), IPFM(s) and APs. Currently twoAnyMedia®

LAG Shelves are available, theAnyMedia® LAG 1900 Shelf and theAnyMedia®

LAG 4300 Shelf.In comparison to anAnyMedia® ETSI V5 Shelf the backplane of theAnyMedia®

LAG Shelf has expanded capacity.

• The AnyMedia® LAG 1900 Shelf is a specific LAG Shelf. It contains seven 1Nhigh slots for 1N-sized common packs and 17 3N high slots for common packs(COMDAC, CIU, IPFM, AFM) and application packs with subscriber interfaces.The AnyMedia® LAG 1900 Shelf can house narrowband services, ATM xDSLservices and/or IP-based services.

• The AnyMedia® LAG 4300 Shelf is a specific LAG Shelf. It is designed as adouble-row LAG Shelf housed in an indoor cabinet.EachAnyMedia® LAG 4300 Shelf may contain one NB subsystem, one IP-basedsubsystem and up to two BB subsystems.In comparison to anAnyMedia® ETSI V5 Shelf the backplane of theAnyMedia®

LAG 4300 Shelf has expanded capacity.

• The AnyMedia LAG 4300 Systemcan be delivered in three configurations:

– Configuration 1 - OneAnyMedia® LAG 4300 Shelf

– Configuration 2- TwoAnyMedia® LAG 4300 Shelves

– Configuration 3- TwoAnyMedia® LAG 4300 Shelves and twoAnyMedia®

ETSI V5 Shelves.

• The termAnyMedia® Mainshelf is used in a description that refers to anyAnyMedia® shelf that may contain COMDAC(s), CIU, AFM(s), IPFM(s) and APs,regardless whether it is anAnyMedia® ETSI V5 Shelf, an orAnyMedia® LAGShelf.

• The termAnyMedia® shelves is used whenever the text does not need todistinguish between the shelf types. It is mostly used where services and servicepacks are described.

• ATM Operations Channelis a an ATM permanent virtual connection configured totransmit OAM&P information.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................363-211-585Issue 8, September 2008,

xi

• ATM OAM&P interfaces in the AnyMedia® Access System include the followingalternatives for connecting OAM&P interfaces:

– Console port on the AFM faceplate

– 10BaseT port on the AFM faceplate

– ATM Operations Channel

• ATM xDSL servicesrefer to all typically supported ADSL, SDSL, and SHDSLservices and future digital subscriber line (DSL) services.

• In some occurrences the termbroadbandis used for ATM xDSL related termswhere ATM xDSL would be too specific or not commonly used (e.g. broadbandbus).

• Combo pack refers to an AP that supports narrowband services and ADSL servicescombined on one physical subscriber port.

• The termcustomer premises equipment(CPE) in general covers subscriber’sinstallation and subscriber’s terminal. For ADSL lines the CPE consists amongother equipment of an ADSL modem and a splitter (to separate the narrowbandsignal from the data signal). If both units are meant as a whole the term customerpremises equipment (CPE) is used in this manual.

• The termDS3 interface refers to a bit rate of 44.736 Mbps and a framingaccording to ITU-T recommendations G.804, I.432 and ANSI T1.107. withoutspecifying the physical interface.

• The termDSX-3interface refers to everything that DS3 refers to with the additionof a specific physical interface according to Bellcore standard GR-499. The ATMfeeder multiplexer AFMDS3 provides a DSX-3 interface. In this manual the moregeneral term DS3 interface is used.

• E1 interfacerefers to the 2048-kbps digital feeder interfaces on the network side.

• E3 interfacerefers to the 34.368-Mbps digital feeder interface that carries the ATMpayload cells. The E3 interface is provided by the ATM feeder multiplexer AFM.

• The general termElement Management System(EMS) denotes a software tool usedfor management actions and tasks. The element management system designed forthe AnyMedia® Access System is theNavis™ AnyMedia® Element ManagementSystem (NAM).

• The AnyMedia® Graphical System Interface software (GSI)includes narrowband,ATM xDSL and IP-based services.

• The termGSI/EMSstands for the function of the network management system forthe AnyMedia® Access System, independent of using the GSI or another EMS likethe NAM.

• Inbandsignaling viaATM Operations Channelwithin ATM permanent virtualconnection (PVC) means sending messages not via a special OAM&P interface butembedded in the ATM cell stream.

• The termIP-based servicesrefers to all services that are transported via the IPnetwork.

• The termlegacy ADSLrefers to ADSL technology regarding ITU-T G.992.1. Thisterm will be used to distinguish between the first ADSL generation and the next(ADSL2/ADSL2+) technology.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

xii 363-211-585Issue 8, September 2008

,

• Mixed configurationmeans a configuration of theAnyMedia® shelves includingpacks for narrowband services and for ATM xDSL services.

• The Navis™ AnyMedia® Element Management System (NAM) is an elementmanagement system (EMS) that includes network management capabilities fornarrowband and ATM xDSL services.

• Narrowband servicestypically include POTS services, permanent leased line (PLL)and ISDN as well as n-times 64 kbps to 2 Mbps.

• The termpack is generally used for common packs (e.g. COMDAC, CIU, IO_E1,IO_HDLC, PFU, AFME3, AFMDS3) and application packs (APs).

• SDSL servicesrefers to all services provided by SDSL APs.

• SHDSL servicesrefers to all services provided by SHDSL APs.

• The term[S]HDSL refers to both: HDSL and SHDSL (narrowband services).

• The termsystem applicationis used here for theAnyMedia® Access System whenthe text refers to how a certain network element is used with respect to services.

• The termsystem configurationis used here for theAnyMedia® Access Systemwhen the text refers to as a system equipped with certain packs or units for acertain application including the related database.

• TDM COMDACgenerally refers to a COMDAC in a system configuration withIO_E1 packs where the narrowband signals are transported within physical E1 linksacross a TDM network.

• TL1 system interface(TL1SI) means any interface for operations using TL1commands.

• V5.x is used whenever the following text refers to V5.1 as well as to V5.2.

• xDSL servicemeans any ATM xDSL service transmitted over twisted pairs.Examples are ADSL, SDSL, SHDSL, universal asymmetric digital subscriber line(UDSL), and very high bit rate digital subscriber line (VDSL).

• In this manual the subscriber interface for analog POTS is namedZ interface. Insome countries this interface can be called a/b-interface where the a-leg sometimesmay be called tip and the b-leg ring.

Trademarks

Trademarks of Alcatel-Lucent and other companies are in italics. They are identifiedwith the registered mark (®) or trademark (™) symbol the first time the trademarks areused in the text (for example Alcatel-LucentAnyMedia® Access System).

Related documentation

The following is orderable documentation related to theAnyMedia® Access Systemand for additional components. For the ordering address see“How to order” (p. xv).Additionally, these information products are accessible from the Alcatel-Lucent internalwebpage: http://access.de.lucent.com/ACCESS/cdoc/index.html

Manual Type Comcode CIC OrderingNumber ( 1)

Applications and Planning Guide (APOG), Overview 109 562 744 363-211-585


...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................363-211-585Issue 8, September 2008,

xiii

Manual Type Comcode CIC OrderingNumber ( 1)

Applications and Planning Guide (APOG), Narrowband andATM xDSL services

109 562 751 363-211-586

Applications and Planning Guide (APOG), IP-based services 109 562 769 363-211-587

Data Sheet Book 109 218 651 363-211-251

Ordering Guide 109 097 782 363-211-144

Commands and Procedures for Narrowband Services withTDM COMDAC

109 105 635 363-211-119

Commands and Procedures for ATM xDSL Services 109 024 737 363-211-133

Commands and Procedures for IP-based Services 109 562 736 363-211-555

Installation Manual for DC-Powered Racks for ETSI V5 andLAG 1900 Shelves

109 576 140 363-211-603 (2)

Installation Manual for the Mainshelf and DC-powered racks 109 024 752 363-211-207 (3)

AnyMedia® LAG 4300 System, Installation Manual (IM) 109 461 939 363-211-256

Customer Documentation on CD-ROM 108 298 787 363-211-114

Notes:

1. For the ordering address see“How to order” (p. xv).

2. Applicable for the new DC-powered racks based on CABI600 mechanics (J1C293B-1 L1 andJ1C301B-1 L1)

3. Applicable for the established DC-powered racks J1C283B-1 L2 and J1C293A-1 L2.

Print copy (hard copy)

All listed documents are available in print.

CD-ROM

The following table lists the information products for theAnyMedia® Access Systemwhich are available in PDF format and/or in HTML format on CD-ROM. An AdobeAcrobat Reader® is provided to view them.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

xiv 363-211-585Issue 8, September 2008

,

CD-ROM Comcode Ordering Number

AnyMedia® Access System Customer Documentation onCD-ROM includes:

• Applications and Planning Guide (APOG), Overview inpdf format

• Applications and Planning Guide (APOG), Narrowbandand ATM xDSL services in pdf format

• Applications and Planning Guide (APOG), IP-basedservices in pdf format

• Data Sheet Book in pdf format

• Ordering Guide in pdf format

• Commands and procedures for Narrowband Services withTDM COMDAC in HTML and pdf format

• Commands and Procedures for ATM xDSL Services inHTML and pdf format

• Commands and Procedures for IP-based Services inHTML and pdf format

• Installation Manual for the Mainshelf and forDC-powered Racks in pdf format

• Description of TL1 commands in HTML format

108298787 363-211-114 (1)

Notes:

1. For the ordering address see“How to order” (p. xv).

How to order

These documents and drawings can be ordered at or downloaded from theAlcatel-Lucent Online Customer Support Site (OLCS)(https://support.lucent.com) orthrough your Local Customer Support.

How to comment

To comment on this information product, go to theOnline Comment Form(http://www.lucent-info.com/comments/enus/) or e-mail your comments to theComments Hotline ([email protected]).

Because customer satisfaction is extremely important to Alcatel-Lucent, every attemptis made to encourage feedback from customers about our information products.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................363-211-585Issue 8, September 2008,

xv

https://support.lucent.com

https://support.lucent.com

http://www.lucent-info.com/comments/enus/

http://www.lucent-info.com/comments/enus/

1 1Executive summary

Overview...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Purpose

This chapter provides an overview of Alcatel-LucentAnyMedia® Access System.Further details are contained in the succeeding chapters.

Overview

The AnyMedia® Access System enables service providers to successfully evolve to fullservice access networks in a very cost-effective, practical, and flexible manner. TheAnyMedia® Access System achieves these goals in a variety of ways. It has beendesigned for low-cost deployment in a wide range of applications. Its integratedcapability of supporting ATM xDSL services simplifies planning for data and digitalvideo services. These ATM xDSL services are cost-effectively provided as an overlayto existing telephony networks or as a part of a new, combined narrowband and ATMxDSL services system. With its proven multi-service capabilities and open interfaces,the AnyMedia® Access System provides a highly cost-effective, streamlined way tointegrate new technologies including multiple types of DSL and Ethernet/IP and toevolve to next generation networking.

The AnyMedia® Access System allows cost effective large line size applications andalso deployment of fiber deeper into the network. TheAnyMedia® Access Systemoffers simplified operations in any of its configurations. It is built on a new accessinterface platform (AIP) that will support a multitude of access configurationsincluding fiber in the loop, remote modules and a fixed wireless network.

Contents

System features and benefits 1-3

Applications and services 1-5

Housing configurations 1-8

Shelves and components 1-9

Interfaces ofAnyMedia® ETSI V5 Shelf and LAG Shelves fornarrowband services

1-15

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................363-211-585Issue 8, September 2008

1-1

Interfaces ofAnyMedia® ETSI V5 Shelf and LAG Shelves for ATMxDSL services

1-18

Network element management tools 1-20

Operations, administration, maintenance & provisioning 1-21

Executive summary Overview

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

1-2 363-211-585Issue 8, September 2008

System features and benefits...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

System features and benefits

There are many good reasons to choose especially theAnyMedia® Access System:

• Competitively priced telephony deployment for first installations and for laternetwork extensions in case of increasing needs for additional lines

• Service-independent access solution by means of a common platform for allservices

• Supports APs for high capacity POTS, ISDN, HDSL, ADSL, and SHDSL from asingle system

• Combo packs include in one pack the circuitry for narrowband and ADSL servicesthat would otherwise be provided in separate packs

• Easy upgrade to asynchronous transfer mode (ATM)-based emerging services

• Transport of narrowband services and ATM xDSL services via the same ATMbased feeder

• Different network interfaces for narrowband services depending on the COMDACtype

– Interface to TDM network when using a TDM COMDAC

– Interface to IP network when using an IP COMDAC AP

• Economic utilization of ATM feeder bandwidth with 4 different interface types andvia daisychaining of several shelves

• Comprehensive ATM traffic statistics collection

• Architectural flexibility by a modular structure (AnyMedia® LAG Shelfconfigurations,AnyMedia® ETSI V5 Shelf configurations), in different housingtypes

• Uses standard open interfaces including V5.2, V5.1, Ethernet, IP, SIP, H.248, DSLand ATM.

• Flexible new installation concept (NIC) which makes use of small modulecontainers equipped with very compact modules (splitters or connect-throughmodules). These module containers are mounted at the MDF instead of disconnectterminal blocks. This saves space in the system racks - no splitter shelves arerequired anymore - and money, and allows changing services without additionalcabling activities.

• Space-efficient through a high-density packaging

• Multi-use of application packs for differentAlcatel-Lucentproducts (5ESS®-2000andAnyMedia® Access System)

– Proven technology

– Simplified logistics

• Conformance with V5.x standards

• Configurations for indoor or outdoor applications

Executive summary

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................363-211-585Issue 8, September 2008

1-3

• AnyMedia® Management InterfaceThe AnyMedia® Management Interface, executed on a PC as Windows basedsoftware to make operation, administration, maintenance, and provisioning(OAM&P) procedures easier and to reduce sources of error is used for managingnarrowband and ATM xDSL servicesIt includes:

– AnyMedia® Access System graphical system interface software (GSI)The GSI is used to provision narrowband and ATM xDSL services and tomonitor alarms and events on a single NE

– Network Maintenance ManagerThe Network Maintenance Manager is used to monitor alarms over multipleNEs.

• Navis™ AnyMedia® Element Management System (NAM) (multi-user access andnorthbound interface)

• High reliability via robust software and optional redundancy in hardware for allcommon units

– Supports duplex mode operation for the COMDAC

– Provides protected IO_E1 operation (1:n) when TDM COMDAC is used

– Provides protected IO_HDLC operation (1:1)

– Supports 1:1 protection of the AFM circuit pack, when a E3/DS3 orSTM-1/OC-3c ATM feeder is used

– Optionally supports 1:1 protection of the STM-1/OC-3c feeder facility whenAFMOs are used in duplex mode

• Complete access network solutions supporting synchronous digital hierarchy (SDH)and plesiochronous digital hierarchy (PDH) transmission equipment.

AnyMedia ® LAG Shelf configurations features

Special features of theAnyMedia® LAG Shelf configurations are:

• System architecture reduces cost for large line size application

• The AnyMedia® LAG 1900 Shelf supports up to 896 POTS ports with the sameapplication packs as used in otherAnyMedia® configurations

• The double-rowAnyMedia® LAG 4300 Shelf supports up to 2752 POTS ports withthe same application packs as used in otherAnyMedia® configurations

• Up to 5504 POTS ports with twoAnyMedia® LAG 4300 Shelves mounted in oneindoor cabinet

• High V5 concentration reduces switch related cost

• Internal ringing generator (optional)

• Most types of NB- and ATM xDSL application packs supported (for exceptionsrefer to“Packs in theAnyMedia® Access System” (p. 5-2))

• Future-proof backplane ready for next generation networks concerning VoIP andseveral other IP subscriber applications.

Executive summary System features and benefits

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

1-4 363-211-585Issue 8, September 2008

Applications and services...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Applications

The AnyMedia® Access System includes configurations for the following applications:

• Central office-site applications (CO), co-located with the local exchange (LE),indoor application

• Remote applications

– Remote indoor applications, for example switch consolidation or extension ofservice area

– Remote outdoor applications

• Indoor applications withAnyMedia® LAG Shelf configurations for an increaseddemand of subscriber lines

• Remote terminal applications for narrowband services: AnAnyMedia® AccessSystem acts as host terminal for a number ofAnyMedia® Access Systems acting asremote terminals.

The AnyMedia® Access System supports narrowband and ATM xDSL services.

Narrowband services

The narrowband services are V5 (switched) services, V3 switched services, andnon-switched services. The following narrowband services are supported:

• V5.x (switched) servicesOn the subscriber side the following services are supported:

– POTS (customer-specific POTS with different features, for example pulsemetering, reverse battery)

– ISDN BRA: dial-up connection, 2×64-kbps transmission capability for voiceand data (two B-channels) and 16-kbps transmission capability for signaling anddata (D-channel)

– ISDN PRA via [S]HDSL (V5.2 only): Transmission capability up to 30B-channels (30×64 kbps) and one D-channel (64 kbps). The B-channels aretransported in the bearer channels of the V5.2 interface; the D-channel istransported in the communication channels of the V5.2 interface.

– Semipermanent analog leased lines (SPALLs)

– Semipermanent digital leased lines (SPDLLs) with or without managed NTUsOn the network side the following services are included:

– V5.1 switched services

– V5.2 switched services

• V3 switched servicesOn the subscriber side the following services are supported:

– ISDN PRA via [S]HDSL: Transmission capability of 32 bearer channels(32×64 kbps) including timeslot 0. The 32 bearer channels are transparentbetween the [S]HDSL interface and the network side.

Executive summary

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................363-211-585Issue 8, September 2008

1-5

On the network side the following service is included:

– V3 switched service

• Non-switched permanent leased lines (PLLs)On the subscriber side the following services are included:

– Analog leased lines (ALLs)

– Digital leased lines (DLLs) with or without managed NTUs

– Two kinds of [S]HDSL n×64 kbps leased line servicesVLL: A digital leased line via interfaces according to ITU V.35, V.36 or X.21GLL: A digital leased line via interfaces according to G.703.

– Two kinds of unstructured 2 Mbps leased line servicesUVLL: An unstructured leased line via interfaces according to ITU V.35, V.36or X.21UGLL: An unstructured leased line via interfaces according to G.703.

On the network side the following services are included:

– V5 independent leased line (LL)

– V5 independent unstructured leased line (ULL).

ATM xDSL services

The following ATM xDSL services are supported using service-independent ATMtechnology:

•Asymmetrical digital subscriber line (ADSL) service is based on:

– ANSI T1.413, Issue 2 standard

– ITU-T G.992.1 (ADSL transceivers)

– ITU-T G.992.2 (Splitterless ADSL transceivers)

– ITU-T G.992.3 (ADSL2 transceivers and READSL)

– ITU-T G.992.5 (ADSL2+ transceivers).

• Single-pair high bit-rate digital subscriber line (SHDSL) service with equaltransmission rates for both the upstream and the downstream direction - based onuse of the TC-PAM line coding schemeThe AnyMedia® Access System is transparent for the end user protocol. Theinterface to the subscriber and the end user protocol depend only on the used CPE.The AnyMedia® Access System supports several CPEs with different interfaces.

IP-based services

The following IP-based services are supported inAnyMedia® LAG Shelfconfigurations:

• Voice over IP (VoIP)

• IP data (VDSL)

Executive summary Applications and services

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

1-6 363-211-585Issue 8, September 2008

Mixed services

OneAnyMedia® shelf may be configured either

• For narrowband services only or

• For ATM xDSL services only or

• For IP-based services only or

• For any mix of all three “Triple Technology”.

For a more detailed description of the applications and services seeChapter 2,“Applications”.

Executive summary Applications and services

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................363-211-585Issue 8, September 2008

1-7

Housing configurations...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Housing configurations

The housing configuration of theAnyMedia® Access System depends on theapplication. The following housing configurations are available:

• DC-powered rack (ETSI-based) for housing up to threeAnyMedia® LAG 1900ShelvesThe AnyMedia® LAG 1900 Shelf may contain one NB subsystem, one BBsubsystem and one IP subsystem.For a more detailed description see“DC-powered rack forAnyMedia® LAG 1900Shelves” (p. 3-3).

• AnyMedia® LAG 4300 Shelf configurations for large line size applicationsAnyMedia® LAG 4300 Shelf configurations are intended for large line sizeapplications co-located to V5 switches. The physical design is optimized fordeployment in switching style indoor cabinet.AnyMedia® LAG 4300 Shelves are delivered in three configurations:

– oneAnyMedia® LAG 4300 Shelf

– two AnyMedia® LAG 4300 Shelves

– two AnyMedia® LAG 4300 Shelves and twoAnyMedia® ETSI V5 Shelves.EachAnyMedia® LAG 4300 Shelf may contain one NB subsystem and up to twoBB subsystems.For a more detailed description see“AnyMedia® LAG 4300 Shelf configurations”(p. 3-12).

• DC-powered ETSI-based rackThis rack configuration contains up to 3AnyMedia® ETSI V5 Shelves for up to1536 subscribers (the default DC rack configuration is equipped with 1AnyMedia®

ETSI V5 Shelf).

• AnyMedia® ETSI V5 Shelf (loose) with mounting parts and backplane power cords.This AnyMedia® ETSI V5 Shelf is included in the rack configurations and hasadditionally to be ordered separately when extending the capacity of the default DCrack configuration.

• AC-powered ETSI-based rackThis rack configuration includes oneAnyMedia® ETSI V5 Shelf, optionally oneshelf for an SDH multiplexerWaveStar® ADM 4/1, one shelf for a cabinet powersystem CPS2000, and two battery shelves.

Executive summary

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

1-8 363-211-585Issue 8, September 2008

Shelves and components...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Overview

Depending on the application, different shelf types are used for housing theAnyMediaAccess System:

• AnyMedia® LAG 1900 Shelf

• AnyMedia® LAG 4300 Shelf

• AnyMedia® ETSI V5 Shelf

• AnyMedia® LAG 200 Shelf.

AnyMedia ® LAG 1900 Shelf

The AnyMedia® LAG 1900 Shelf supports simultaneously TDM-based narrowbandsubsystems, ATM xDSL subsystems, and IP-based subsystems. This capability is called“Triple Technology”. Each of the subsystems can work in duplex mode, namely viaduplex COMDACs, AFMs, and IPFMs.

OneAnyMedia® LAG 1900 Shelf contains three slots for IO_E1 packs, twodouble-wide slots for two RGUs/one RFU and two double-wide slots for two PFUs,two COMDAC slots, one CIU slot, and 14 slots for application packs (APs includingAFMs and IPFMs).

The following components can be used in theAnyMedia® LAG 1900 Shelf:

• Common packs in the 1N-sized slots in the upper row

– Two ringing generator units (RGUs)

– One ringing filter unit (RFU)

– Two power filter units (PFUs)

• Common packs for narrowband services

– One or two common data and control packs (COMDACs)

– One communication interface unit (CIU)

– Up to 2 quad E1 interface service packs (IO_E1) and optional one E1 interfaceprotection pack (IO_E1P)

• Common packs for ATM xDSL services

– One or two AFME3 to provide an E3 ATM based user network interface (UNI3.1)

– One or two AFMDS3 to provide a DS3 ATM based user network interface(UNI 3.1)

– One AFME1 to provide an E1 ATM based user network interface (UNI 3.1)

– One or two AFMO to provide an STM-1/OC3-c ATM based user networkinterface (UNI 3.1)

• Common packs for IP-based services

– One or two IP feeder multiplexer (IPFM)

• Application packs (APs) for narrowband services

Executive summary

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................363-211-585Issue 8, September 2008

1-9

• Application packs (APs) for ATM xDSL services

• Application packs (APs) for IP-based services.


OneAnyMedia® LAG 4300 Shelf includes a double high backplane supporting twocard cages for accommodating circuit packs and application packs (APs). The two rowstogether provide a total of 43 slots for APs. Both rows of theAnyMedia® LAG 4300Shelf form one single NB subsystem and/or one single IP subsystem, while the BBsubsystem in the upper row is logically completely separated from that in the lowerrow.

Two of theseAnyMedia® LAG 4300 Shelves can be mounted back-to-back in one EMIprotected indoor cabinet.

The upper row of anAnyMedia® LAG 4300 Shelf contains six slots for IO_E1 packs(four IO_E1 packs and one IO_E1 protection pack), two COMDAC slots, one CIUslot, and 19 slots for application packs (APs). Slots 40/41 and 42/43 can alternativelybe equipped with 2-slot wide ringing generators.

The lower row of anAnyMedia® LAG 4300 Shelf contains 24 slots for applicationpacks.

The following components can be used in theAnyMedia® LAG Shelf:

• Ringing Generator (RGP100B)





• Common packs for ATM xDSL services per BB subsystem






– One or two IP feeder multiplexer (IPFM)


• Application packs (APs) for ATM xDSL services

• Application packs (APs) for IP-based services.

Executive summary Shelves and components

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

1-10 363-211-585Issue 8, September 2008

AnyMedia ® ETSI V5 Shelf

The AnyMedia® ETSI V5 Shelf is a metallic shelf with a conductive front cover withEMC shielding. All connections can be performed from the front side via:

• The shelf connection panel above the application packs

• The sockets on the front panels of the packs.

The figure below shows anAnyMedia® ETSI V5 Shelf.

The following components are used or can be used in theAnyMedia® ETSI V5 Shelf:

• Power Filter Unit (PFU)





– One or two High level Data Link Control packs (IO_HDLC)


...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................363-211-585Issue 8, September 2008

1-11

• Common pack for ATM xDSL services






• APs for ATM xDSL services.


The AnyMedia® LAG 200 Shelf supports an IP subsystem based on a backplane withhigh-speed Gigabit Ethernet (GbE) links to all AP slots. The IP subsystem works insimplex mode, controlled via an Ethernet subscriber interface module (ESIM) and canbe used in a stand-alone configuration.

OneAnyMedia® LAG 200 Shelf contains three slots for IP application packs (APsincluding one ESIM) and three 1N-sized double-wide slots for RGU (RGU550) or PFU(PFU502).

The following components can be used in theAnyMedia® LAG 200 Shelf:

• One ringing generator unit (RGU)

• One power filter unit (PFU)

• One slot for future use


– One Ethernet subscriber interface module (ESIM)

• Up to three application packs (APs) for IP-based services.

APs for NB services

The following APs are used for narrowband services:

• The LPZ100 provides up to 32 Z ports

• The LPZ12x provide up to 32 Z ports

• The LPZ110 provides up to 32 Z ports (with on board low pass filters);interworking with the LPA432 (ADSL over POTS without on board high passfilters)

• The LPZ200 provides up to 32 Z ports and a test head for integrated test andmeasurement



• The LPP100 provides up to 24 Z ports

• The LPU112 provides up to 12 U ports


...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

1-12 363-211-585Issue 8, September 2008

• The LPU132 provides up to 32 U ports with 2B1Q line coding

• The LPU430 provides up to 16 U ports (not supported by theAnyMedia® LAGShelves)

• The LPU432 provides up to 32U ports

• The LPU508 provides up to 8 U ports with TCM line coding

• The LPS504 provides 2×2 HDSL ports (1168 kbps for each HDSL port)

• The LPS510 provides 8 SHDSL ports (for up to 2048 kbps each)

• Optionally one test application pack TAP10x for integrated test and measurementper shelf.

APs for ATM xDSL services

The following APs are used for ATM xDSL services:

• The LPA416 provides 16 ADSL ports and on-board POTS splitters

• The LPA417 provides 16 ADSL ports and on-board ISDN splitters

• The LPA420 provides 16 ADSL2+ ports and on-board POTS splitters

• The LPA432 provides 32 ADSL ports and on board high pass filters; interworkingwith the LPZ110 (with onboard lowpass filters)

• The LPA434 provides 32 ADSL ports for ADSL service that may be combined withISDN service from another ISDN AP. An external splitter is required.

• ADSL32i LPA438 (supports ADSL2 and ADSL2+, Annex B)

• The LPS702 provides 16 SHDSL ports.

APs for IP-based services

The following APs are used for IP-based services:

• The IP COMDAC application pack (ICAP) LPI600 acts as a host terminal andenables the connected remote terminals to offer VoIP services via SIP, H.248 orMGCP signaling.

• The LPZ600 provides 32 ports supporting VoIP services via SIP, H.248 or MGCPsignaling. It is hardware-ready to support also TDM based narrowband services.

• The LPZ602 provides 64 ports supporting VoIP services via SIP, H.248 or MGCPsignaling.

• The LPA633 provides 32 ADSL ports and on-board POTS splitters.

• The VDSL subscriber interface module (VSIM) application pack LPV417 is aVDSL application pack. providing 16 VDSL line circuits.

• The Ethernet subscriber interface module (ESIM) application pack LPE408 is anEthernet application pack. providing 8 Fast Ethernet subscriber lines and 1 GigabitEthernet uplink.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................363-211-585Issue 8, September 2008

1-13

Combo APs for NB and ATM xDSL services

The following APs are used for narrowband and ATM xDSL services:

• The LPA832 provides 32 subscriber ports for POTS and ADSL simultaneously, aswell as POTS only or ADSL only.

• The LPA833 provides 32 subscriber ports for POTS and ADSL simultaneously, aswell as POTS only or ADSL only; same usage as LPA832, but ADSL2+ ports;Annex A/M.

For a more detailed product description seeChapter 4, “Shelf types and theircomponents”.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

1-14 363-211-585Issue 8, September 2008

Interfaces ofAnyMedia® ETSI V5 Shelf and LAG Shelves fornarrowband services...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Background

The AnyMedia® ETSI V5 Shelf and theAnyMedia® LAG Shelves provide differentinterfaces for narrowband services and for ATM xDSL services. TheAnyMedia® LAGShelves additionally provide interfaces for IP-based services.

The following types of interfaces are used for handling narrowband services:

Physical service interfaces

The physical service interfaces are:

• E1 interface (when TDM COMDAC is used)

• Z interface

• U interface

• HDSL interface

• SHDSL interface.

Logical service interfaces

The logical service interfaces are:

• On the network side

– V5.1 interfaces according to ETS 300 324

– V5.2 interfaces with line concentration according to ETS 300 347

– V3 interfaces according to ETS 300 233

– Leased line (LL)

– Unstructured leased line (ULL)

– Proprietary E1 interface for remote terminal applications

• On the subscriber side

– POTS

– ISDN BRA

– V5 ISDN PRA via [S]HDSL

– V3 ISDN PRA via [S]HDSL

– Analog leased line (ALL)

– Digital leased line (DLL)

– [S]HDSL n×64 kbps digital leased line via interfaces according to ITU V.35,V.36 or X.21 (VLL)

– [S]HDSL n×64 kbps digital leased line via interfaces according to G.703 (GLL)

– Unstructured 2 Mbps leased line via interfaces according to ITU V.35, V.36 orX.21 (UVLL)

– Unstructured 2 Mbps leased line via interfaces according to G.703 (UGLL).

Executive summary

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................363-211-585Issue 8, September 2008

1-15

Synchronization interfaces

The synchronization interfaces are different for theAnyMedia® LAG Shelves and forthe AnyMedia® ETSI V5 Shelf.

• For recovering timing in theAnyMedia® LAG Shelves the following sources canbe used:

– E1 links (clock derived from up to two E1 link signals)

– Station clock from an external synchronization equipment delivering asynchronization signal to the station clock interface (SCI) connected to thestation clock pins in the office clock connector.

– 2048 kHz digital office timing supply (DOTS) E1 signal

– Digital clock supply interface DCS (64 kHz synchronization signal, providing8 kHz and 400 Hz phase information)

– Composite clock supply interface (64 kHz synchronization signal, providing8 kHz phase information).

• For recovering timing in theAnyMedia® ETSI V5 Shelf the following sources canbe used:

– E1 links (clock derived from up to two E1 link signals), when TDM COMDACis used

– Station clock from an external synchronization equipment delivering asynchronization signal to the station clock interface (SCI) connected to thestation clock pins in the office clock connector.

OAM&P interfaces

Operations, administration, maintenance, and provisioning (OAM&P) interfaces

• CIT port (EIA-232C interface) for TL1 message protocolVia an EIA-232C connector on the faceplate of the CIU a GSI can be connected.This interface is typically used during initial installation and other maintenancerelated activities

• 10BaseT LAN interface for TL1 message protocol based on TCP/IP via the D-subconnector on the connector field

• Remote operations channel (ROC) within a leased line interface or within asemipermanent leased line via V5.x interface when TDM COMDAC is used

• Remote operations channel (ROC) within proprietary E1 interface in host/remoteterminal application

• Alarm interfaces

– The CIU supports eight alarm closure inputs to indicate an external fault.

– Outputs: Three software-controlled relays on the CIU are used to indicate activealarms. The assignment to the related alarm severities is provisionable by TL1commands.

– Light emitting diodes (LEDs) located on the faceplate of the packs can be usedas local alarm interfaces.

Executive summary Interfaces of AnyMedia® ETSI V5 Shelf and LAG Shelvesfor narrowband services

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

1-16 363-211-585Issue 8, September 2008

• Testing interfaces

– TAP connector on the shelf connection panel used to connect TAP100/TAP101.

– Two faceplate connectors on the CIU provide test access to the channel sideand to the drop side.

• Interfaces for external test head testing

– Serial EIA-232C RTU port for control access

– TAP connector on the shelf connection panel.

Executive summary Interfaces of AnyMedia® ETSI V5 Shelf and LAG Shelvesfor narrowband services

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................363-211-585Issue 8, September 2008

1-17

Interfaces ofAnyMedia® ETSI V5 Shelf and LAG Shelves forATM xDSL services...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Background

ATM provides asynchronous multiplexed data transfer via fixed length cells. The cellsare transported transparently end-to-end from the customer premises equipment (CPE)via the remote ATM network to the service provider and vice versa.

Service interfaces

The AnyMedia® Access System provides the following interfaces for handling ATMxDSL services:

• ATM feeder interfaces on the network side (depending on the AFM type used):

– E3 feeder interface

– DS3 feeder interface

– E1 feeder interfaces

– Optical STM-1/OC-3c interface

– Interface for daisy-chaining (for E3 and DS3)

• ATM xDSL interfaces

– Full-rate ADSL interface on the subscriber side towards the ADSL modemaccording to ANSI T1.413 and ITU G.992.1

– ADSL lite interface on the subscriber side towards the ADSL modem accordingto ANSI T1.413 and ITU G.992.2

– Full-rate ADSL2 interface and READSL on the subscriber side towards theADSL modem according to ITU G.992.3

– ADSL2 lite interface on the subscriber side towards the ADSL modemaccording to ITU G.992.4

– ADSL2+ interface on the subscriber side towards the ADSL modem accordingto ITU G.992.5

– SHDSL interface on the subscriber side towards the SHDSL modem.

Important! The interface between the xDSL modem and the subscriber’s PCdepends only on the used CPE.

Synchronization interfaces

For recovering timing following sources can be used:

• The AFM can recover timing from the feeder.

• Timing for each ADSL interface is derived from an internal crystal oscillator in theADSL AP synchronized to the clock distributed by the AFM.

Executive summary

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

1-18 363-211-585Issue 8, September 2008

OAM&P interfaces

Operations, administration, maintenance, and provisioning (OAM&P) interfaces

• Console port on the ATM feeder multiplexer

• 10BaseT port on the ATM feeder multiplexer

• BB ATM Operations Channel within the feeder PVC.

For a more detailed description of the interfaces refer to the APOG partNarrowbandand ATM xDSL servicesand to the APOG partIP-based services.

Executive summary Interfaces of AnyMedia® ETSI V5 Shelf and LAG Shelvesfor ATM xDSL services

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................363-211-585Issue 8, September 2008

1-19

Network element management tools...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Alcatel-Lucent provides software for the initial system turn-up as well as for thecentral and regional management scenarios based on the standard TelecommunicationManagement Network (TMN) models by supporting the tasks of the InternationalStandardization Organization (ISO) functional areas.

The following software tools are used forOperations, Administration, Maintenance,and Provisioning(OAM&P) actions and tasks of theAnyMedia® Access System:

• Navis™ AnyMedia® Element Management System (NAM)The NAM can manage hundreds of network elements (NE) at a time.

• AnyMedia® Management Interface includes:

– AnyMedia® Access System Graphical System Interface Software (GSI)The GSI is managing one network element (NE) that means oneAnyMedia®ETSI V5 Shelf or LAG Shelf at a time.


Executive summary

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

1-20 363-211-585Issue 8, September 2008

Operations, administration, maintenance & provisioning...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

The OAM&P management actions are as follows:

• Configuration Management

• Fault Management

• Performance Management

• Security Management.

For a more detailed description of operations, administration, maintenance andprovisioning see the APOG partsNarrowband and ATM xDSL servicesand IP-basedservices.

Executive summary

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................363-211-585Issue 8, September 2008

1-21

2 2Applications

Overview...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Purpose

Alcatel-LucentAnyMedia® Access System offers various applications to meet thetelecommunications provider’s needs. This chapter details the different applicationssupported by theAnyMedia® Access System.

Contents

AnyMedia® Access System applications 2-2

Remote terminal applications 2-4

Extension via host/remote terminal application for large sites 2-6

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................363-211-585Issue 8, September 2008

2-1

AnyMedia® Access System applications...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

The figure below shows applications samples, co-located to the service node andremote.

Central office-site applications (indoor applications)

The intention of this application is to extend an existing central office switch, to offernew services by other providers in leased central office space, or to reduce the size ofnew switches. TheAnyMedia® Access System operates in a controlled environment.

Remote Office

POTS, ISDN BRA, ISDN PRA1, n x 64 kbps1, UVLL1, UGLL1, ALL or DLL

Central Office

Remote Office

SDH Fiber Ring

Local Exchange (LE)

(e.g. 5ESS<Super-

Non-SwitchedDigital Service

Node

AnyMediaAccessSystem

(DC or AC Rack)

ADM

2 Mbps

V5.x or V3


(DC or AC Rack orIndoor Cabinet)


(DC or AC Rack)

AnyTransport Network

2 Mbps

LL or ULL

ATMSwitch


(Outdoor Cabinet)

ADM

POTS / ISDN and/or xDSL

ADM

E3 or DS3 or STM-1/OC-3c

SDH Fiber Ring

ADM

E1 within IMA application

1 via HDSL







Applications

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

2-2 363-211-585Issue 8, September 2008

For the support of a wide range of subscribers, theAnyMedia® Access System isavailable in the following variants:

• The AnyMedia® ETSI V5 Shelf supports a medium number of subscriber lines

• The AnyMedia® LAG 4300 Shelf is designed for an increased demand ofsubscriber lines (large line size indoor applications).

Remote applications

In a remote application theAnyMedia® Access System is not located at the same siteas the service node. The system operates as a remote terminal of an LE or a leased lineservice node.

Remote indoor applications

• Switch consolidationThe intention of this application is to replace former small and medium size localexchanges byAnyMedia® Access Systems in order to reduce the number ofswitching nodes.The configuration for this application and the capacity is identical to theconfiguration for the CO-site application (for high density configuration up to threeshelves in a DC-powered ETSI rack.

• Extension of service areaThe service area of existing local exchanges can easily be extended by theapplication of theAnyMedia® Access System. New industrial or residential centerscan rapidly and cost-effectively be provided with telecommunication servicesindependent of the distance to the next local exchange.

Applications AnyMedia® Access System applications

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................363-211-585Issue 8, September 2008

2-3

Remote terminal applications...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Remote terminal interface

A remote terminal interface is a representation of a subtendingAnyMedia® AccessSystem acting as remote terminal connected to anAnyMedia® Access System acting ashost terminal. With this capability one can concentrate subscribers connected at one ormore remote terminals into one or more V5.2 interfaces located in the host terminal.

The figure below shows a remote terminal interface.

Remote terminal link

A remote terminal link represents an E1 link for the interconnection between the hostterminal and one remote terminal. As a remote terminal link is a standardized physicalE1 interface it can be transported via external transmission equipment like SDH rings.Up to 16 remote terminal links for the interconnection between the host terminal andone remote terminal are supported. The association of a remote terminal link to aremote or a host terminal interface is done via provisioning.

The figure below shows a remote terminal link.

E1 remote terminal link 1

E1 remote terminal link n

Remote terminal interface

Optionally more:

...

AnyMediaAccess System

acting as host terminal


acting as remote terminal

Applications

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

2-4 363-211-585Issue 8, September 2008

Local network interfaces of the host and the remote terminal

A host terminal as well as a remote terminal support in addition to the hostingcapability still locally connected network interfaces and subscribers. A local V5.2interface of a remote terminal can also be used to host subscribers into anothersubtending remote terminal. Not supported is cascading of remote subscribers, that is,subscribers can only be remoted once. The figure on the next page shows a networkelement overview for a remote terminal application. TheAnyMedia® Access Systemshown in the middle acts as a remote terminal for theAnyMedia® Access Systemshown above and as a host terminal for theAnyMedia® Access System shown below.

The figure below shows a network element overview for a remote terminal application.



...Local subscribers...

Remote terminals

...

leased line link,V3, V5.1...

V5.2

Local subscribers...

Remote terminals

Local


Local

Local

V5.2Local

...


V5.2

Local subscribers...

Remote terminals

Local Local

...


Applications Remote terminal applications

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................363-211-585Issue 8, September 2008

2-5

Extension via host/remote terminal application for large sites...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

The intention of remote terminal applications is to extend the number of narrowbandsubscribers into one single V5.2 interface towards the V5 switch. In this application itis possible to use oneAnyMedia® Access System as host terminal for a number ofAnyMedia® Access Systems acting as remote terminals. The services located in theremote terminals are concentrated (dynamic call concentration like V5.2) in the hostterminal and then transported in one or more V5.2 interfaces to the switch. With aconcentration ratio of up to 1:10 one host terminal can support up to 5000 subscribersvia a single V5.2 interface.

A system acting as remote terminal supports the following remote subscriber services:

• V5.2 switched services on POTS - POTS lines (PLNs) and virtual POTS lines(VPLNs)

• V5.2 switched services on ISDN BRA - ISDN lines (ILNs)

• Analog leased lines services (SPALLs) carried over semipermanent leased line viaV5.2 interface

• Digital leased lines services (SPDLLs) carried over semipermanent leased line viaV5.2 interface

• Remote operations channels (ROCs) for OAM&P:

– Remote semipermanent V5.2 ROC

– ROC via nailed-up remote link timeslot and leased line link transport in hostterminal

– ROC via nailed-up remote link timeslot and IP-routed transport in host terminal.

• In addition all services via local network interfaces like V5 switched services,leased line services (LLL), unstructured leased line services (ULL).

The figure below shows an applications sample for a remote terminal application.

Applications

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

2-6 363-211-585Issue 8, September 2008

POTS, ISDN,SPALL orSPDLL


Remote Office

POTS, ISDN BRA,ISDN PRA1,n x 64kbps 1, UVLL1,UGLL1, ALL, DLL,SPALL or SPDLL

Central Office

Remote Office

SDH FiberRing

LocalExchange (LE)

(e.g. 5ESS<Super-

Non-SwitchedDigital Service

Node


(Host termi-nal)

ADM

2 Mbps

V5.2


(Remote ter-minal )


(Remote ter-minal )

AnyTransportNetwork

2 Mbps

LL orULL

ATMSwitch


(Remote ter-minal )

ADM

POTS / ISDNand/or xDSL

ADM

E3 or DS3 or STM-1/OC-3c

SDH FiberRing

ADM

E1 within IMA application


1 via HDSL



POTS / ISDNand/or x DSL

2 Mbps

Remoteterminallinks

Applications Extension via host/remote terminal application for largesites

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................363-211-585Issue 8, September 2008

2-7

3 3Housing configurations

Overview...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Purpose

The applications and services of Alcatel-LucentAnyMedia® Access System aresupported by different housing configurations. This chapter details these differenthousing configurations.

Contents

Housing configurations 3-2

DC-powered rack forAnyMedia® LAG 1900 Shelves 3-3

DC-powered racks forAnyMedia® ETSI V5 Shelves 3-7

AnyMedia® LAG 4300 Shelf configurations 3-12

Single AnyMedia® ETSI V5 Shelf 3-18

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................363-211-585Issue 8, September 2008

3-1

Housing configurations...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Overview

The housing configuration of theAnyMedia® Access System depends on theapplication (see“AnyMedia® Access System applications” (p. 2-2)).

The following housing configurations are available:

• DC-powered racks (ETSI-based or 19”) for up to threeAnyMedia® LAG 1900Shelves orAnyMedia® ETSI V5 Shelves

• AnyMedia® LAG 4300 Shelf configuration in an indoor cabinet

– equipped with twoAnyMedia® LAG 4300 Shelves and twoAnyMedia® ETSIV5 Shelves or

– equipped with twoAnyMedia® LAG 4300 Shelves or

– equipped with oneAnyMedia® LAG 4300 Shelf

• SingleAnyMedia® ETSI V5 Shelf for extending the capacity of the defaultDC-powered rack configuration.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

3-2 363-211-585Issue 8, September 2008

DC-powered rack forAnyMedia® LAG 1900 Shelves...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Overview

The DC-powered rack for up to threeAnyMedia® LAG 1900 Shelves is compatiblewith ETSI standard. It is available as rack version without doors, side and rear panelsor in a cabinet version including door, side and rear panels. At delivery it is equippedwith:

• A rack fuse panel

• All internal cabling, prepared for inserting up to threeAnyMedia® LAG 1900Shelves.

• Depending on the ordered rack type, it may include a passive clock distributionpanel (PCD) and an alarm connection panel (ACP).

EachAnyMedia® LAG 1900 Shelf requires a baffle mounted below the shelf and a fanunit above the shelf.

For further details see the Ordering Guide.

Front view

The picture below shows the front view of the DC-powerd rack forAnyMedia® LAG1900 shelves. In this example threeAnyMedia® LAG 1900 shelves are equipped.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................363-211-585Issue 8, September 2008

3-3

2198

mm

1874

mm

2052

mm

3 m

m

178

mm

Housing configurations DC-powered rack for AnyMedia® LAG 1900 Shelves

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

3-4 363-211-585Issue 8, September 2008

Rack fuse panel and connection panel

The subrack for fuse panel and connection panel at the top of the rack includes(depending on the rack version):

• One passive clock distribution panel (PCD) for distributing the external clock to theAnyMediaLAG 1900 Shelves. By using special kits for simplex station clock or forduplex office clock (including a second PCD), both clock types are supported. Theclock can be terminated via a balanced input (120 Ohms) or via an unbalancedcoax input (75 Ohms).

• An alarm connection panel (ACP) for wire-wrap connection, to which the alarminputs/outputs of theAnyMedia® LAG 1900 Shelves are connected. This enablesthe customer to connect his own discrete alarm inputs/outputs to theAnyMedia®

LAG 1900 Shelves.

• Two circuit breaker blocks for 4×2 circuit breakers

– The first three circuit breakers (A-feeders) and the last three circuit breakers(B-feeders) are equipped (30 A) and used for connecting the -48 V DC inputpower feeders to theAnyMedia® LAG 1900 Shelves (shelf 1-A, shelf 2-A, shelf3-A – shelf 3-B, shelf 2-B, shelf 1-B). Two circuit breakers in the middle(currently not equipped) are reserved for future use.

• Terminals for connecting the duplex external power and the external ringingvoltage.

AnyMedia ® LAG 1900 Shelves

For details on theAnyMedia® LAG 1900 Shelf seeChapter 4, “Shelf types and theircomponents”.

Baffles

Heat baffles, which dissipate the thermal emissions generated by each shelf, arerequired below each shelf so the thermal emissions from adjacent shelves do not affectany shelf’s performance.

Fan unit

One fan unit is required above eachAnyMedia® LAG 1900 Shelf.

Internal cabling

The internal cabling connects theAnyMedia® LAG 1900 Shelf to the rack connectionpanel. The following connections already exist as factory settings:

• Fused -48 V DC input power connections from circuit breakers to theAnyMedia®

LAG 1900 Shelves for two -48 V DC input power feeders.

• If an alarm connection panel (ACP) is equipped, all the alarm inputs and outputs ofthe AnyMedia® LAG 1900 Shelves are connected to the alarm connection panelACP (wire wrap connections) enabling an individual customer-specific put throughof the alarms.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................363-211-585Issue 8, September 2008

3-5

Note: Not included are the internal clock cables because they depend on the clock type.They are included in special orderable kits.

External cabling

The external cabling connects the customers’ equipment to theAnyMedia® AccessSystem. The following connections have to be made (if applicable):

• a/b cabling from the application packs (POTS, ISDN, ATM xDSL, VDSL) to themain distribution frame (MDF).

• Cabling from the test application pack TAP10x to the main distribution frame(MDF), if the pack is equipped.

• E1 cabling from the E1 connectors to the digital distribution frame (DDF).

• ATM feeder cabling from the Rx/Tx connectors of the AFM pack to the digitaldistribution frame (DDF) or to the optical distribution frame (ODF) or to anexternal add/drop multiplexer or to/from the next/previousAnyMedia® LAG 1900Shelf in the daisy-chain, if required.

• 100Base-T and/or GbE uplink cabling from the uplink connectors on the IPFM tothe IP network.

• Connecting the customer’s -48 V DC power sources to the termination blocksbesides the circuit breakers in the rack fuse panel.

• Connecting the customer’s ringing source to the rack fuse panel if applicable.

• Connecting the customer’s clock source to the input connector of the passive clockdistribution panel (PCD).

• Connecting 10BaseT LAN cables from the customer’s external 10BaseT LANequipment, for example mini hub or PC LAN card for the graphical systeminterface (GSI) and/or theNavis™ AnyMedia® Element Management System(NAM), to the LAN/Ethernet connectors on the shelf connection panel and/or theAFM or IPFM.

• Connecting the serial cables from the graphical system interface (GSI) and/or theNavis™ AnyMedia® Element Management System (NAM) directly or viamodem/diffusion box to the serial connector on the CIU and/or the AFM.

• Connecting the customer’s alarming equipment (for example signal lamps, doorcontacts) to the ACP.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

3-6 363-211-585Issue 8, September 2008

DC-powered racks forAnyMedia® ETSI V5 Shelves...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Overview

DC-powerd racks are designed mostly for central office-site applications (CO), thatmeans indoor applications collocated with the local exchange (LE), or for remoteindoor applications, for example switch consolidation.

DC-powered racks (ETSI-based or 19″) are available for housing up to threeAnyMedia® ETSI V5 Shelves. Depending on the rack type, they will be delivered with:

• A completely equipped subrack for fuse panel and connection panel (RFCP).

• All internal cabling, prepared for inserting up to three ETSI V5 Shelves.

The use of a power filter unit (PFU) in the shelf is mandatory. The PFU has to beinserted into the upper right 1N-sized slot position of theAnyMedia® ETSI V5 Shelf.

Each ETSI V5 Shelf requires a baffle mounted below the shelf and a fan unit abovethe shelf.

For further details see the Ordering Guide.

Front view of DC-powered rack for ETSI V5 Shelves

The figure below shows one example of the front view of a DC-powered rackequipped with threeAnyMedia® shelves and with fan unit kits.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................363-211-585Issue 8, September 2008

3-7

Lucent Technologies

01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 131 2 141 15 16

1 1 2 3 421A2 D2 F2 H2 J3

J2

J1 K1H1G1F1E1D1C1B1A1A B C D E F G H J

SC ALARM OUT ALARM INRTU

LAN

-4

8A

TA

P

E1

DO

WN

E1

DO

WN

E1

UP

E1

UP

GP

C

RIN

G0

RIN

G1

ALTPWR

-4

8B

J1F3F2F1

L-N+

+ + + + + + + + + + L-N+

- 48A - 48BF1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8 F9 F10

A B C D E F G

A B C D E F G123456789

1011121314151617

123456789

1011121314151617

23

1819202122

23

1819202122

1

3

4

5

2

01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 131 2 141 15 16

1 1 2 3 421A2 D2 F2 H2 J3

J2



LAN

-4

8A

TAP

E1

DO

WN

E1

DO

WN

E1

UP

E1

UP

GP

C

RIN

G0

RIN

G1

ALTPWR

-4

8B

J1F3F2F1

01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 131 2 141 15 16

1 1 2 3 421A2 D2 F2 H2 J3

J2



LAN

-4

8A

TAP

E1

DO

WN

E1

DO

WN

E1

UP

E1

UP

GP

C

RIN

G0

RIN

G1

ALTPWR

-4

8B

J1F3F2F1

Lucent Technologies

Lucent Technologies

Lucent TechnologiesFAULT

FAULT

FAULT

O

L

TAG

E

J4

BA

J3

J2

J1

-48 OU

T

-+

-48 IN-+

1 2J111

F211

J221

RFU1J111

F211

J221

J111

F211

J221

RFU3RFU2

22

00

mm

600 mm

Baffle for shelf 1

AnyMedia shelf 1(optional)

Shelf connection panel(SCP)

Fan unit 1 (FU1)

Baffle for shelf 2

AnyMedia shelf 2(additionally orderable)


Fan unit 2 (FU2)

Baffle for shelf 3

AnyMedia shelf 3(additionally orderable)


Fan unit 3 (FU3)

Subrack for fuse paneland connection panel(RFCP) with ringing filterunits (RFU)

Rack fuse panel (RFP) with circuitbreakers F1 to F10 for -48V/fans

Rack connection panel (RCP)Clock distribution field (CDF)

Fan filter field (FFCU)

Fan filter and clockdistribution unit

(FFCU)

Depth 30 cm

Housing configurations DC-powered racks for AnyMedia® ETSI V5 Shelves

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

3-8 363-211-585Issue 8, September 2008

Subrack for fuse panel and connection panel

The subrack for fuse panel and connection panel at the top of the rack includes:

• A rack fuse panel (RFP) with two circuit breaker blocks for 6 and 4 circuitbreakers in the upper row and a T-rail for up to 3 ringing filter units (RFU) in thelower row.

– The first circuit breaker block with 4 circuit breakers equipped (3×25 A /1×2 A) in the upper row is used for connecting the -48 V DC input powerfeeder to theAnyMedia® shelves and to the fan units via the fan filter andclock distribution unit (FFCU); 2 circuit breakers (currently not equipped) arereserved for future use.

– The second circuit breaker block with 4 additional circuit breakers (3 x 25 A /1 x 2 A) in the upper row can be used for connecting a second -48 V DCinput power to the shelves and to the fan units if two -48 V DC input powerfeeders are used.

– Depending on the rack type, the T-rail in the subrack is equipped with threeRFUs.

• A rack connection panel (RCP) for wire-wrap connection, to which the alarminputs/outputs of theAnyMedia® shelves and fan units are connected. This enablesthe customer to connect his own discrete alarm inputs/outputs to theAnyMedia®

shelves.

• A combined fan filter and clock distribution unit (FFCU) for filtering and feedingthe 3 fan units (FU) at maximum. Also equipped are 5 clock connectors for clockdistribution/synchronization, to which the station clock (SC) connectors of the 3AnyMedia® shelves are connected.

AnyMedia ® ETSI V5 Shelves

For details on theAnyMedia® ETSI V5 Shelf seeChapter 4, “Shelf types and theircomponents”.

Baffles

Heat baffles, which dissipate the thermal emissions generated by each shelf, are placedbetween the shelves so the thermal emissions from adjacent shelves do not affect anyshelf’s performance.

Fan unit

One fan unit is required for eachAnyMedia® ETSI V5 Shelf.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................363-211-585Issue 8, September 2008

3-9

Internal cabling

The internal cabling connects theAnyMedia® ETSI V5 Shelves to the rack connectionpanel. The following connections already exist as factory settings:

• Fused -48 V DC input power connections from circuit breakers to theAnyMedia®

ETSI V5 Shelves for one or two -48 V DC input power feeders.

• Fused ringing input voltage connections (1 A) from circuit breakers to theAnyMedia® ETSI V5 Shelves (depends on rack type).

• Station clock connections from theAnyMedia® ETSI V5 Shelves to the clockdistribution panel. Also included is one termination connector for 120Ω.

• Fused -48 V DC input power connections (2 A) via one fan filter power cablefrom circuit breakers to the fan filter and clock distribution unit (FFCU) to feed fanunits for one or two -48 V DC input power feeders.

• Y-cables for connecting the fan units to the -48 V DC via the fan filter and clockdistribution unit and for alarming to the RCP.

• All the alarm inputs and outputs of theAnyMedia® ETSI V5 Shelves are connectedto the rack connection panel (wire wrap connections) enabling an individualcustomer-specific put through of the alarms.

External cabling

The external cabling connects the customers’ equipment to theAnyMedia® AccessSystem. The following connections have to be made (if applicable):

• a/b cabling from the application packs (POTS, ISDN, ADSL) to the maindistribution frame (MDF).

• Cabling from the test application pack TAP10x to the main distribution frame(MDF), if the pack is equipped.

• E1 cabling from the E1 connectors to the digital distribution frame (DDF).

• ATM feeder cabling from the Rx/Tx connectors of the AFM pack to the digitaldistribution frame (DDF) or to the optical distribution frame (ODF) or to anexternal add/drop multiplexer or to/from the next/previousAnyMedia® ETSI V5Shelf in the daisy-chain, if required.

• Connecting the customer’s -48 V DC power sources to the upper circuit breakers inthe rack fuse panel.

• Connecting the customer’s ringing source to the lower circuit breakers in the rackfuse panel.

• Connecting the customer’s station clock source to the input connector of the clockdistribution panel.

• Connecting of 10BaseT LAN cables from the customer’s external 10BaseT LANequipment, for example mini hub or PC LAN card for the graphical systeminterface (GSI) and/or theNavis™ AnyMedia® Element Management System(NAM), to the LAN/Ethernet connectors on the shelf connection panel and/or theAFM pack.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

3-10 363-211-585Issue 8, September 2008

• Connecting of the serial cables from the graphical system interface (GSI) and/or theNavis™ AnyMedia® Element Management System (NAM) directly or viamodem/diffusion box to the serial connector on the CIU and/or the AFM.

• Connecting the customer’s alarming equipment (for example signal lamps, doorcontacts) to the rack connection panel.

Important! For a/b cabling and for the cabling of the TAP10x to the external maindistribution frame (MDF) pre-manufactured cables have to be ordered separately.Also for E1 cabling to the external digital distribution frame (DDF)pre-manufactured cables have to be ordered separately. The other connections haveto be made completely in the field by the installer and/or the customer.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................363-211-585Issue 8, September 2008

3-11

AnyMedia® LAG 4300 Shelf configurations...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Overview

The AnyMedia® LAG 4300 Shelf configurations have been designed to provide largeline size for inexpensive NB services, although they support ATM xDSL services andIP-based services as well. The configuration with twoAnyMedia® LAG 4300 Shelvesin a cabinet, is able to support a total of 2752 NB subscriber lines if an externalringing generator is used. If a higher number of lines is required, the cabinet mayadditionally be equipped with two independentAnyMedia® ETSI V5 Shelves. Forfurther details on capacity refer to the APOG partsNarrowband and ATM xDSLservicesand IP-based services.

Cabinet

The AnyMedia® LAG 4300 Shelves are housed in an EMI protected indoor cabinet. Itcontains two front access frames. Depending on the selected configuration the cabinetmay be equipped

• with two AnyMedia® LAG 4300 Shelves and twoAnyMedia® ETSI V5 Shelves(back-to back) or

• with two AnyMedia® LAG 4300 Shelves (back-to back) or

• with oneAnyMedia® LAG 4300 Shelf, already prepared for installing a secondone.

The cabinet is 1829 mm high, 760 mm wide and 594 mm deep (including the doors).

The cabinet includes:

• At the front side the power distribution frame with up to 10 power filter units(PFU520) . The PFUs are feeding the shelves as follows:

– PFU520 1-4:AnyMedia® LAG 4300 Shelf 1

– PFU520 5-6:AnyMedia® ETSI V5 Shelf 2

– PFU520 5-6:AnyMedia® ETSI V5 Shelf 4

– PFU520 9-12:AnyMedia® LAG 4300 Shelf 3.

• The rear side of the cabinet contains the distribution frame with the followingunits:

– 2 PCD520 (Passive Clock Distribution)

– Up to 3 RFU520 (Ringing Filter Unit)

– 2 ACP520 (Alarm Connection Panel).

• Up to 2 AnyMedia® LAG 4300 Shelves

• Up to 2 AnyMedia® ETSI V5 Shelves

• Up to 2 fan units.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

3-12 363-211-585Issue 8, September 2008

Power distribution

Power is connected to the backplane of theAnyMedia® shelves through up to ten PFUs520, which are housed in the power distribution frame.

• Each PFU supplies power to the LAG 4300 Shelves/ETSI V5 Shelves through two20 A breakers.

• Each PFU has two redundant power inputs.

• Each PFU contains OR-ing diodes which ensure uninterrupted system operationeven if one input feeder fails.

• Since each input feeder must support the full output load if the other one fails, eachshould be rated at 40 A.

• As the power distribution frame houses up to ten PFUs, up to twenty 40 A feedersmay be connected to the power distribution frame, depending on the systemconfiguration.

Front view and rear view of the cabinet

The figure below shows the front and rear view of the cabinet in a maximumconfiguration with twoAnyMedia® LAG 4300 Shelves and twoAnyMedia® ETSI V5Shelves inserted.

Housing configurations AnyMedia® LAG 4300 Shelf configurations

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................363-211-585Issue 8, September 2008

3-13

Front view and side view of the cabinet

The following figure shows theAnyMedia® LAG 4300 Shelf configuration; front viewof one bay and side view of both bays.

1 2 3 4 5 6 9 10 11 12

1

1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

P

2

I/OI/O

I/O

I/OI/O

CIU

CIU

CO

MD

AC

CO

MD

AC

CO

MD

AC

CO

MD

AC

AP

(AFM

)

AP

(AFM

)

AP

AP

AP

AP

AP

AP

AP

AP

AP

AP

AP

AP

AP

AP

AP

AP

AP

RG

RG

3

4 5

2 2

2

26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 3435 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43

AP

(AFM

)

AP

(AFM

)

AP

AP

AP

AP

AP

AP

AP

AP

AP

AP

AP

AP

AP

AP

AP

AP

AP

AP

AP

AP

AP

AP

AnyMediaLAG Supper row

helf 1

AnyMediaLAG Slower row

helf 1

AnyMediaMainshelf

shelf 2

1

1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

P

2

I/OI/O

I/O

I/OI/O

CIU

CIU

CO

MD

AC

CO

MD

AC

CO

MD

AC

CO

MD

AC

AP

(AFM

)

AP

(AFM

)

AP

AP

AP

AP

AP

AP

AP

AP

AP

AP

AP

AP

AP

AP

AP

AP

AP

RG

RG

3

4 5

2 2

2

26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 3435 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43

AP

(AFM

)

AP

(AFM

)

AP

AP

AP

AP

AP

AP

AP

AP

AP

AP

AP

AP

AP

AP

AP

AP

AP

AP

AP

AP

AP

AP

Connector panel (behind air deflector) Connector panel (behind air deflector)

AnyMediaLAG Supper row

helf 3

AnyMediaLAG Shelf 3lower row

AnyMediaMainshelf

shelf 4

PCD1

RFU1 RFU2 RFU3

ACP1 ACP2

PCD2

Front view Rear View

Power distribution frame Distribution frame

41 2 65 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 1516 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 243 41 2 65 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 1516 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 243

2525

IO_H

DLC

IO_H

DLC

IO_E1

p

IO_E1

IO_E1

IO_E1

IO_E1

1 2 1 1 2 3 4

IO_H

DLC

IO_H

DLC

IO_E1

p

IO_E1

IO_E1

IO_E1

IO_E1

1 2 1 1 2 3 4

PFU

PFU

PFU

PFU

PFU

PFU

PFU

PFU

PFU

PFU

Cable trough andConnector field (behind cable trough)

Fan unit andConnector field (behind fan unit)

Fan unit andConnector field (behind fan unit)

Cable trough andConnector field (behind cable trough)


...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

3-14 363-211-585Issue 8, September 2008

AP

AP

AP

AP

AP

AP

AP

AP

AP

AP

AP

AP

CO

MD

AC

AP

AP

AP

CO

MD

AC

CIU

I/O

1 2

4 5

2 3

P 1

I/OI/O I/O

I/O I/O

AP

AP

AP

AP

AP

AP

AP

AP

AP

AP

AP

AP

AP

AP

AP

AP

AP

AP

AP

AP

Connector field

AnyM

edia

LA

G 4

300 S

helf

(shelf

1)

Front view

(AF

M)

(AF

M)

(AF

M)

(AF

M)

40 41 42 43

AP

AP

AP

AP

RG

RG

25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 1112 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24

AP

AP

AP

AP

Side view

Cabinet bays

Bay alarmsummary LED1

Bay alarmsummary LED2

Power distribution frame

Air deflector

Fan unit

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 1112 13 14 15 16

AP

AP

AP

AP

(A

FM

)A

P (

AF

M)

AP

AP

AP

AP

AP

AP

AP

AP

CO

MD

AC

AP

AP

AP

CO

MD

AC

CIU

1 2

Shelf connection panelHD

LCH

DLC

IO_P

IO_1

IO_2

IO_3

IO_4

PF

U

1 2 1 1 2 3 4

AnyM

edia

ET

SI

V5 S

helf

(shelf

2)

Shelf

4

Any

Med

ia E

TS

I V5

shel

f

(sin

gle

row

shelf)

Shelf

2

Any

Med

ia E

TS

I V5

shel

f

(sin

gle

row

shelf)

Shelf

3

AnyM

edia

LA

G 4

300 S

helf

(double

row

shelf)

Shelf

1

AnyM

edia

LA

G 4

300 S

helf

(double

row

shelf)

Powerdistribution frame

Distributionframe

(PFU520) (PCD, RFU,ACP)

(12 slots for PFU520)


...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................363-211-585Issue 8, September 2008

3-15


The AnyMedia® LAG 4300 Shelf includes a double high backplane supporting twocard cages. Both rows together provide up to 43 slots for application packs. While theNB packs in both rows form one single NB subsystem, and the IP APs in both rowsform also one single IP-based subsystem, the BB subsystems in both rows areindependent from each other.

• At the upper row of the LAG 4300 Shelf is space for up to 6 E1 cards, one CIUand two COMDACs. Furthermore there is space for up to 19 application packs. IfIPFMs are inserted in the upper row, no AFMs may be used, because they requireinsertion into the same slots.

• At the lower row of the LAG 4300 Shelf is space for up to 24 application packs.There is no restriction whether narrowband or xDSL packs or IP packs are inserted.

One of the two connector fields of theAnyMedia® LAG 4300 Shelf resides at the topof the upper row behind an air deflector. This connector field contains connectors forinternal and external cabling, e.g. for E1, LAN, station clock, alarms, remote test units,TAP10x, and ringing connections.

Between the upper and the lower row of theAnyMedia® LAG 4300 Shelf a secondconnector field is located behind the fan unit which contains the power connectors,providing the internal power connections from the PFUs to the LAG 4300 Shelves.

For more details on theAnyMedia® LAG 4300 Shelf refer to“AnyMedia® LAG 4300Shelf and components” (p. 4-11).

AnyMedia ® ETSI V5 Shelf

For details on theAnyMedia® ETSI V5 Shelf see“AnyMedia® ETSI V5 Shelf andcomponents” (p. 4-18).

Fan unit kit

The cabinet contains up to two fan units, one on each side of the cabinet. They areinstalled between the upper and the lower row of theAnyMedia® LAG 4300 Shelves.

External cabling

The external cabling connects the customers’ equipment to the cabinet. The followingconnections have to be made:

• a/b cabling from the application packs (POTS, ISDN, ATM xDSL, ) VDSL to themain distribution frame (MDF).

• The TAP10x cabling can be made via MDF using a normal a/b-cable from theTAP10x and a TAP-B cable from the TAP connector J106 and cross-connectingboth cables on the MDF. Otherwise a short 4-wire TAP cable can be used whichconnects the TAP10x directly to the TAP connector J106.

• E1 cabling from the E1 connectors of the connector field to the digital distributionframe (DDF).


...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

3-16 363-211-585Issue 8, September 2008

• E3 cabling from the Rx/Tx connectors of the AFM pack to the digital distributionframe (DDF) or to an external multiplexer or to/from the next/previousAnyMedia®

shelf in the E3 daisy-chain, if required.

• FE uplink and/or GbE uplink cabling from the uplink connectors on the IPFMtowards the IP network

• Wiring the customer’s -48 V DC power sources to up to 10 PFU520.

• Connecting the customer’s ringing source to up to three RFU520.

• Connecting the customer’s external clock source to up to two PCD520.

• Connecting of 10BaseT LAN cables from the customer’s external 10BaseT LANequipment, for example mini hub or PC LAN card for the graphical systeminterface (GSI) and/or theNavis™ AnyMedia® Element Management System(NAM), to the LAN/Ethernet connectors on the connector field and/or the AFMand/or the IPFM.

• Connecting of 100Base-T LAN cables from the customer’s external 100Base-TLAN equipment to the LAN/Ethernet connectors on the IPFMs.

• Connecting of the serial cables from the graphical system interface (GSI) and/or theNavis™ AnyMedia® Element Management System (NAM) directly or viamodem/diffusion box to the serial connector on the CIU and/or the AFM.

• Connecting the customer’s alarming equipment (for example signal lamps, doorcontacts) to the ACP.

Internal cabling

All internal cabling for the selected configuration is already included in the cabinet.The installer has only to do the external cabling as described above. Moreover theconfiguration equipped with oneAnyMedia® LAG 4300 Shelf already includes theinternal cabling for the secondAnyMedia® LAG 4300 Shelf in order to facilitate asystem upgrade.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................363-211-585Issue 8, September 2008

3-17

Single AnyMedia® ETSI V5 Shelf...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

For extending the capacity of the default DC-powered rack configuration a singleAnyMedia® shelf (loose) can be delivered (see Ordering Guide).


...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

3-18 363-211-585Issue 8, September 2008

4 4Shelf types and theircomponents

Overview...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Purpose

This section provides physical and functional descriptions of the shelf types which areused to accomodate the circuit packs and application packs (APs) of theAnyMedia®

Access System and their components:

• AnyMedia® LAG 1900 Shelf and its components

• AnyMedia® LAG 4300 Shelf and its components

• AnyMedia® ETSI V5 Shelf and its components

• AnyMedia® LAG 200 Shelf and its components.

For a short description of the circuit packs and application packs, their functions andfeatures, sizes, functional block diagrams, and faceplate characteristics refer to theData Sheet Book363-211-251.

Contents

AnyMedia® LAG 1900 Shelf and components 4-2


AnyMedia® ETSI V5 Shelf and components 4-18


...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................363-211-585Issue 8, September 2008

4-1

AnyMedia® LAG 1900 Shelf and components...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Overview

The AnyMedia® LAG 1900 Shelf supports simultaneously TDM-based narrowbandsubsystems, ATM xDSL subsystems, and IP-based subsystems. This capability is called“Triple Technology”. Each of the subsystems can work in duplex mode, namely viaduplex COMDACs, AFMs, and IPFMs.

The AnyMedia® LAG 1900 Shelf provides up to 14 slots for accommodating APs (in apure TDM-based narrowband application).

The IP-based applications require up to two IP forwarding modules (IPFMs) inaddition to the COMDAC(s) and CIU. For further details on capacity refer to the“System Planning and Engineering” chapters.

This section describes the following aspects of theAnyMedia® LAG 1900 Shelf:

• Physical description and dimensions

• AnyMedia® LAG 1900 Shelf configuration example

• AnyMedia® LAG 1900 Shelf components

• Functional block diagram

• AnyMedia® LAG 1900 Shelf backplane.

Physical description and dimensions

The AnyMedia® LAG 1900 Shelf can be used for 19” as well as for ETSI racks.

It consists of a metal mechanical structure that

• serves to guide and fasten packs and to locate and mount a multi-layer backplanewith high-speed links for “Triple Technology”

• allows mounting into supporting structures such as racks and

• provides an interface for internal and external connections.

The following figure shows the dimensions of theAnyMedia® LAG 1900 Shelf (viewfrom left side).

Shelf types and their components

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

4-2 363-211-585Issue 8, September 2008

The assembly consists of:

• A metal housing for 1N-sized packs in the upper row of slots (for example IO-E1s,RGUs or RFU, PFUs)

• A metal housing for 3N-sized packs in the lower row of slots (for exampleCOMDACs, AFMs, IPFMs, APs).1N is 96 mm, 3N is 336 mm (Alcatel-Lucent One NS Hardware Standard)For details on theAnyMedia® LAG 1900 Shelf arrangement see“AnyMedia® LAG1900 Shelf configuration example” (p. 4-4).

• Top and bottom metal card guides

• A fully connectorized multi-layer backplane with high-speed links

• A rear cover to support EMC shielding and safety

• A conductive front cover with EMC shielding

• Top and bottom EMC screens

• Faceplate cable routing for a/b pairs

Fan unit

1N sized packs

3N sized packs

Air inlet

604

mm

230 mm

96m

m

500

mm

EMC shielding for 1N sized packs

EMC shielding top

EMC shielding bottom

Baffle

Front cover

Rear cover

Backplane

336

mm

64 mm


260 mm

Width: 440 mm

Shelf types and their components AnyMedia® LAG 1900 Shelf and components

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................363-211-585Issue 8, September 2008

4-3

AnyMedia ® LAG 1900 Shelf configuration example

The AnyMedia® LAG 1900 Shelf is arranged to accommodate seven 1N-sized packs inthe upper row of slots and seventeen 3N-sized packs in the lower row of slots.

On the right hand side of the upper row of slots the shelf connection panel is located.The cables plug into the backplane interface connectors which are accessible at theshelf connection panel and route horizontally to the right side of theAnyMedia® LAG1900 Shelf into the cable duct of the rack.

A cable trough is located at the bottom of theAnyMedia® LAG 1900 Shelf. The a/bcables plug into the faceplate connectors of the application packs and route verticallydown into the cable trough and horizontally to the left side of the LAG shelf into thecable duct of the rack.

AnyMedia ® LAG 1900 Shelf components

The AnyMedia® LAG 1900 Shelf provides slots to support simultaneously (“TripleTechnology”):

• TDM-based narrowband services with simplex or duplex COMDAC(s)

• ATM xDSL services with simplex or duplex AFM(s)

• IP-based services with simplex or duplex IPFM(s).

1 2 03 04 05 06

AF

M o

r A

P

IPF

M o

r A

P

AF

M o

r A

P

CO

MD

AC

08 09 10 11 12 13

AP

AP

AP

CO

MD

AC

1 2

IO_E

1P

IO_E

1

141

IPF

M o

r A

P

CIU

2 1 110

Cable trough and air inlet (baffle)

PF

U

PFUIO-E1IO-E1P

AP-4AP-3AP-2AP-1CIUCOM-2COM-1 AP-11AP-10AP-9AP-8AP-7AP-6AP-5 AP-14AP-13AP-12

Fan unit and air outlet

RG

U

RGU

07

AP

RG

U

PF

U

PFURGU

0 0

AP

AP

AP

AP

AP

AP

IO_E

1

RED-FAULT

GREEN-ACTIVE


...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

4-4 363-211-585Issue 8, September 2008

For all subsystems in common, the following external and internal power and ringingsupply is provided:

• Two ringing generators RGUs (2-slots wide packs) or one ringing filter unit (RFU)

• Two power filter units PFUs (2-slots wide packs) support the internal -48V busseswith redundant powering.

The TDM-based narrowband subsystem includes the following components (thenumber of AP slots depends on the configuration; here a narrowband-only system isconsidered):

• Up to three E1 interface units IO_E1 (one for E1 protection)

• One or two common data and control COMDAC(s)

• One communication interface unit CIU

• Up to fourteen slots for application packs (APs)

• Optionally one test application pack (TAP) in an AP slot.

The ATM xDSL subsystem includes the following components (the number of AP slotsdepends on the configuration; here a ATM xDSL-only system is considered):

• One or two AFMs which reside in AP slot 3 (preferred AFM slot) and AP slot 4(AFM protection slot)

• Up to thirteen APs in simplex AFM mode, up to 12 APs in duplex AFM mode

The IP-based subsystem includes the following components (the number of AP slotsdepends on the configuration; here an only IP-based system is considered):

• One or two common data and control COMDAC(s)

• One communication interface unit CIU

• One or two IP forwarding modules (IPFMs) which reside in AP slots 1 (preferredIPFM slot) and 2 (IPFM protection slot)

• Up to thirteen APs in simplex IPFM mode, up to 12 APs in duplex IPFM modeNote that the ICAPs are only supported in slots 3-14.Do not insert ICAPS intoslots 1-2!

• Optionally one test application pack (TAP) in an AP slot.

AnyMedia ® LAG 1900 Shelf functional block diagram

The functional block diagram shows the combination of the different packs:

• Common data and control (COMDAC)

• Communication interface unit (CIU)

• E1 interface units (IO_E1)

• IP forwarding modules (IPFM)

• ATM feeder multiplexer (AFM)

• Application packs (IP AP and BB AP).

The following figure shows the functional block diagram of theAnyMedia® AccessSystem.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................363-211-585Issue 8, September 2008

4-5

Backplane

The backplane of theAnyMedia® LAG 1900 Shelf assembly consists of a multi-layerprinted wiring board with high-speed links for “Triple Technology”, connectors for allpacks and a series of connectors for external interfaces, including power and ringinginputs.

COMDAC

AP

Processor Mem-ory & Control

ComplexInterface for

GSI/EMS

Relay Matrix for Test Support

Misc.Alarm

Detectors

CIU

ProcessorMemory &

ControlComplex

Full AccessTSI for Call Processing

System Timing

PowerModule

TransmissionBandwidth

Communicationsand Control

TransmissionBandwidth


Con

trol

xDS

L A

P C

ontro

l or

Ana

log

Sig

-na

ling

Fun

ctio

ns

Communications and Control

a/b Pairs for xDSL over POTS/ISDN

Alarm Output

StationClock

PowerModule

Ringing

OAM&P Data

AFM

Transmis-sion Band-width for

ATM xDSL APs only

Sync Test Access

Sync

Communi-cations and Control for ATM xDSL APs only

ATM

feed

er

Ext Sync

IP AP (Voice and Data)

Eth

erne

t Pro

cess

ing

and

Con

trol F

unct

ions

IPFM

Transmis-sion Band-width for IP APs only

Communi-cations and Control for IP APs only

To E

ther

net N

odes

a/b Pairs for VoIP

Ringing (for combo APs only)

TDM Spokes

Con

trol IP

Spokes

TestBus

AP

Con

trol

AP

Con

trol o

r A

nalo

g S

igna

ling

Fun

ctio

ns

a/b Pairs for POTS

ISDN

Ringing

Con

trol

Cel

l Sw

itch

Con

trol

L2 S

witc

h

TestBus

Only for LAG Shelves

IO_E1


E1

E1

E1

E1

PowerModule

To E

1 Fa

cilit

y

Narrowband a/b pairs in (POTS or ISDN)Pure ATM xDSL packs with internal splitters only

For combo APs only

IO_HDLC

HDLC ControllerPower Module

Communications and Control

Memory

Not for LAG Shelves


...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

4-6 363-211-585Issue 8, September 2008

Important! The interfacing with the external subscriber lines is done via theapplication packs’ faceplate connectors and not via the backplane.

The following figure indicates the corresponding topologies of the TDM, ATM, and IPtransmission and communication highways.

Note that not all backplane links are shown here.

The common part of the transmission and communication highways on the backplanesupports the following features and functions:

• A buddy bus in the 1N area allowing to apply 1 for 2 protection for IO packs

• Two buddy buses in the 3N area spanning AP slots 3 through 8 and 9 through 14,respectively. Both allow to implement a 1 for 5 protection scheme for APs

• Cross-couples between slots 1 and 2, 3 and 4, 5 and 6, 7 and 8, 9 and 10, 11 and12, 13 and 14, respectively. Those cross-couples can be used for implementing forinstance duplex protection schemes of APs

• All lines for internal powering and ringing

• Wiring for facility and equipment testing

• Header for mainshelf inventory.

AP

/IPF

M/IP

AF

M

ATM Bus 0 plus I2C Bus

ATM Bus 1 (not used)

CO

MD

AC

1

CO

MD

AC

2

CIU

AP

/IPF

M/IP

AF

M

AP

/AF

M

AP

/AF

M

AP

AP

AP

AP

AP

AP

AP

AP

AP

AP

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14

GbE Spokes from IPFM 0

GbE Spokes from IPFM 1

TDM Spokes from COMDAC 1

TDM Spokes from COMDAC 2

2 Buddy Buses: 1 for 5 protection

Buddy Bus: 1 for 2 protection

Cross Couples b/w adjacent packs


...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................363-211-585Issue 8, September 2008

4-7

Properties of the TDM highway (NB part of the backplane) include the following:

• Duplex star-type topology.

• Hubs of the 2 sets of PCM spokes are the COMDAC slots 1 and 2. The availablecapacity at each AP slot and the IO slots is 128 (8 bit) timeslots.

• Available capacity at the CIU slot is 64 timeslots.

• Each spoke includes a UART for point-to-point communication between the(active) COMDAC and the AP, IO pack or the CIU.

Properties of the ATM highway (BB part of the backplane) include the following:

• Duplex bus-type topology of the cell bus plus simplex I2C bus. Each cell bus cansupport up to 622 Mbps total (this includes both directions)

• Bus 0 spans all 3N slots. Bus 1 spans the AP slots 1 through 14 only

• Future “new generation IPFMs” in slot 1 or 2 can access the ATM as well as the IPhighways. This allows to handle ATM xDSL services and IP-based servicessimultaneously in the shelf whereas the ATM is terminated on the pack and unifiedIP is provided towards the network.

• Fault isolation bus from the AFM to all APs.

Properties of the IP highway (IP part of the backplane) include the following:


• There are two spokes between IPFM and each peripheral pack. Each spoke consistsof a differential pair per direction, in sum 8 wires. Each spoke supports up to1 Gbps per direction. Hubs of the IP spokes are AP slots 1 and 2.

• GbE links (spokes) to all AP slots and both COMDACs.

The physical dimensions of the backplane are:

• 511 mm height

• 441 mm width.

Connector field in the AnyMedia ® LAG 1900 Shelf

The following figure shows the arrangement of the connectors in theAnyMedia® LAG1900 Shelf.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

4-8 363-211-585Issue 8, September 2008

Connector designations

The following table lists all connectors in the connector fields of theAnyMedia® LAG1900 Shelf and their meaning.

Designation Connector type Description

J101 25-pin female D-sub 8 downstream E1 feeder pairs

J102 25-pin female D-sub 8 upstream E1 feeder pairs

J103 37-pin female D-sub TAP connector

J104 9-pin female D-sub LAN Interface

J106 9-pin female D-sub RTU/ATU link

J107 9-pin female D-sub Office alarm closure output - International

J108 9-pin female D-sub Miscellaneous Alarm Inputs

J109 9-pin female D-sub Office Clock 0 input to both COMDACs, StationClock input to CIU and COMDAC 0 system syncoutput

J110 9-pin female D-sub Office Clock 1 input to both COMDACs, StationClock input to CIU and COMDAC 1 system syncoutput

J111 2-pin male −48VA and −48VRTN


...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................363-211-585Issue 8, September 2008

4-9


J112 2-pin male −48VB and −48VRTN

P113 4-pin molex header External Ringing bus 0 (tin plated)

P114 10-pin molex header Fan alarm/control/power (gold plated)

P201 12 × 4 metral header Debug connector for internal purposes

P202 12 × 4 metral header Debug connector for internal purposes

P301 4-pin molex header Used for bridging internal and external Ringing

P302 4-pin molex header Used for bridging both partitions of Ringing Bus 0

H11 2 × 4 pin header Shelf version

E10 Power tap (8 pins) −48A - external power feeder A

E20 Power tap (8 pins) −48B- external power feeder A

E11 Power tap (8 pins) −48V0 - internal power bus 0

E21 Power tap (8 pins) −48V1 - internal power bus 0

Notes:

1. Mounted behind CIU slot

Physical dimensions

The physical dimensions of the backplane are: 940 mm height (including 51 mm forinput/output connections) and 635 mm width. Between the two card cages is a gap of102 mm for cable management and fans.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

4-10 363-211-585Issue 8, September 2008


Overview

The AnyMedia® LAG 4300 Shelf contains two rows for accomodating common packsand application packs (APs). Two of these shelves can be accommodated back-to-backin one indoor cabinet.

The two rows together provide a total of 43 slots for APs. For details on capacity referto the “System Planning and Engineering” chapters in the APOG partNarrowband andATM xDSL servicesand in the APOG partIP-based services.


The AnyMedia® LAG 4300 Shelf is a double row shelf. The upper row contains six1N high slots and 22 3N high slots. The lower row contains 24 3N high slots. (1N is96 mm, 3N is 336 mm; Alcatel-Lucent One NS Hardware Standard). The 1N highslots are designated for circuit packs with network interfaces, while certain of the 3Nhigh slots are designated for control (for example COMDAC, CIU) and the other 3Nhigh slots are designated for circuit packs with subscriber interfaces.

Both rows together may form one single NB subsystem and/or one single IPsubsystem, while the upper row may include one BB subsystem and the lower rowmay include an additional BB subsystem which is logically completely separated fromthat in the upper row. Note that the upper row may include an IP subsystem or a BBsubsystem, but not both of them.

The following figure shows the dimensions of theAnyMedia® LAG 4300 Shelf.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................363-211-585Issue 8, September 2008

4-11

AnyMedia ® LAG 4300 Shelf configuration example

The following figure shows as an example anAnyMedia® LAG 4300 Shelf in a mixedconfiguration for narrowband services and ATM xDSL services or IP-based services.

Connector field

Cable trough

Fan unit and connector field

Cable trough and connector field

999.

1m

m

685 mm

624.3 mm

Depth: 256.3 mm

Circuit packs upper row

Circuit packs lower row


...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

4-12 363-211-585Issue 8, September 2008


The AnyMedia® LAG 4300 Shelf contains two rows for accomodating common packsand APs. The two rows have to be equipped differently.

Important! While the NB packs in both rows form one single NB subsystem andthe IP packs in both rows form one single IP subsystem, the BB subsystems in bothrows are independent from each other.

Upper row

The upper row provides slots to house the following main components:

• Six 1N slots for six E1 interface units IO_E1 (FAC500B)

• One slot for communication interface unit CIU (DTP500)

• Two slots for common data and control COMDAC (COM520)

• Nineteen slots for

– Application packs (APs) for narrowband services

– Packs for ATM xDSL services: one or two ATM Feeder Multiplexers and up to18 xDSL APsThe preferred slot for the AFM for simplex operation is slot 25. For duplexmode a second AFM is inserted into slot 26.

– Packs for IP-based services: one or two IPFM Feeder Multiplexers and up to 18IP APs


...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................363-211-585Issue 8, September 2008

4-13

The preferred slot for the IPFM for simplex operation is slot 25. For duplexmode a second IPFM is inserted into slot 26.Either packs for ATM xDSL services or packs for IP-based services may beequipped in these slots.

– Optionally one Test Application Pack per shelf (TAP10x) (The test applicationpack may be equipped in the upper row or in the lower row).

– Slots 40 to 43 may be equipped with one or two internal 2-slot wide ringinggenerators (RGP100B).

All possible pack types are listed in“Packs in theAnyMedia® Access System” (p. 5-2).

Lower row

The lower row provides twenty-four slots for


• Application packs (APs) for IP-based servicesPacks for ATM xDSL services: one or two ATM Feeder Multiplexers and up to 23xDSL APsThe preferred slot for the AFM for simplex operation is slot 1. For duplex mode asecond AFM is inserted into slot 2.

• Optionally one Test Application Pack per shelf (TAP10x). (The test applicationpack may be equipped in the upper row or in the lower row).


AnyMedia ® LAG 4300 Shelf functional block diagram

The functional block diagram of the LAG 4300 Shelf shows the combination of thedifferent packs:



• E1 interface unit (IO_E1)

• ATM Feeder Multiplexer (AFM)

• Application pack (AP).

The functional block diagram of theAnyMedia® LAG 4300 Shelf is contained in thefunctional block diagram of theAnyMedia® Access System and is shown infunctionalblock diagram of the AnyMedia Access System.

AnyMedia ® LAG 4300 Shelf backplane

The AnyMedia® LAG 4300 Shelf includes a double high backplane supporting twocard cages. The backplane consists of a 24-layer printed wiring board, connectors forall packs and a series of connectors for external interfaces, including power and ringinginputs. Interfacing with the external subscriber lines is done via the application packs’faceplate connectors and not via the backplane.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

4-14 363-211-585Issue 8, September 2008

The common part of the backplane provides the following:

• TAP connector to allow another shelf to be added (not supported in release R1.14)

• Wiring for all external interfaces except subscriber connections

• All wiring for external powering and external ringing

• Two ringing buses to support internal ringing generators

• Wiring for facility and equipment testing (general purpose bus in each row)

• Header for shelf inventory (shelf version ID)

• Wiring for Communications and Control (UART).

The narrowband part of the backplane provides the following:

• Narrowband interconnections between all pack slots in both rows

• Wiring for IO_E1 protection and COMDAC side switch mechanism.

The broadband part of the backplane provides the following:

• Four broadband buses for interconnections between all AP slots, two for the lowerrow (0 and 1) and two for the upper row (2 and 3). There is no interconnection ofthe broadband buses in the upper row and in the lower row.

• Wiring for AFM protection switch mechanism


Properties of the IP highway (IP part of the backplane) include the following:


• Hubs of the IP spokes are AP slots 25 and 26. The spokes comprise 8 wires andare tested for up to 1.25 Gbps per spoke and direction.

• GbE links (spokes) to all AP slots and both COMDACs.

Note that the upper row can be populated either with a BB subsystem or with an IPsubsystem but not with both.

Connector fields in the AnyMedia ® LAG 4300 Shelf

The following figures show the arrangement of the connectors in theAnyMedia® LAG4300 Shelf.

Connectors above upper row

The figure below shows the connector field above the upper row of theAnyMedia®

LAG 4300 Shelf.

J101

J103

J102

J104

J112

J113

J107

J109

J108

J110

J106

J106

A

J203

J111

J120

J105 P115 P205P204P202


...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................363-211-585Issue 8, September 2008

4-15

Connectors between upper and lower row

This figure shows the power connectors which are located between the upper and thelower row.


The following table lists all connectors in the connector fields of theAnyMedia® LAG4300 Shelf and their meaning.


J101 25-pin female D-sub Downstream: First 8 DS1/E1 feeder pairs

J102 25-pin female D-sub Downstream: Last 12 DS1 or 8 E1 feeder pairs

J103 25-pin female D-sub Upstream: First 8 DS1/E1 feeder pairs

J104 25-pin female D-sub Upstream: Last 12 DS1 or 8 E1 feeder pairs

J105 9-pin female D-sub Office alarm closure output (International)

J106 37-pin female D-sub TAP connector

J106A 37-pin female D-sub TAP connector to next shelf (1)

J107 9-pin female D-sub LAN interface

J108 25-pin female D-sub General purpose communications port

J109 9-pin female D-sub Remote test unit (RTU) link

J110 25-pin female D-sub Not used

J111 9-pin female D-sub Miscellaneous alarm inputs

J112 9-pin female D-sub Office clock 0 input to both COMDACs, stationclock input to CIU, and COMDAC 0 system syncoutput

J113 9-pin female D-sub Office clock 1 input to both COMDACs andCOMDAC 1 system sync output

J120 9-pin female D-sub Bay indicator/alarm connection to power shelf

J203 15-pin female D-sub General purpose bus (GPB) connector to next shelf

P115 4-pin molex header Ringing bus 0 and 1

P117 10-pin molex header Fan alarm/control/power connector

P202 12×4 metral header Jumper for general purpose bus (GPB) (2)

P204 12×4 metral header Debug connector for internal purposes


P208

P117E1 E11 E5 E13 E2 E15 E6 E17 E9 E19

P207P206

H1

E10 E12 E3 E14 E7 E16 E4 E18 E8 E20

RV1


...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

4-16 363-211-585Issue 8, September 2008





E1 Power tap (8 pins) 48V0








E9 Power tap (8 pins) ALTPWR0

E10 Power tap (8 pins) ALTPWR1

E11 - E20 Power tap (8 pins) GRD

H1 2×4 pin header Shelf version

Notes:

1. Not supported in R1.14

2. This jumper must be plugged in to connect GPB1 and GPB2. Then all APs in the upper and in the lowerrow can be tested by one TAP.

Physical dimensions

The physical dimensions of the backplane are: 940 mm height (including 51 mm forinput/output connections) and 635 mm width. Between the two card cages is a gap of102 mm for cable management and fans.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................363-211-585Issue 8, September 2008

4-17

AnyMedia® ETSI V5 Shelf and components...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Overview

The AnyMedia® ETSI V5 Shelf provides up to 16 slots for accomodating APs. Fordetails on capacity refer to the “System Planning and Engineering” chapters in theAPOG partNarrowband and ATM xDSL servicesand in the APOG partIP-basedservices.


The AnyMedia® ETSI V5 Shelf consists of a metal mechanical structure that serves toguide and fasten packs, locate and mount a multi-layer backplane, allows mountinginto supporting structures such as racks and provides an interface for internal andexternal connections.

The following figure shows the front view of theAnyMedia® ETSI V5 Shelf.

The assembly consists of:

• A metal housing for 3N-sized packs (1N is 96 mm, 3N is 336 mm; Alcatel-LucentOne NS Hardware Standard)

• A metal housing for 1N-sized packs

• Top and bottom metal card guides

• A fully connectorized multi-layer backplane

• A rear cover to support EMC shielding and safety


...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

4-18 363-211-585Issue 8, September 2008

• A conductive front cover with EMC shielding

• Top and bottom EMC screens

• A shelf connection panel

• Faceplate cable routing for a/b pairs

• A baffle for verifying the diagonal airflow concept, for providing a cable troughand for thermic separation (provides also fire enclosure).

AnyMedia ® ETSI V5 Shelf arrangement

The AnyMedia® ETSI V5 Shelf is arranged to accommodate nine 1N packs in theupper row of slots and nineteen 3N packs in the lower row of slots (1N is 96 mm, 3Nis 336 mm; Alcatel-Lucent One NS Hardware Standard). For details on theAnyMedia®

ETSI V5 Shelf arrangement see“AnyMedia® ETSI V5 Shelf configuration example”(p. 4-21).

On the right side of the upper row of slots the shelf connection panel is located. Thecables plug into the backplane interface connectors which are accessible at the shelfconnection panel and route horizontally to the right side of theAnyMedia® ETSI V5Shelf into the cable channel of the ETSI rack.

A cable trough is located at the bottom of theAnyMedia® ETSI V5 Shelf. The a/bcables plug into the faceplate connectors of the application packs and route verticallydown into the cable trough and horizontally to the left side of theAnyMedia® ETSI V5Shelf into the cable channel of the ETSI rack.

The figure below shows anAnyMedia® Access System shelf arrangement.

Baffle

3 packs

4 IO_E1s and

Shelf connection panel (SCP) Cablesto the right

1 Power filter unit

cable duct

AP connectors(a/b cable to theleft cable duct)

a/b cablesto the leftcable duct

1 or 2 COMDACs, 1 CIU

2 IO_HDLCs

optional 1 IO_E1P(only necessary if TDM COMDAC is used)

16 application packs

Shelf types and their components AnyMedia® ETSI V5 Shelf and components

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................363-211-585Issue 8, September 2008

4-19

The following figure shows the dimensions of theAnyMedia® ETSI V5 Shelf (viewfrom left side).

AnyMedia ® ETSI V5 Shelf configuration example

The following figure shows as an example anAnyMedia® ETSI V5 Shelf in a mixedconfiguration for narrowband services and ATM xDSL services.

Space for air outlet or fan unit

1N sized packs

3N sized packs

Air inlet

600

mm

280 mm

96m

m

500

mm

EMC shielding for 1N sized packs

EMC shielding top


Baffle

Front cover

Rear cover

Backplane

336

mm


...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

4-20 363-211-585Issue 8, September 2008

AnyMedia ® ETSI V5 Shelf components

The AnyMedia® ETSI V5 Shelf provides slots to house the following maincomponents:

• Two slots for high level data link control packs IO_HDLC (IDC500/IDC500B)

• Four slots for E1 interface units IO_E1 (FAC500/FAC500B), one slot for E1protection (FAC500B)

• One slot (2-slots wide) for a power filter unit PFU (PFU501)

• Two slots for common data and control COMDAC (COM501)

• One slot for communication interface unit CIU (DTP500)

• Sixteen slots for

– Application packs (APs) for narrowband services

– Packs for ATM xDSL services: one or two ATM Feeder Multiplexers and up to15 xDSL APs

— IO_HDLC for narrowband services

— IO_E1 for narrowband services when TDM COMDAC is used

— COMDACs for narrowband services or for ATM xDSL-only configurations

— CIU for narrowband services

— AFMs for ATM xDSL services

— Up to 15 application packs may be mixed narrowband APs (POTS/ISDN) and ATM xDSL APs

01 02 03 04 05 06

App

licat

ion

pack

App

licat

ion

pack

App

licat

ion

pack

App

licat

ion

pack

App

licat

ion

pack

CO

MD

AC

08 09 10 11 12 13

App

licat

ion

pack

App

licat

ion

pack

App

licat

ion

pack

App

licat

ion

pack

App

licat

ion

pack

App

licat

ion

pack

CO

MD

AC

1 2

IO_E

1

IO_E

1

IO_E

1

IO_H

DLC

IO_H

DLC

IO_E

1

141

App

licat

ion

pack

CIU

AF

M o

r N

B-A

P

AF

M o

r ap

plic

atio

n pa

ck

15 16

IO_E

1P

1 1 2 3 421

Cable trough and air inlet (baffle)

PF

U

A2 D2 F2 H2 J3

J2

J1 K1H1G1F1E1D1C1B1A1

A B C D E F G H J K


LAN

- 48A

TAP

E1 D

OW

N

E1 D

OW

N

E1 U

P

E1 U

P

GPC R

ING

0

RIN

G1

ALTPWR

- 48B

IO_E1-4IO_E1-3IO_E1-2IO_E1-1 PFUIO_E1PHDLC-2HDLC-1

AP-4AP-3AP-2AP-1CIUCOM-2COM-1 AP-11AP-10AP-9AP-8AP-7AP-6AP-5 AP-16AP-15AP-14AP-13AP-12

J1F3 T315 mA F2F1FAULTFan unit and air outlet

App

licat

ion

pack

App

licat

ion

pack

07

CO

MD

AC


...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................363-211-585Issue 8, September 2008

4-21

The AFM has to be plugged in the application pack slot AP-16 (preferred AFMslot). For duplex mode a second AFM is inserted into slot AP-15 (AFMprotection slot).

– Optionally one Test Application Pack (TAP10x).


AnyMedia ® ETSI V5 Shelf functional block diagram using TDM COMDAC

The functional block diagram of theAnyMedia® Access System using the TDMCOMDAC shows the combination of the different packs. In conjunction with the TDMCOMDAC the common packs for narrowband services are



• E1 interface unit (IO_E1)

• High level data link control (IO_HDLC). An IO_HDLC is required, if ISDNservices have to be supported.

The functional block diagram of theAnyMedia® Access System using TDM COMDACis contained in the functional block diagram of theAnyMedia® Access System and isshown infunctional block diagram of the AnyMedia Access System.

AnyMedia ® ETSI V5 Shelf backplane

The backplane belongs to theAnyMedia® ETSI V5 Shelf assembly. It consists of a16-layer printed wiring board, connectors for all packs and a series of D-subconnectors for external interfaces, including power and ringing inputs. Interfacing withthe external subscriber lines is done via the application packs’ faceplate connectors andnot via the backplane.

The common part of the backplane provides the following features and functions:

• Wiring for all external interfaces except subscriber connections

• All wiring for external powering and external ringing

• Wiring for facility and equipment testing

• Header for mainshelf inventory

• Wiring for Communications and Control (UART).

The narrowband part of the backplane provides the following:

• Narrowband interconnections between all pack slots

• Wiring for IO_E1 protection and COMDAC side switch mechanism.

The broadband part of the backplane provides the following:

• Broadband bus for up to two AFMs and up to 15 APs

• Wiring for AFM protection switch mechanism


The physical dimensions of the backplane are: 485 mm height and 490 mm width.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

4-22 363-211-585Issue 8, September 2008


Overview

The AnyMedia® LAG 200 Shelf is used in small configurations for IP-based services.It provides 3 slots for IP application packs supporting:

• Internet access via Fast Ethernet – supported by the ESIM AP

• Voice over IP (VoIP) – supported by the VoIP APs and the ICAP. The ICAP issupported in simplex and duplex mode, but as a stand-alone configuration only (notin controlled mode).

• Internet access or video over VDSL – supported by the VDSL AP

• xDSL services over IP - supported by the IPADSL2_32p AP.

Note that the backplane of theAnyMedia® LAG 200 Shelf does neither supportnarrowband, PCM and TDM links nor the broadband bus used on otherAnyMediashelves. The backplane provides high-speed Gigabit Ethernet (GbE) links to all APslots.

Also in contrast to other LAG Shelves, the IP subsystem in theAnyMedia® LAG 200Shelf is controlled by an Ethernet subscriber interface module (ESIM AP).

For details on capacity refer to the chapter “System planning and engineering” in theApplications and Planning Guide for IP-based services(363-211-587).

This section describes the following aspects of theAnyMedia® LAG 200 Shelf:

• Physical description and dimensions

• AnyMedia® LAG 200 Shelf configuration example

• AnyMedia® LAG 200 Shelf components

• Functional block diagram

• AnyMedia® LAG 200 Shelf backplane

• Connection panel of theAnyMedia® LAG 200 Shelf.


The AnyMedia® LAG 200 Shelf is compatible to ETSI standards and to IEC. It may beshipped in an indoor cabinet or as individual shelf for installation in a rack.

The following figure shows the dimensions of theAnyMedia® LAG 200 Shelf (viewfrom left side).


...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................363-211-585Issue 8, September 2008

4-23

The assembly consists of the following components:

• Three double-width 1N slots located vertically one above the other on the left-handside of the shelf (1N is 96 mm)

• Three slots for 3N-sized IP packs (3N is 336 mm)For details on theAnyMedia® LAG 200 Shelf arrangement see“AnyMedia® LAG200 Shelf components” (p. 4-24).

• A rear cover for supporting EMC shielding and safety

• A front door for providing EMI/EMC seal (if not installed in a closed cabinet)

• A shelf connection panel

• A cable tray (separately orderable)

• A fan unit; the fan tray is plugged in the backplane directly (no cable connectionsnecessary)

• An air filter (included in the indoor cabinet configuration).


The figure below shows a scheme of the front view of theAnyMedia® LAG 200 Shelf.

Fan unit

1N sized packs

Air inlet

230mm

498

mm

Front door for

Rear cover with

Backplane

422.

65m

m

EMC shielding

262mm

Width: 170mm

Cable tray

and 3N sized packs

Air filter

EMI/EMC seal


...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

4-24 363-211-585Issue 8, September 2008

On the left side theAnyMedia® LAG 200 Shelf can accommodate up to three 1N-sizedpacks

• Ringing generator unit (RGU) if internal ringing supply is required

• Power filter unit (PFU) for DC-powered applications (-48 V)

• One slot is reserved for future use.

More details on powering and ringing are provided in“AnyMedia® LAG 200 Shelfpowering and ringing” (p. 7-28)

The 3N-sized slots on the right side of the shelf can be equipped with

• One ESIM in controller mode in the left slot and any other IP AP in controlledmode in the other two slots

• One ESIM in controller mode in the left slot, any other IP AP in controlled mode,and one IP AP in stand-alone mode (except LPZ602)

• Any IP AP in stand-alone mode (except LPZ602) in any combination in the threeslots.

Fan unit

01

ES

IM A

P

Cable trough

AP-1

Air outlet

RG

U

RGU

PF

U

PFU

02

IP A

P

AP-2

03

IP A

P

AP-3

Air filter

Air inlet

Con

nect

ion

pane

l

For futureuse


...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................363-211-585Issue 8, September 2008

4-25

The following restrictions apply for all configurations:

• Maximum quantity of LPE408, LPV417, LPZ600 is one perAnyMedia® LAG 200Shelf

• Maximum quantity of LPA633, LPZ602 is two perAnyMedia® LAG 200 Shelf.

The connection panel is located on the right-hand side of the shelf. The externalconnectors are front-accessible.

A cable tray is located at the bottom of theAnyMedia® LAG 200 Shelf. The cablesplug into the faceplate connectors of the IP APs and route vertically down into thecable tray and horizontally to the right side of the LAG 200 Shelf.

AnyMedia ® LAG 200 Shelf functional block diagram: Example

The functional block diagram example shows a possible combination of the followingpack types:

• Ethernet subscriber interface module (ESIM)

• IP application packs (IP AP)

Functional block diagram of theAnyMedia® LAG 200 Shelf.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

4-26 363-211-585Issue 8, September 2008

Backplane

The backplane of theAnyMedia® LAG 200 Shelf consists of a multi-layer printedwiring board with IP spokes to all IP APs, and a series of connectors for externalinterfaces, including power and ringing inputs, see“Connection panel of theAnyMedia® LAG 200 Shelf” (p. 4-28). The backplane will neither support narrowband,PCM and TDM links nor the broadband bus used on otherAnyMediashelves.

The common IP part of the transmission and communication highways on thebackplane supports the following features and functions:

• High-speed GbE links (IP spokes) to all AP slots via the AP slot 1 for a simplexscenario. No duplex operations are supported

• Each link includes a Tx and Rx 100Ω differential pair (4 wires)

ESIM

SwitchingEngineBlock

Processor & Control

Complex

LocalMemory Block

2 IP Spokesfor Controller

Mode

10/100Base-Tx for GSI/EMS

RS232 for CONSOLE

Ringing

-48VDC


Eth

erne

t Pro

cess

ing

and

Con

trol F

unct

ions

a/b Pairs for VoIP

IP Spoke

Con

trol

Physical Layer & Interface

Block

3 Alarm Inputs

PowerModule

1 Gigabit Ethernet (SFP) uplink

8 Fast Ethernet (SFP) downlinks

AddressMemory Block

PacketBuffer Block

PowerModule

Ringing


Eth

erne

t Pro

cess

ing

and

Con

trol F

unct

ions

a/b Pairs for VoIP

Con

trol

PowerModule

RGU alarmFan alarm

Door open alarm


...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................363-211-585Issue 8, September 2008

4-27

The physical dimensions of the backplane are:

• Height: 422.65 mm

• Width: 46.06 mm.

Connection panel of the AnyMedia ® LAG 200 Shelf

The following figure shows the arrangement of the backplane I/O connectors, viewedfrom the front of the shelf


The following table lists all connectors in the connection panel of theAnyMedia® LAG200 Shelf and their meaning.


J101 2-Pin UniversalMATE-N-LOK

−48 VA - external power feeder

J102 3-Pin UniversalMATE-N-LOK

Used for bridging internal -48 V with the external-48 VA

P113 4-pin Molex header External ringing connector

P114FAN

J102-48V

P113External Ringing

Bridges External &

J108Alarm in

Straps used forMesh Ground

Connector

P301Bridges External & Internal Ringing

J101-48VAExternal Power

Internal Power


...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

4-28 363-211-585Issue 8, September 2008


P301 4-pin Molex header Used for bridging internal ringing (TRG0/RRG0) andexternal ringing (TRGA/RRGA)

J108 9-pin female D-sub Miscellaneous alarm inputs

P114 10-pin Molex header Fan alarm/control/power connector

H1 2 x 4 pin header Shelf ID setting

Grounding

The AnyMedia® LAG 200 Shelf is designed to work in mesh-BN (meshed bondingnetwork) or mesh-IBN (meshed isolated bonding network) environments according toETS 300 253. The default configuration is determined for mesh-BN environments. Ifmesh_IBN environment is required, the configuration can easily be modified duringinstallation by removing two straps on the backplane.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................363-211-585Issue 8, September 2008

4-29

5 5List of common packs and APs

Overview...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Purpose

Different applications of theAnyMedia® Access System require the use of differentcommon packs and application packs. The following tables list all the orderable packsto configure theAnyMedia® Access System according to the functions and features tobe provided. For the description of the packs refer to theData Sheet Book363-211-251, for the ordering information see theOrdering Guide363-211-144.

The first two tables list for each pack whether it can be used in a configuration or not:“x” means, the pack is supported in the configuration, “-” means, the pack is notsupported.

Contents

Packs in theAnyMedia® Access System 5-2

Common packs for use in theAnyMedia® LAG 1900 Shelf 5-6

Common packs for use in theAnyMedia® LAG 4300 Shelf 5-7

Common packs for use in theAnyMedia® ETSI V5 Shelf 5-9

Common packs and application packs in theAnyMedia® LAG 200 Shelf 5-10

Application packs in theAnyMedia® LAG 1900 Shelf 5-11

Application packs in theAnyMedia® LAG 4300 Shelf 5-14

Application packs in theAnyMedia® ETSI V5 Shelf 5-17

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................363-211-585Issue 8, September 2008

5-1

Packs in theAnyMedia® Access System...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Common packs

The following table shows the common packs used in theAnyMedia® Access System.

The pack ... ... can be used in the

Apparatus code Description AnyMedia ®

LAG 1900Shelf

upper row oftheAnyMedia ®

LAG 4300Shelf

lower row oftheAnyMedia ®

LAG 4300Shelf

AnyMedia ®

ETSI V5 ShelfAnyMedia ®

LAG 200 Shelf

COM501 COMDAC - - - x -

COM503 COMDAC x - - x -

COM520 COMDAC - x - - -

COM521 COMDAC - x - - -

DTP500 CIU x x - x -

DTP501 CIU x x - x -

FAC500 IO_E1 x x - x -

IDC500 IO_HDLC - - - x (1) -

LPA900 (2) AFMDS3 - - - x -

LPA901 AFMDS3 x x x x -

LPA910 (2) AFME3 - - - x -

LPA911 AFME3 x x x x -

LPA920 AFMO x x x x -

LPA941 AFME1 x x x x -

LPE408(controllermode)

ESIM, 8 fastEthernet (SFP)downlinks and 1GbE (SFP)uplink

- - - - x

LPI901 (2) IPFM - x - - -

LPI902 (2) IPFM x - - - -

LPI903 IPFM - x - - -

LPI904 IPFM x - - - -

LPI905 IPFM - x - - -

LPI906 IPFM x - - - -

LPI960 IP-AFM x x x x -

PFU501 PFU - - - x -

PFU502 PFU - - - - x

PFU503 PFU x - - - -

PFU520 PFU - x (in the Power DistributionPanel)

- -

List of common packs and APs

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

5-2 363-211-585Issue 8, September 2008

The pack ... ... can be used in the

Apparatus code Description AnyMedia ®

LAG 1900Shelf

upper row oftheAnyMedia ®

LAG 4300Shelf


LAG 4300Shelf

AnyMedia ®

ETSI V5 ShelfAnyMedia ®

LAG 200 Shelf

RFU503 RFU x - - - -

RFU523 RFU - x (in the Power DistributionPanel)

- -

RGP100 RGP - x - - -

RGU100 RGU - x x x -

RGU500 RGU x - - - -

RGU510 RGU x - - - -

RGU550 RGU x - - - x

Notes:

1. The IO_HDLC pack is not supported when COM503 is used in theAnyMedia® ETSI V5 Shelf.

2. No longer orderable; no longer supported. For details refer to the compatibility tables in the “OrderingGuide” 363-211-144.

Application packs

The following table shows the application packs used in theAnyMedia® AccessSystem.

The application pack ... ... can be used in the

Apparatuscode

Description AnyMedia ®

LAG 1900Shelf

upper rowof theAnyMedia ®

LAG 4300Shelf


LAG 4300Shelf

AnyMedia ®

ETSI V5Shelf


LPA400 (1) ADSL4p AP - - - x -

LPA408 (1) ADSL8p AP - x x x -

LPA414 (1) ADSL4i AP - x x x -

LPA416 ADSL16p AP x x x x -

LPA417 ADSL16i AP x x x x -

LPA420 ADSL2_16pAP

x x (2) x (2) x -

LPA432 ADSL32p AP x x x x -

LPA434 ADSL32i AP x x x x -

LPA438 ADSL32i x x (2) x (2) x -

LPA633 IPADSL2_32p x x x x x

LPA832 P32A32 AP x x x x -

LPA833 P32A32 AP x x x x -

List of common packs and APs Packs in the AnyMedia® Access System

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................363-211-585Issue 8, September 2008

5-3


Apparatuscode


LAG 1900Shelf


LAG 4300Shelf


LAG 4300Shelf

AnyMedia ®

ETSI V5Shelf


LPA941 E1-IMA AP - - - x -

LPE408 ESIM, 8 fastEthernet (SFP)downlinks and1 GbE (SFP)uplink

x x x x (3) x

LPI600 ICAP x x x x x (2)

LPP100 POTS AP, 24Z ports

x x x x -

LPS501 (1) HDSL AP - x x x -

LPS503 (1) HDSL AP - x x x -

LPS504 HDSL AP x x x x -

LPS510 SHDSL AP x x x x -

LPS702 SHDSL16 AP x x x x -

LPS716 (1) SDSL16 AP - - - x -

LPU112 ISDN AP, 12U ports

x x x x -


x x x x -


- - - x (4) -


x x (2) x (2) x -


x x x x -

LPV417 VSIM AP, 16VDSL lines

x x x - x

LPZ100 POTS AP, 32Z ports

x x x x -


x x x x -


x x x x -


x x x x -


x x x x -


x x x x -


...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

5-4 363-211-585Issue 8, September 2008


Apparatuscode


LAG 1900Shelf


LAG 4300Shelf


LAG 4300Shelf

AnyMedia ®

ETSI V5Shelf


LPZ200 POTS AP, 32Z ports, TAPfunction

x x x x -

LPZ600 VoIP AP, 32subscriberlines

x x x x (3) x

LPZ602 VoIP AP, 64subscriberlines

x x x - x


x x x x -


x x x x -

TAP100 TAP x x x x -

TAP101 TAP x x x x -

Notes:

1. No longer orderable.

2. If this pack is required in this shelf type, contact your local customer team.

3. In theAnyMedia® ETSI V5 Shelf this pack is only supported in standalone mode.

4. This pack is not supported when COM503 is used in theAnyMedia® ETSI V5 Shelf.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................363-211-585Issue 8, September 2008

5-5

Common packs for use in theAnyMedia® LAG 1900 Shelf...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Common packs for AnyMedia ® LAG 1900 Shelf

The following common packs can be used in theAnyMedia® LAG 1900 Shelf:

Quantity per shelf Equipment Description ApparatusCode

Comcode

2 Power Filter Unit PFU503 109539288

0 or 1 Ringing Filter Unit (1) RFU503 109552414

0 or 2 Ringing Generator Unit - battery-backed(2)

RGU500 109589473

0 or 2 Ringing Generator Unit - earth-backed (2) RGU510 109534669

0 to 2 Ringing Generator Unit - battery-backedor earth-backed (2)

RGU550 109587063

1 or 2 COMDAC COM503 109633834

1 to 3 (3) IO_E1 FAC500B 109153254

1 CIU DTP500 108403197

1 CIU DTP501 109687194

1 or 2 IPFM (No longer orderable) LPI902 109549733

1 or 2 IPFM (4) LPI904 109581231

1 or 2 IPFM (4) LPI904 109581231

1 or 2 IPFM (4) LPI906 109672121

1 or 2 IP-AFM LPI960 109555466

1 or 2 AFME3 (5) LPA911 108875105

1 or 2 AFMDS3 (5) LPA901 108875097

1 AFME1 (5) LPA941 108694894

1 or 2 AFMO (5) LPA920B 109263830

1 or 2 AFMO (5) LPA920C 109606020

Notes:

1. For central ringing voltage supply; if the length of the external unshielded ringing cables exceeds threemeters (shielded 10 m) a ringing filter unit (RFU) has to be installed.

2. For local ringing voltage supply.

3. Three slots are available for IO_E1 packs, including one optional IO_E1 protection pack.

4. For a selection of GBIC modules refer to theOrdering Guide363-211-144.

5. Only one AFM type perAnyMedia® Access System.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

5-6 363-211-585Issue 8, September 2008

Common packs for use in theAnyMedia® LAG 4300 Shelf...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Common packs for AnyMedia ® LAG 4300 Shelf

The following common packs can be used in theAnyMedia® LAG 4300 Shelf:

Quantity perupper row

Quantity perlower row

Equipment Description ApparatusCode

Comcode

0 to 2 0 Ringing Generator Pack RGP100B 108405416

0 to 2 0 to 2 Ringing Generator Unit -battery-backed orearth-backed (1)

RGU100 109587055

1 or 2 0 COMDAC (2) COM520 109291450

1 or 2 0 COMDAC (2) COM521 109554832

1 to 5 (3) 0 IO_E1 FAC500B 109153254

1 0 CIU DTP500 108403197

1 0 CIU DTP501 109687194

1 or 2 (4) 0 IPFM (No longerorderable)

LPI901 109549741

1 or 2 (4) 0 IPFM (5) LPI903 109581223

1 or 2 (4) 0 IPFM (5) LPI905 109672113

1 or 2 1 or 2 IP-AFM LPI960 109555466

1 or 2 (4) (6) 1 or 2 (6) AFME3 LPA911 108875105

1 or 2 (4) (6) 1 or 2 (6) AFMDS3 LPA901 108875097

1 (4) (6) 1 (6) AFME1 LPA941 108694894

1 or 2 (4) (6) 1 or 2 (6) AFMO LPA920B 109263830

1 or 2 (4) (6) 1 or 2 (6) AFMO LPA920C 109606020

Common packs in the Cabinet Distribution Panel

4 per AnyMedia® LAG 4300 Shelf Power Filter Unit PFU520 109320051

2 per AnyMediaLAG 4300 System Passive Clock Distribution PCD520 109320069

up to 3 perAnyMediaLAG 4300System

Ringing Filter Unit -battery-backed ringing

RFU520 109320077

up to 3 perAnyMediaLAG 4300System

Ringing Filter Unit -earth-backed ringing

RFU523 109554949

2 per AnyMediaLAG 4300 System Alarm Connection Panel ACP520 109320085

Notes:


2. Only one COMDAC type perAnyMedia® Access System.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................363-211-585Issue 8, September 2008

5-7

3. There are six slots available for IO_E1 packs but only four IO_E1 packs and optionally one IO_E1protection pack are supported perAnyMedia® Access System.

4. In the upper row either AFMs can be inserted or IPFMs.

5. For a selection of GBIC modules refer to theOrdering Guide363-211-144.

6. Only one AFM type per BB subsystem. The AFMs in the upper row of theAnyMedia® LAG 4300 Shelfform a BB subsystem and the AFMs in the lower row of theAnyMedia® LAG 4300 Shelf form anotherBB subsystem, both independent from each other.

List of common packs and APs Common packs for use in the AnyMedia® LAG 4300Shelf

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

5-8 363-211-585Issue 8, September 2008

Common packs for use in theAnyMedia® ETSI V5 Shelf...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Common packs for AnyMedia ® ETSI V5 Shelf

The following common packs can be used in theAnyMedia® ETSI V5 Shelf:

Quantity per ETSIV5 Shelf


Comcode

0 or 1 (1) Power Filter Unit PFU501 108791294

0 to 2 Ringing Generator Unit - battery-backedor earth-backed (2)

RGU100 109587055

1 or 2 COMDAC (No longer orderable) (3) COM501 108597238

1 or 2 COMDAC (3) COM501B 109210575

1 or 2 COMDAC (3) COM503 109633834

1 to 5 IO_E1 (No longer orderable) FAC500B 108835018

1 to 5 IO_E1 FAC500B 109153254

1 or 2 (4) IO_HDLC IDC500B 108644402

1 CIU DTP500 108403197

1 CIU DTP501 109687194

1 (5) AFME3 (No longer orderable, no supportof duplex mode, not supported fromrelease R1.25 onwards)

LPA910 108348251

1 or 2 (5) AFME3 LPA911 108875105

1 (5) AFMDS3 (No longer orderable, nosupport of duplex mode, not supportedfrom release R1.25 onwards)

LPA900 108108275

1 or 2 (5) AFMDS3 LPA901 108875097

1 (5) AFME1 LPA941 108694894

1 or 2 (5) AFMO (No longer orderable) LPA920 108371246

1 or 2 (5) AFMO LPA920B 109263830

1 or 2 (5) AFMO LPA920C 109606020

1 or 2 IP-AFM LPI960 109555466

Notes:

1. If the AnyMedia ETSI V5 Shelf is part of an AnyMedia LAG 4300 System alternatively 2 PFU 520 canbe used in the Power Distribution Panel of the AnyMedia LAG 4300 System.


3. Only one COMDAC type perAnyMedia® Access System.

4. The IO_HDLC pack is not supported when COM503 is used in theAnyMedia® ETSI V5 Shelf.

5. Only one AFM type perAnyMedia® Access System.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................363-211-585Issue 8, September 2008

5-9

Common packs and application packs in theAnyMedia® LAG200 Shelf...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Common packs and application packs for use in the AnyMedia ® LAG 200 Shelf

The following common packs and application packs can be used in theAnyMedia®

LAG 200 Shelf:

Quantity per LAG 200Shelf


Comcode

1(1) ESIM AP, 8 fast Ethernet (SFP)downlinks, 1 Gigabit Ethernet(SFP) uplink

LPE408 109581215

2 IPADSL2_32p AP, 32 ADSL2/2+ports; Annex A/M

LPA633 109563817

1 VSIM AP, 16 VDSL lines LPV417 109549725

1 VoIP AP, 32 subscriber lines LPZ600 109504381

2 VoIP AP, 64 subscriber lines LPZ602 109570739

1 (2) Power Filter Unit (PFU) supportsinternal -48V bus

PFU502 109205716

Optional 1 (3) Ringing Generator Unit -battery-backed or earth-backed(4)

RGU550 109587063

1 Power Rectifier Unit 400 W(PRU)

PWR UNIT1437A

408973253

Notes:

1. TheAnyMedia® LAG 200 Shelf provides 3 slots for IP APs. The ESIM may be used in controller mode.An ESIM in controller mode may reside in AP slot 1 only.

2. The PFU is needed for DC powered applications. In a shelf mounted rectifier configuration no PFU isneeded.

3. Required, if POTS services are to be supported.



...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

5-10 363-211-585Issue 8, September 2008

Application packs in theAnyMedia® LAG 1900 Shelf...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Application packs for AnyMedia ® LAG 1900 Shelf

The following application packs can be used in theAnyMedia® LAG 1900 Shelf:

Quantity per shelf ( 1) Equipment Description ApparatusCode

Comcode

up to 13 (2) ADSL16p AP (16 ADSLports / 16 splitter for POTS)

LPA416 109393207

up to 13 (2) ADSL16i AP (16 ADSL ports/ 16 splitter for ISDN,2B1Q/4B3T)

LPA417 108796343

up to 13 (2) ADSL2_16p AP, 32 ADSL2+ports; Annex A/M

LPA420 109026575

up to 13 (2) ADSL32p AP, 32 ADSLports; Annex A (used inconjunction with LPZ110)

LPA432 108867573

up to 13 (2) ADSL32i AP, 32 ADSL ports;Annex B (used in conjunctionwith external splitter)

LPA434 109293449

up to 13 (2) ADSL32i AP, 32 ADSL2+ports; Annex B

LPA438 109580738

up to 13 (2) IPADSL2_32p AP, 32ADSL2+ ports; Annex A/M

LPA633 109563817

up to 13 (2) P32A32 AP, 32 POTS/ADSLports, usable for: POTS overADSL or POTS-only orADSL-only

LPA832 109296178

up to 13 (2) P32A32 AP, 32POTS/ADSL2+ ports; AnnexA/M, same usage as LPA832

LPA833 109531475

up to 14 ESIM, 8 fast Ethernet (SFP)downlinks and 1 GbE (SFP)uplink

LPE408 109581215

up to 14 (3) IP COMDAC AP, supports 8E1 links to AnyMediaAccessSystems acting as RTs

LPI600 109563809

up to 14 POTS AP (with PPM), 24Z ports

LPP100B 109129064

up to 14 HDSL AP LPS504 108905332

up to 14 SHDSL AP (TDM) LPS510 108708835

up to 13 (2) SHDSL16 (16 ports) for ATM LPS702 108902719


...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................363-211-585Issue 8, September 2008

5-11

Quantity per shelf ( 1) Equipment Description ApparatusCode

Comcode

up to 14 ISDN AP (2B1Q), 12 U ports LPU112 108506387

up to 14 ISDN AP (2B1Q), 32 U ports LPU132 109494393

up to 14 ISDN AP (4B3T), 32 U ports LPU432 109494351

up to 14 ISDN AP (TCM), 8 U ports LPU508 109600817

up to 13 VSIM AP, 16 VDSL lines LPV417 109549725

up to 14 POTS AP (without PPM), 32Z ports

LPZ100E 109257444

up to 14 POTS AP, 32 Z ports (usedin conjunction with LPA432;low-pass filter on board)

LPZ110 108886821

up to 14 POTS AP, 32 Z ports (4) LPZ120B 108692971



up to 14 POTS AP, 32 Z ports (4) LPZ123 109253625

up to 14 POTS AP, 32 Z ports, TAPfunction

LPZ200 109450155

up to 13 VoIP AP, 32 subscriber lines LPZ600 109504381

up to 13 VoIP AP, 64 subscriber lines LPZ602 109570739

up to 14 POTS AP, 64 Z ports LPZ640 109497354

up to 14 POTS AP, 64 Z ports withadditional inward test relays

LPZ641 109542886

0 or 1 (5) Test Application Pack(Metallic Test Pack)

TAP100B 109192955

0 or 1 (5) Test Application Pack(Metallic Test Pack) withadditional testing features

TAP101 109195222

Notes:

1. TheAnyMedia® LAG 1900 Shelf provides 14 slots for APs. If IP-based services have to be supportedone or in case of duplex IPFM mode two of the AP slots (slot AP–1 and optionally slot AP–2) are neededfor the IPFM(s) so that 12 to 13 APs can be inserted at a maximum. If ATM xDSL services have to besupported additionally one or in case of duplex AFM mode two of the AP slots (slot AP–3 and optionallyslot AP–4) are needed for the AFM(s). If a TAP10x is used, the number of available AP slots isadditionally reduced by 1 slot.

2. Refer to your Customer Team for the latest information on xDSL CPE modems that are currentlysupported.

3. Controlled and stand-alone IP COMDAC APs (ICAPs) are only supported in slots 3-14.Do not insertICAPs into slots 1-2!

List of common packs and APs Application packs in the AnyMedia® LAG 1900 Shelf

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

5-12 363-211-585Issue 8, September 2008

4. The POTS APs (LPZ12xB) are country-specific and cost-efficient variants of the LPZ100 (32 Z ports).For detailed information please contact your Customer Technical Support (CTS).

5. Optional, only required for metallic line testing.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................363-211-585Issue 8, September 2008

5-13

Application packs in theAnyMedia® LAG 4300 Shelf...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Application packs for AnyMedia ® LAG 4300 Shelf

The following application packs can be used in theAnyMedia® LAG 4300 Shelf:

Quantity per upper row ( 1) Quantityper lowerrow ( 1)

EquipmentDescription

ApparatusCode

Comcode

up to 18 (2) up to 23 (2

)ADSL4p AP (4 ADSLports / 4 splitter forPOTS) (No longerorderable)

LPA400B 108603945

up to 18 (2) up to 23 (2

)ADSL8p AP (8 ADSLports / 8 splitter forPOTS) (No longerorderable)

LPA408 108550005

up to 18 (2) up to 23 (2

)ADSL4i AP (4 ADSLports / 4 splitter forISDN, 2B1Q/4B3T)(No longer orderable)

LPA414 108610932

up to 18 (2) up to 23 (2

)ADSL16p AP (16ADSL ports / 16splitter for POTS)

LPA416 109393207

up to 18 (2) up to 23 (2

)ADSL16i AP (16ADSL ports / 16splitter for ISDN,2B1Q/4B3T)

LPA417 108796343

up to 18 (2) up to 23

(2)

ADSL32p AP, 32ADSL ports; Annex A(used in conjunctionwith LPZ110)

LPA432 108867573

up to 18 (2) up to 23 (2

)ADSL32i AP, 32ADSL ports; Annex B(used in conjunctionwith external splitter)

LPA434 109293449

up to 18 (2) up to 23 (2

)IPADSL2_32p AP, 32ADSL2+ ports; AnnexA/M

LPA633 109563817

up to 18 (2) up to 23 (2

)P32A32 AP, 32POTS/ADSL ports,usable for: POTS overADSL or POTS-onlyor ADSL-only

LPA832 109296178


...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

5-14 363-211-585Issue 8, September 2008



ApparatusCode

Comcode

up to 18 (2) up to 23 (2

)P32A32 AP, 32POTS/ADSL2+ ports;Annex A/M, sameusage as LPA832

LPA833 109531475

up to 19 up to 24 ESIM, 8 fast Ethernet(SFP) downlinks and1 GbE (SFP) uplink

LPE408 109581215

up to 17 (3) up to 24 IP COMDAC AP,supports 8 E1 links toAnyMediaAccessSystems acting as RTs

LPI600 109563809

up to 19 up to 24 POTS AP (withPPM), 24 Z ports

LPP100B 109129064

up to 19 up to 24 HDSL AP LPS504 108905332

up to 19 up to 24 SHDSL AP (TDM) LPS510 108708835

up to 18 (2) up to 23 (2

)SHDSL16 (16 ports)for ATM

LPS702 108902719

up to 19 up to 24 ISDN AP (2B1Q), 12U ports

LPU112 108506387

up to 19 up to 24 ISDN AP (2B1Q), 32U ports

LPU132 109494393

up to 19 up to 24 ISDN AP (4B3T), 32U ports

LPU432 109494351

up to 19 up to 24 ISDN AP (TCM), 8U ports

LPU508 109600817

up to 18 up to 24 VSIM AP, 16 VDSLlines

LPV417 109549725

up to 19 up to 24 POTS AP (withoutPPM), 32 Z ports

LPZ100E 109257444

up to 19 up to 24 POTS AP, 32 Z ports(used in conjunctionwith LPA432;low-pass filter onboard)

LPZ110 108886821

up to 19 up to 24 POTS AP, 32 Z ports(4)

LPZ120B 108692971


LPZ121B 108692989


...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................363-211-585Issue 8, September 2008

5-15



ApparatusCode

Comcode


LPZ122B 108692997


LPZ123 109253625

up to 19 up to 24 POTS AP, 32 Z ports,TAP function

LPZ200 109450155

up to 19 up to 24 VoIP AP, 32subscriber lines

LPZ600 109504381

up to 19 up to 24 VoIP AP, 64subscriber lines

LPZ602 109570739

up to 19 up to 24 POTS AP, 64 Z ports LPZ640 109497354

up to 19 up to 24 POTS AP, 64 Z portswith additionalinward test relays

LPZ641 109542886

0 or 1 (5) 0 or 1 (5) Test Application Pack(Metallic Test Pack)

TAP100B 109192955

0 or 1 (5) 0 or 1 (5) Test Application Pack(Metallic Test Pack)with additional testingfeatures

TAP101 109195222

Notes:

1. TheAnyMedia® LAG 4300 Shelf provides 43 slots for APs: 19 in the upper row and 24 in the lower row.The upper row of theAnyMedia® LAG 4300 Shelf forms a BB subsystem and the lower row of theAnyMedia® LAG 4300 Shelf forms another BB subsystem, both independent from each other. If ATMxDSL services have to be supported in the upper row one AP slot (AP–25) or in case of duplex AFMmode two AP slots (AP–25 and AP–26) are needed for the AFM(s) so that 17 to 18 APs can be insertedat a maximum in the upper row. If ATM xDSL services have to be supported in the lower row one APslot (AP–1) or two AP slots (AP–1 and AP–2) are needed for the AFM(s) so that 22 to 23 APs can beinserted at a maximum in the lower row. If a TAP10x is used, the number of available AP slots isadditionally reduced by 1 slot.


3. Controlled and stand-alone IP COMDAC APs (ICAPs) are only supported in slots 1-24, 27-43.Do notinsert ICAPs into slots 25-26!


5. Optional, only required either in upper or lower row for metallic line testing.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

5-16 363-211-585Issue 8, September 2008

Application packs in theAnyMedia® ETSI V5 Shelf...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Application packs for AnyMedia ® ETSI V5 Shelf

The following application packs can be used in theAnyMedia® ETSI V5 Shelf:

Quantity per ETSIV5 Shelf ( 1)


Comcode

up to 15 (2) ADSL4p AP (4 ADSL ports / 4 splitterfor POTS) (No longer orderable)

LPA400B 108603945

up to 15 (2) ADSL8p AP (8 ADSL ports / 8 splitterfor POTS) (No longer orderable)

LPA408 108550005

up to 15 (2) ADSL4i AP (4 ADSL ports / 4 splitterfor ISDN, 2B1Q/4B3T) (No longerorderable)

LPA414 108610932

up to 15 (2) ADSL16p AP (16 ADSL ports / 16splitter for POTS)

LPA416 109393207

up to 15 (2) ADSL16i AP (16 ADSL ports / 16splitter for ISDN, 2B1Q/4B3T)

LPA417 108796343

up to 15 (2) ADSL2_16p AP, 32 ADSL2+ ports;Annex A/M

LPA420 109026575

up to 15 (2) (3) ADSL32p AP, 32 ADSL ports; AnnexA (used in conjunction with LPZ110)

LPA432 108867573

up to 15 (2) ADSL32i AP, 32 ADSL ports; AnnexB (used in conjunction with externalsplitter)

LPA434 109293449

up to 15 (2) ADSL32i AP, 32 ADSL2+ ports;Annex B

LPA438 109580738

up to 15 (2) IPADSL2_32p AP, 32 ADSL2+ ports;Annex A/M

LPA633 109563817

up to 15 (2) P32A32 AP, 32 POTS/ADSL ports,usable for: POTS over ADSL orPOTS-only or ADSL-only

LPA832 109296178

up to 15 (2) P32A32 AP, 32 POTS/ADSL2+ ports;Annex A/M, same usage as LPA832

LPA833 109531475

up to 16 ESIM, 8 fast Ethernet (SFP) downlinksand 1 GbE (SFP) uplink, stand-alonemode

LPE408 109581215

up to 16 IP COMDAC AP, supports 8 E1 linksto AnyMediaAccess Systems acting asRTs

LPI600 109563809

up to 16 POTS AP (with PPM), 24 Z ports LPP100B 109129064

up to 16 (4) HDSL AP LPS504 108905332


...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................363-211-585Issue 8, September 2008

5-17

Quantity per ETSIV5 Shelf ( 1)


Comcode

up to 16 (4) SHDSL AP (TDM) LPS510 108708835

up to 15 (2) SHDSL16 (16 ports) for ATM LPS702 108902719

up to 15 (2) SDSL16 (16 SDSL ports) (No longerorderable)

LPS716 108695529

up to 16 (6) ISDN AP (2B1Q), 12 U ports LPU112 108506387

up to 16 (6) ISDN AP (2B1Q), 32 U ports LPU132 109494393

up to 16 (6) ISDN AP (4B3T), 16 U ports LPU430 109170621

up to 16 (6) ISDN AP (4B3T), 32 U ports LPU432 109494351

up to 16 (6) ISDN AP (TCM), 8 U ports LPU508 109600817

up to 16 POTS AP (without PPM), 32 Z ports LPZ100E 109257444

up to 16 (3) POTS AP, 32 Z ports (used inconjunction with LPA432; low-passfilter on board)

LPZ110 108886821




up to 16 POTS AP, 32 Z ports (7) LPZ123 109253625

up to 16 POTS AP, 32 Z ports, TAP function LPZ200 109450155

up to 16 VoIP AP, 32 subscriber lines,stand-alone mode

LPZ600 109504381

up to 8 (8) POTS AP, 64 Z ports LPZ640 109497354

up to 8 (8) POTS AP, 64 Z ports with additionalinward test relays

LPZ641 109542886

0 or 1 (9) Test Application Pack (Metallic TestPack)

TAP100B 109192955

0 or 1 (9) Test Application Pack (Metallic TestPack) with additional testing features

TAP101 109195222

Notes:

1. The AnyMedia ETSI V5 Shelf provides 16 slots for APs. If ATM xDSL services have to be supportedone or in case of duplex AFM mode two of the AP slots (slot AP–16 and optionally slot AP–15) areneeded for the AFM(s) so that 14 to 15 APs can be inserted at a maximum. If a TAP10x is used, thenumber of available AP slots is additionally reduced by 1 slot.


3. If the LPZ110 and LPA432 are used in conjunction 8 pairs LPZ110/LPA432 can be used per ETSI V5Shelf.

4. If ISDN PRA (via HDSL) is included 1 or 2 IO_HDLC packs must be used in the AnyMedia ETSI V5Shelf.

List of common packs and APs Application packs in the AnyMedia® ETSI V5 Shelf

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

5-18 363-211-585Issue 8, September 2008

5. Maximum 4 SHDSL AP if the 20-pin AMP connector is used additionally.

6. If ISDN is included 1 or 2 IO_HDLC packs must be used in the AnyMedia ETSI V5 Shelf.


8. Due to power dissipation the application packs LPZ64x need to be equally distributed to odd and evenslots. It is recommended to install them in slots 1 to 8.

9. Optional, only required for metallic line testing.

List of common packs and APs Application packs in the AnyMedia® ETSI V5 Shelf

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................363-211-585Issue 8, September 2008

5-19

6 6Network element managementtools

Overview...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Purpose

Alcatel-Lucent provides software for the initial system turn-up as well as for thecentral and regional management scenarios based on the standard TelecommunicationManagement Network (TMN) models by supporting the tasks of the InternationalStandardization Organization (ISO) functional areas.

This chapter describes the software tools which are used forOperations,Administration, Maintenance, and Provisioning(OAM&P) actions and tasks of theAnyMedia® Access System:

• AnyMedia® Management Interface includes:

– AnyMedia® Access System Graphical System Interface Software (GSI)The GSI is managing one network element (NE) that means oneAnyMedia®Mainshelf at a time. It allows one NB management session, one BBmanagement session and one IP management session. For anAnyMedia® LAG4300 Shelf the BB management session can be made with either of the both BBsubsystems.


• Navis™ AnyMedia® Element Management System (NAM)This Element Management System (EMS) can manage hundreds of networkelements (NE) at a time.

The GSI as well as the NAM contain narrowband and ATM xDSL related functionality.

Contents

Introduction 6-3

Navis™ AnyMedia® Element Management System 6-7

AnyMedia® Management Interface 6-8

AnyMedia® Access System Graphical System Interface Software 6-9

Network Maintenance Manager 6-12

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................363-211-585Issue 8, September 2008

6-1

PC requirements 6-13

Network element management tools Overview

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

6-2 363-211-585Issue 8, September 2008

Introduction...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

OAM&P management capabilities

The OAM&P management actions are as follows:

• Configuration management

– Database management

– Software management

– System turn-up

– Provisioning and service activation

– Inventory management

– Clock synchronization management

– Protection switching

• Fault management

– Maintenance

– Alarms and events

– Testing

• Performance management

• Security management.

OAM&P Interfaces

The interfaces on theAnyMedia® Access System to support the OAM&P functionalityare described in

• OAM&P interfaces for narrowband services, see APOG partNarrowband and ATMxDSL services

• ATM OAM&P interfaces for xDSL Services, see APOG partNarrowband and ATMxDSL services

• OAM&P interfaces for IP-based services, see APOG partIP-based services.

OAM&P interfaces on the AnyMedia ® LAG 4300 Shelf

There can be up to three management interfaces, one for the NB subsystem and up totwo for the BB subsystems of anAnyMedia® LAG 4300 Shelf. Different IP addressesare assigned to each controller complex (COMDAC or AFM) which can be a singlecontroller in simplex mode or two controllers in duplex mode (duplex controllers havethe same IP address). The IP address for a controller complex is provisioned by theoperator at the time each subsystem is turned up. The GSI allows one NB managementsession and one BB management session on anAnyMedia® LAG 4300 Shelfsimultaneously. The BB management session can be made with either of the both BBsubsystems.

The different possibilities to connect the GSI or the EMS to theAnyMedia® AccessSystem are shown in the following figures.

Network element management tools

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................363-211-585Issue 8, September 2008

6-3

Connecting a GSI/EMS to the NB subsystem

The figure below shows the connection of a GSI/EMS to the narrowband part only ofthe AnyMedia® Access System.

Legend to the figure above:

Important! The figure is intentionally kept simple. It shows only how to connectto the OAM&P interfaces. It does not show the different components in networkconfigurations. For detailed network configuration examples seeChapter 8, “DCNconfigurations for OAM&P”.

1. The ROC is only available when the narrowband traffic is transported via aphysical E1 link (TDM COMDAC installed). The ROC can be within a V5.x linkor within a leased line interface. The ROC can also be used for transporting BBOAM&P information.

2. Equipment dependent.

Connecting a GSI/EMS to the BB subsystem

The figure below shows the connection of a GSI/EMS to the BB subsystem of theAnyMedia® Access System.

GGSISI/EMS/EMS

EIAEIA--232C232C

GGSISI/EMS/EMS

Local ConnectionLocal Connection Remote ConnectionRemote Connection

TTransport Networkransport Network2)2)

GGSISI/EMS/EMS

E1E1

AnyMediaAnyMedia

EthernetEthernet

ROC within E1ROC within E11)1)

EthernetEthernet

GGSISI/EMS/EMS

LAN ConnectorLAN Connector on connector field/Son connector field/S CPCP

CIT portCIT port

LAN ConnectorLAN Connector on connector field/Son connector field/S CPCP

GGSISI/EMS/EMS

EIAEIA--232C232C



GSI/EMSGSI/EMS

NBNB AATM Operations Channel withinTM Operations Channel within AATM feederTM feederTTransport Networkransport Network

2)2)E3/DS3E3/DS3/IMA/STM-1/IMA/STM-1

Access SystemAccess System

Network element management tools Introduction

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

6-4 363-211-585Issue 8, September 2008



1. Equipment dependent

2. The BB ATM Operations Channel can additionally carry OAM&P information forNB. For that purpose the 10BaseT port on the AFM has to be externally connectedto the LAN connector on the connector field/SCP if the system is configured with aTDM COMDAC.

Connecting a GSI/EMS to the IP subsystem

The figure below shows the connection of a GSI/EMS to the IP subsystem of theAnyMedia® Access System.

GSI/EMS

EIA-232-E/5741)

GSI/EMS

Transport Network2)

Local Connection Remote Connection

Transport Network2)

GSI/EMS

E3/DS3/IMA/STM-1

Ethernet

BB ATM Operations Channel within ATM feeder3)

Ethernet

GSI/EMS

TX-1RX-1

10BaseT port

Console port

3)AnyMedia

Access System


...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................363-211-585Issue 8, September 2008

6-5



GSI/EMS

EIA-232-E/574

GSI/EMS

Transport Network

Local Connection Remote Connection

GSI/EMS

GbE

Ethernet

Inband management channel

Ethernet

GSI/EMS

TXRX

MGMT

CONSOLE


GSI/EMSIP Transport

EdgeDevice

NetworkIP Network

EdgeDevice


...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

6-6 363-211-585Issue 8, September 2008

Navis™ AnyMedia® Element Management System...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Overview

The Navis™ AnyMedia® Element Management System (NAM) is based on a UNIXplatform. It supports hundreds of NEs and multi-user simultaneous access. It isavailable as a combined version for narrowband and ATM xDSL services.

The NAM is used for central and regional management to provide complete networkviews, shelf view, multi-user profiling, where its open architecture satisfies anyrequirements for higher management integration.

The NAM supports an open, CORBA-based northbound interface. Through thedevelopment of mediation devices, the NAM can communicate northbound to a widerange of higher level operations support systems including fault managers andprovisioning managers at the network management level.

The figure below shows theNavis™ AnyMedia® Element Management System in thenetwork management hierarchy.

For further details see theNavis™ AnyMedia® Element Management System UserService Manual. The ordering information for this document can be found in“Relateddocumentation” (p. xiii).

Higher Manager(s) for

Network, Business and Service Management

Navis AnyMedia Element Management SystemUnix SW Platform managing all NEsNetwork Overview, Multi User, Java/Web GUI,User Security/Grouping, Scalability, Reporting

Northbound Interface(s)

AnyMedia Access System

TL1 SNMP


...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................363-211-585Issue 8, September 2008

6-7

AnyMedia® Management Interface...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

The AnyMedia® Access System has a convenient management interface, which is usedfor managing narrowband and ATM xDSL services.

Features of theAnyMedia® Management Interface include the following:

• Operates on Windows systems based programs that run on a standard PC

• Provides menus and/or point and click options for all OAM&P functions

• Provides TL1-based communications for narrowband services

• Provides SNMP-based communications for ATM xDSL services and for IP-basedservices

• Provides local and remote access.

The AnyMedia® Management Interface allows the user to provision a single NE at atime through its GSI, while simultaneously monitoring alarms of multiple NEs throughits Network Maintenance Manager.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

6-8 363-211-585Issue 8, September 2008

AnyMedia® Access System Graphical System InterfaceSoftware...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Introduction

The AnyMedia® Graphical System Interface Software (GSI) is a Windows basedsoftware application running on a PC. It provides a user-friendly way to graphicallyview and access theAnyMedia® Access System supporting the OAM&P functions ofthe system for narrowband services, for ATM xDSL services and for IP-based services.It is used as craft interface terminal for

• Initial system turn-up

• System acceptance tests

• Local maintenance purposes.

The GSI is managing one NE at a time locally as well as remotely.

Software features

The GSI supports the following software features:

• Real time system shelf depictionWhether accessing the system remotely or locally, an operator using the GSI sees agraphical representation of the complete connectedAnyMedia® shelf (AnyMedia®

ETSI V5 Shelf,AnyMedia® LAG 4300 Shelf orAnyMedia® LAG 1900 Shelf)including equipped and provisioned packs and LED status representation.Note: Insome cases theAnyMedia® Access System does not send information about FAULTLED changes to the GSI (e.g. reset of a BB AP). In such cases the shelf view ofthe GSI may not reflect the current status of the LEDs on the realAnyMedia®

shelf.The display contains buttons and pull-down menus, which are used to monitor andmanage the equipment.In an AnyMedia® LAG 4300 Shelf the GSI displays the following:

– the APs in both rows of theAnyMedia® LAG 4300 Shelf when connected tothe COMDAC and

– either the ATM xDSL packs in the upper row or in the lower row, dependent onwhich AFM it is connected to.

Optionally the operator may select a view that displays only one row of the shelf.

• Script facility for easy provisioning of packs, interfaces, ports and so on.For narrowband services the technician can create a script to run a collection ofTL1 commands quickly. This script can then be saved and reused on anotherAnyMedia® Access System.A scripting capability is also available on a subset of ATM xDSL screens and onIP-based screens.

• Graphical support for TL1 commandsThe TL1 commands are graphically accessible via cascaded menus, groupedaccording to the operator areas.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................363-211-585Issue 8, September 2008

6-9

• TLSI ViewThe TL1 system interface (TL1SI View) is a command line input and reportcapability for TL1 commands and reports provided by the GSI application forexperienced TL1 users.

• Alarm and event logging with various filter functions

• Support for the system history log file

• Online helpThe GSI comes with a help system that has a table of contents and an index, andcontains a tour on how to use the GSI.

The figure below shows an example of anAnyMedia® ETSI V5 Shelf.

Network element management tools AnyMedia® Access System Graphical System InterfaceSoftware

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

6-10 363-211-585Issue 8, September 2008

Operation areas

The GSI supports the operations that manage theAnyMedia® Access System functionalareas by allowing an operator to select an operation in the following areas:

• Configuration Management—operations that control and provision the system,which includes database management, software management, system turn-up,provisioning and service activation, inventory management, clock synchronizationmanagement and protection switching.

• Fault Management—operations that maintain the system, which includes faultdetection, fault isolation, correction of abnormal operations, protection switching,alarm reporting, and testing. Alarm conditions appear on the status bar along withan audible beep. After an alarm is detected, a message on how to proceed appearsin a pop-up message box.

• Performance Management—operations to monitor the transmission quality andgenerate threshold crossing alerts (TCAs).

• Security Management—operations that protect the system from unauthorizedaccess, which includes security administration, password maintenance and changes,and access status reports.

In the GSI, autonomous messages generated by the system notify the operator aboutsystem events as the events occur. Autonomous messages include alarm notifications,database changes, threshold crossings, and other system events.

Network element management tools AnyMedia® Access System Graphical System InterfaceSoftware

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................363-211-585Issue 8, September 2008

6-11

Network Maintenance Manager...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

The Network Maintenance Manager is used to monitor alarms over multiple NEs. TheNetwork Maintenance Manager allows a user to choose which NEs to monitor, to filterviewed alarms, and to manage the display of these alarms.

Features of the Network Maintenance Manager include the following:

• Supports alarm collection of an unlimited number of systems

• Supports alarm filters, predefined views, and sorting by severity and number

• Retrieves alarms

• Provides remote access to COMDAC via TCP/IP LAN interface or remoteoperations channel (ROC)

• Provides remote access to AFM via TCP/IP LAN interface or ATM OperationsChannel

• Provides remote access to IPFM via TCP/IP LAN interface or inband managementchannel

• Has encrypted storage of login passwords.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

6-12 363-211-585Issue 8, September 2008

PC requirements...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Overview

The graphical system interface software (GSI) is installed and used on a PC (desktopor laptop) running under the Windows operating system environment.

Hard- and software requirements

The GSI is supported on PCs with the following recommended equipment:

Hardware/software Requirements

Computer/Processor A Pentium III processor is recommended. A Pentium (586) processoris the minimum acceptable.

Display SVGA video board (or higher resolution);

1024 × 768 pixel resolution for 17″ color monitor;

800 × 600 for laptop

Peripheral/Miscellaneous Microsoft mouse or compatible pointing device

Interfaces Free EIA-232 port (COM1/COM2, UART 16550 recommended)

Ethernet card for TCP/IP LAN communication

Cables in suitable length for connection to:

CIT port on CIU For directly connecting from the PC serial port(s) to the CIT port onthe front of the CIU (optional, but required for local CIT port access),the following cable is required:

Serial straight-through EIA-232-cable (Rx connected to Rx, ...) withthe following connector configuration:

- Male 9-pin D-sub connector on the CIU side

- Connector fitting to the serial output of the PC GSI (mostly a female9-pin D-sub connector)

The standard interconnection cable between GSI and CIU has beenmodified as follows:

- Bridge Pin 1 and Pin 6 of the 9 pin D-sub connectors. (see theInstallation Manual)


...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................363-211-585Issue 8, September 2008

6-13


LAN connector onconnector field or SCP

For directly connecting from the PC (equipped with an Ethernet card)to the LAN connector in the connector field of theAnyMedia®

Mainshelf, use a cable that meets the following criteria:

- Cross-over cable for 10BaseT

- Male RJ-45 connector on the PC side, male J2 connector 9pin D-subon the SCP side

- Wired ″cross over″ as follows:

On J2 connector: On RJ45 connector:

Pin 1 (R) connected to Pin 1(T)

Pin 2 (T) connected to Pin 3 (R)

Pin 6 (R) connected to Pin 2 (T)

Pin 7 (T) connected to Pin 6 (R)

CONSOLE port on AFM For directly connecting from the PC serial port (s) to the CONSOLEport on the front of the AFM, use a commercially available cable thatmeets the following criteria:

- Commonly called an″RS-232 cable″

- Male DB-9 connector on one end, female DB-9 connector on theother end

- Wired ″straight through″ (Pin 1 to Pin 1, Pin 2 to Pin 2, etc.).

10BaseT port on AFM For directly connecting from the PC (equipped with an Ethernet card)to the 10BaseT port on the front of the AFM, use a commerciallyavailable cable that meets the following criteria:

- Commonly called an″10BaseT cross-over cable″

- Male RJ-45 connector on both ends

- Wired ″cross over″. That is Pins 1 crossed with Pins 3, Pins 2crossed with Pins 6

CONSOLE port on IPFM For directly connecting from the PC serial port (s) to the CONSOLEport on the front of the IPFM (for initial IP address setting only), usea commercially available cable that meets the following criteria:

- Commonly called a″Null modem cable″ or a ″cross-over cable″

- Male DB-9 connector on one end, female DB-9 connector on theother end

Note: Common″Null modem cables″ or ″cross-over cables″ havefemale connectors on both ends. A gender changer on one end may beused in this case.

Network element management tools PC requirements

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

6-14 363-211-585Issue 8, September 2008


10/100BASE-Tx port onIPFM

For directly connecting from the PC (equipped with an Ethernet card)to the 100BaseT port on the front of the IPFM, use a commerciallyavailable cable that meets the following criteria:

- Commonly called an″10BaseT cross-over cable″

- Male RJ-45 connector on both ends

- Wired ″cross over″. That is Pins 1 crossed with Pins 3, Pins 2crossed with Pins 6

Operating System Windows 2000, or Windows XP (1)

Memory 128 MB RAM

Hard Disk Space 400 MB

Web Browser Netscape Navigatoror Internet Explorerfor viewing on-line help

Additionally requiredSoftware

Microsoft Excel(2), and Microsoft Access(2)

Notes:

1. In Windows XP the following setting is required in order to get a proper display of the GSI: Click on thedesktop to open the″Display Properties″ window. In the″Themes″ tab select″Windows Classic″ from the″Theme″ scroll list. Click the″OK″ button to confirm the setting and close the window.

2. Some procedures (ADSL line monitoring, retrieval of NB traffic statistics, collection of AFM processorload) require these software packages to be installed on the PC.

Important! For the serial cables an angled D-sub connector hood is required,otherwise the doors of theAnyMedia® shelf cannot be closed.

Network element management tools PC requirements

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................363-211-585Issue 8, September 2008

6-15

7 7General system planning andengineering

Overview...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Purpose

This chapter provides the general information for planing and engineeringAnyMedia®

Access System applications.

For a description of the system planning and engineering for the different services referto the APOG partNarrowband and ATM xDSL servicesand to the APOG partIP-based services.

Contents

Environment conditions 7-3

Introduction 7-3

Environmental conditions for storage, transport and operation 7-4

Grounding, powering and ringing 7-6

Grounding concept 7-7

Grounding concept for the LAG 4300 System 7-9

AnyMedia® LAG 1900 Shelf powering and ringing - Overview 7-12

Centralized powering forAnyMedia® LAG 1900 Shelf 7-14

Internal and external ringing forAnyMedia® LAG 1900 Shelf 7-15

AnyMedia® LAG 4300 Shelf configuration powering and ringing -Overview

7-17

Centralized powering for LAG 4300 Shelves 7-18

Internal and external ringing for LAG 4300 Shelves 7-20

AnyMedia® ETSI V5 Shelf powering and ringing - Overview 7-23

Centralized powering and ringing for ETSI V5 Shelves 7-24

Internal ringing for ETSI V5 Shelves 7-27

AnyMedia® LAG 200 Shelf powering and ringing 7-28

Usage of fan units 7-32

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................363-211-585Issue 8, September 2008

7-1

Alarming 7-34

Alarming concept for environmental alarms inAnyMedia® ETSI V5Shelf

7-35

Alarming concept for environmental alarms inAnyMedia® LAG 1900Shelf

7-37


7-40

Synchronization and timing 7-45

Considerations for synchronization and timing 7-45

Passive clock distribution for LAG 4300 Shelves 7-47

On-demand testing 7-48

Integrated testing 7-49

Manual testing 7-56

Monitoring 7-57

Wiring 7-58

Circuit testing 7-59

Subscriber line test via external test head 7-60

General system planning and engineering Overview

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

7-2 363-211-585Issue 8, September 2008

Environment conditions

Introduction...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

The AnyMedia® Access System is designed to meet the appropriate regulations ofEuropean Telecommunication Standard ETS 300 019-1 (Environmental conditions andenvironmental tests for telecommunications equipment).

General system planning and engineering

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................363-211-585Issue 8, September 2008

7-3

Environmental conditions for storage, transport and operation...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Storage

For storage theAnyMedia® Access System fulfills the conditions of environmentalclass 1.2 (weather protected, not temperature-controlled storage locations) of ETS300 019-1-1 as long as the system is packaged in the Alcatel-Lucent package.

The figure below shows the climatogram according to ETS 300 019-1-1, class 1.2 forstorage of theAnyMedia® Access System.

Transport

For transport theAnyMedia® Access System fulfills the conditions of environmentalclass 2.3 (public transportation) of ETS 300 019-1-2 as long as the system is packagedin the Alcatel-Lucent package.

The figure below shows the climatogram according to ETS 300 019-1-2, class 2.3 fortransport of theAnyMedia® Access System.

-30

-20

-10

0

+10

+20

+30

+40

+50

+60

10 200 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100

Air temperature [oC]

Absolutehumidity [g/m3]

0.5

29

-40

-50

+70

Relative humidity [%]

Permissible range


...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

7-4 363-211-585Issue 8, September 2008

Indoor operation

For indoor operation theAnyMedia® Access System (DC-/AC-powered rack) fulfillsthe thermal conditions of environmental class 3.2 (stationary use at weather protectedlocations, partly temperature-controlled) of ETS 300 019-1-3.

The figure below shows the climatogram according to ETS 300 019-1-3, class 3.2 forindoor operation of theAnyMedia® Access System.

-30

-20

-10

0

+10

+20

+30

+40

+50

+60

10 200 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100


Relative


-40

-50

+70

0.1

60

Permissible range

humidity [%]

-30

-20

-10

0

+10

+20

+30

+40

+50

+60

10 200 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100



1.0

29

Relative humidity [%]

Permissible range

General system planning and engineering Environmental conditions for storage, transport andoperation

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................363-211-585Issue 8, September 2008

7-5

Grounding, powering and ringing

Overview...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Purpose

This section provides information about the grounding concept for theAnyMedia®

Access System and about powering and ringing for the different shelf types.Additionally, information about the requirement of fan units is given.

Contents

Grounding concept 7-7

Grounding concept for the LAG 4300 System 7-9

AnyMedia® LAG 1900 Shelf powering and ringing - Overview 7-12

Centralized powering forAnyMedia® LAG 1900 Shelf 7-14

Internal and external ringing forAnyMedia® LAG 1900 Shelf 7-15

AnyMedia® LAG 4300 Shelf configuration powering and ringing -Overview

7-17

Centralized powering for LAG 4300 Shelves 7-18

Internal and external ringing for LAG 4300 Shelves 7-20

AnyMedia® ETSI V5 Shelf powering and ringing - Overview 7-23

Centralized powering and ringing for ETSI V5 Shelves 7-24

Internal ringing for ETSI V5 Shelves 7-27

AnyMedia® LAG 200 Shelf powering and ringing 7-28

Usage of fan units 7-32


...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

7-6 363-211-585Issue 8, September 2008

Grounding concept...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Environment

The AnyMedia® Access System is designed to work in mesh-BN or mesh-IBNenvironments according to EN 300 253.

All ground connections must have a very low impedance for effective conduction ofinterference currents and for avoiding EMC interferences.

The rack metalwork must always be connected to the bonding ring conductor/greenwire.

The grounding concept of theAnyMedia® Access System has an important impact onanalog subscriber interfaces in terms of transmission characteristics such as

• Single frequency noise

• Weighted noise

• Total distortion.

Relevant international standards for grounding are ITU K.27, ETSI EN 300 253.

Frameground

The metalwork of all the shelves is connected to the rack metalwork (potentialframeground FRMGND) via the mounting screws, no additional green wire isnecessary.

All internal connector housings are connected to FRMGND.

– 48 V return path

The AnyMedia® Access System has a common ground signal used by all packs foranalog and digital ground (- 48RTN) which will be in common with the - 48 V returnpath.

Ground interconnection

In a mesh-BN environment the normally isolated common ground signal (- 48RTN)and the metalwork (FRMGND) are connected together directly at one point.

Lightning currents will be routed from - 48RTN to FRMGND via one varistor mountedin the center of the shelves’ backplane.

All pack metal faceplates have a good connection to FRMGND. The faceplates are notconnected directly to - 48RTN except through two 511-kΩ resistors in series asspecified in the One NS Hardware Standard.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................363-211-585Issue 8, September 2008

7-7

Grounding for centralized powering

For centralized powering both - 48 V returns of the external DC feeders are connectedtogether and to the metalwork of the rack (FRMGND) inside the input fuse blocks ofthe rack fuse panel (This internal connection corresponds to a cross-section of 16 mm2

/ 6 AWG).

Thus no external bridge is required for connecting the two return paths (- 48RTN) inthe case of redundant powering.

General system planning and engineering Grounding concept

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

7-8 363-211-585Issue 8, September 2008

Grounding concept for the LAG 4300 System...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Overview

The AnyMedia® LAG 4300 Shelf configuration is designed to work in mesh-BN(Meshed bonding network) or mesh-IBN (Meshed isolated bonding network)environments according to ETS 300 253. If mesh-IBN environment is required theconfiguration can easily be modified during installation.

All ground connections must have a very low impedance for an effective conduction ofinterference currents and for avoiding EMC interferences.

The frame ground (bonding ring conductor) connection provided for each frameworkserves several purposes:

• A direct earth ground connection for lightning protection in common bondingnetworks.

• A common ground potential for electrostatic discharge (ESD) protection.

• A safety ground.

All ground connections to the cabinet shall be made in such a manner as to ensure alow-resistance contact with the metal framework. Remove any paint if necessary.

Grounding interconnection

The figure below shows the general grounding configuration.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................363-211-585Issue 8, September 2008

7-9

The cabinet metalwork must always be connected via the attached ground lug to thebonding ring conductor/green wire

≥ 25 mm2/≤ 2 AWG in a meshed BN environment

≥ 6 mm2/≤ 8 AWG in a meshed IBN environment.

Important! The cabinet metalwork has a ground lug attached which can beremoved and repositioned or replaced to comply with local grounding codes.Whenever this ground lug is repositioned the ground symbol must be positioned inthe new location.

Fan unit

Upper row of LAG 4300 Shelf

ETSI V5 Shelf

Air deflector

Ground lug for

> 25 mm2/ < 2 AWG*

Power distribution framewith up to 10 PFU

Connection via brackets and mounting screws

Connection via cable

green wire

ED7C867-31 G35

(connected to the RFU bracket on the rear side)

(view on rear side of the PFUs)

Lower row of LAG 4300 Shelf

Note that the figure shows the rear side of the cabinet, but the rear side of the power distribution frame is not visible as shown above because the distribution frame will hide this view.

* > 25 mm2/< 2 AWG in a meshed BN environment, > 6 mm2/< 8 AWG in a meshed IBN environment

3.31 mm2/12 AWG

8 ground screws de-noted by a ground sym-bol on the buss bar connect the -48 V RTN of the PFUs to frame ground.

General system planning and engineering Grounding concept for the LAG 4300 System

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

7-10 363-211-585Issue 8, September 2008

Important! The cable for the grounding connection to the bonding ring conductoris not part of the delivery. It must be delivered by the customer. The installer has tocrimp the ground lug to the customer’s cable. Requirements for the groundingcable:

• ≥ 25 mm2/≤ 2 AWG in a meshed BN environment,≥ 6 mm2/≤ 8 AWG in a meshed IBN environment

• Stranded wire

• Bare copper or transparent isolation or green/yellow isolation.

All the shelves’, subracks’, and brackets’ metalwork is connected to the cabinetframework (potential frame ground FRMGND) via the mounting screws, no additionalgreen wire is necessary. The shelf backplanes will support two ground signals:

• - 48RTN Common analog/digital ground signal and return path for both - 48 Vpower feeders (- 48A and - 48B).

• FRMGND Frame ground.

All customer cable connector housings are connected to FRMGND.

The AnyMedia® ETSI V5 Shelves and theAnyMedia® LAG 4300 Shelves have acommon ground signal used by all packs for analog and digital ground (GND) whichwill be in common with the - 48V return path.

The - 48 V RTN of the power filter units (PFUs) are connected to frame ground viaeight grounding screws. Removing these grounding screws will result in the LAG 4300Shelf configuration being configured for mesh-IBN environment.

The ringing filter units (RFU) housings are connected to the cabinet metalwork(potential frame ground FRMGND) via the mounting screws, and via a groundingcable (green wire) which connects the RFU mounting bracket to the frame.

The ringing RTN signal is connected to GRD through a wire to the LAG 4300 Shelfbackplane.

General system planning and engineering Grounding concept for the LAG 4300 System

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................363-211-585Issue 8, September 2008

7-11

AnyMedia® LAG 1900 Shelf powering and ringing - Overview...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Overview

The powering of theAnyMedia® LAG 1900 Shelf includes engineering for thefollowing principles:

• Centralized powering

• Grounding (see“Grounding concept” (p. 7-7))

• Centralized (external) or local internal ringing

• Fan requirements (see“Usage of fan units” (p. 7-32)).

Powering principle

The AnyMedia® LAG 1900 Shelf requires centralized powering with - 48 V DC.

Two external powering - 48 V feeders have to be used. TheAnyMedia® LAG 1900Shelf is equipped with two Power Filter Units (PFUs).

The powering concept for theAnyMedia® LAG 1900 Shelf is as follows:

• Power is connected through the two PFUs, which are housed in the upper row ofthe LAG 1900 Shelves.

• Each PFU feeds one of the two internal power busses.

• The internal power busses are designed to support 20 A each.


• Each PFU contains OR-ing diodes which ensures uninterrupted system operationeven if one input feeder fails.

• Each input feeder must support the full load if the other one fails and thereforeshould be rated at 30 A.

Grounding

The AnyMedia® LAG 1900 Shelf is designed to work in mesh-BN or mesh-IBNenvironments according to EN 300 253. To provide redundancy and decoupling, dualpower distribution is provided.

Centralized ringing supply

For centralized ringing supply the ringing voltage comes from an external ringingsource. If the length of the external unshielded ringing cables exceeds three meters(shielded 10 m) a ringing filter unit (RFU) has to be installed in theAnyMedia® LAG1900 Shelf.

Local ringing supply

For local ringing supply two ringing generator units (RGUs) of the same type have tobe equipped in the upper row of theAnyMedia® LAG 1900 Shelf.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

7-12 363-211-585Issue 8, September 2008

The RGUs are designed to support the following ringing modes:

• Battery-backed (BB) supported by RGU500 or RGU550

• Earth-backed (EB) supported by RGU510 or RGU550.

Separate ringing busses

The AnyMedia® LAG 1900 Shelf has two ringing busses which must be connected to aringing source. The ringing sources RGU500, RGU510 or an external ringing generatorhave to be connected to both ringing inputs of system, and no protection is availablewithin the AnyMedia® LAG 1900 Shelf. If RGU550 is used, one RGU550 feeds bothringing busses and the use of a second RGU550 provides protection. For more detailson the ringing distribution refer to the APOG partNarrowband and ATM xDSLservices.

General system planning and engineering AnyMedia® LAG 1900 Shelf powering and ringing -Overview

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................363-211-585Issue 8, September 2008

7-13

Centralized powering forAnyMedia® LAG 1900 Shelf...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Overview

Centralized powering is used for theAnyMedia® LAG 1900 Shelf in a DC-poweredrack configuration.

Power interfaces

For centralized powering an external - 48 V source is connected to the two feeders ofthe AnyMedia® Access System. This source can be:

• the - 48 V of the central office

• a co-located external AC/DC converter from an uninterrupted mains.

- 48 V source requirements

The external - 48 V source supplies theAnyMedia® LAG 1900 Shelf and the requiredfan unit. The – 48 V source must fulfill the following parameters and regulations

The table below shows the requirements for - 48 V

Parameter Value, range Regulation, Remarks

Voltage –40.5 V to –57 V ETS 300 132-2

Power Filter Unit

For centralized powering two Power Filter Units (PFU503) must be equipped in theupper row of theAnyMedia® LAG 1900 Shelf. It is not allowed to bypass the filtersvia power lugs on the backplane.

Redundant power feeding

Both – 48 V feeders have to be used. The two feeders are connected in parallel insidethe PFU via″OR-ing″ diodes to achieve redundant powering. This means one missinginput voltage will not disrupt the powering of theAnyMedia® LAG 1900 Shelf but thesecond feeder must deliver the load completely.

Fusing the power source

The - 48 V voltage is primary fused with trip-free circuit breakers of a nominal valueof 30 A. Only one power input of theAnyMedia® LAG 1900 Shelf is connected toone circuit breaker.

Power input cables

The power input cables are orderable (seeOrdering Guide).


...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

7-14 363-211-585Issue 8, September 2008

Internal and external ringing forAnyMedia® LAG 1900 Shelf...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Overview

For ringing, theAnyMedia® LAG 1900 Shelf configuration supports provisioning of

• Two internal ringing generator units (RGUs) (installed in the upper row of theLAG 1900 Shelf) or

• One common external ringing source for each LAG 1900 Shelf.

Internal ringing

For internal ringing, ringing supply is provided by 2 RGUs.

The RGU is a 1N dual slot ringing generator unit, which may be plugged in one of theRGU slots of the LAG 1900 Shelf. Three types of RGUs are available:

• RGU500 for battery-backed ringing

• RGU510 for earth-backed ringing.

• RGU550 for battery-backed and earth-backed ringing.

Important! A mix of RGU500, RGU510, and RGU550 within one LAG 1900Shelf is not possible.

The main features and functions of the RGU types are:

• Converts the DC input voltage to an AC ringing voltage for subscribers

• Four ringing frequencies selectable (17/20/25/50 Hz) via jumper settings forRGU500 and RGU510 (default frequency is 25 Hz for RGU500 and 17 Hz forRGU510)

• Eight DIP switches on the RGU550 for selecting

– the ringing frequency (16/20/25/30/50 Hz)

– the ringing output voltage (70/75/80/85/90/95/100 Vrms)

– the ringing mode (earth-backed/battery-backed)

– the master mode (simplex/duplex).The default delivery setting is 25 Hz, 80 Vrms, battery-backed ringing, and″duplex″ mode for packs with interchangeability code >S1:1 or “uncontrolledmode” for packs with interchangeability code S1:1.Note that depending on interchangeability code for the RGU550 packs, the mastermode DIP switch (simplex/duplex) is different labeled. For packs withinterchangeability code S1:1″controlled/uncontrolled″ and for packs withinterchangeability code >S1:1″simplex/duplex″.

• Protection circuits against reverse polarity at the input, for output overvoltageprotection, overcurrent protection, overtemperature protection, and surge protection

• Can continuously provide 30 VA (RGU550: 50 VA)

• Automatic output power control.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................363-211-585Issue 8, September 2008

7-15

Active/standby ringing protection mode

The two internal ringing generator units (RGU550) on theAnyMedia® LAG 1900Shelf are working in active/standby protection mode. The active RGU550 provides aringing voltage to ringing bus 0, where the POTS APs take their ringing voltage from.If the ringing voltage on ringing bus 0 fails, a protection switch to the standbyRGU550 occurs. The two RGU550 are not under the control of the COMDAC, theysupport the protection on their own.

The alarming for the RGU550 in standby mode has been implemented for packs withinterchangeability code >S1:1. The ringing output behavior is identical for all RGUsindependent of interchangeability codes.

External ringing

If the length of the external unshielded ringing cables exceeds three meters (shielded10 m) a ringing filter unit (RFU) has to be installed in the left RGU slot in the upperrow of the LAG 1900 Shelf. When using a RFU the jumper P302 behind the rightRGU slot has to be set.

Jumper settings for internal and external ringing

The table shows the jumper settings for the different ringing configurations.

Ringing configuration RFU needed Setting of P301 Setting of P302

External ringing, oneringing source

optional,depending onthe cablelength

yes/no (1) yes

Internal ringing, two RGUs no no no

Notes:

1. If an RFU is used, the jumper P301 must not be set.

Ringing voltage cables

Ringing input cables are orderable (seeOrdring Guide).

General system planning and engineering Internal and external ringing for AnyMedia® LAG 1900Shelf

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

7-16 363-211-585Issue 8, September 2008

AnyMedia® LAG 4300 Shelf configuration powering andringing - Overview...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Overview

The powering and ringing of theAnyMedia® LAG Shelf configuration includesengineering for the following:

• Centralized powering

• Internal and external ringing

• Grounding (see“Grounding concept for the LAG 4300 System” (p. 7-9))

• Fan requirements (see“Configuration inAnyMedia® LAG 4300 System” (p. 7-32)).


...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................363-211-585Issue 8, September 2008

7-17

Centralized powering for LAG 4300 Shelves...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Overview

The AnyMedia® LAG 4300 Shelf configuration requires centralized powering with- 48 V DC.

Depending on the local specifications theAnyMedia® LAG 4300 Shelf configuration isdesigned to work in mesh-BN or mesh-IBN environments according to EN 300 253.To provide redundancy and decoupling, dual power distribution is provided.

Powering principle

The powering concept for theAnyMedia® LAG 4300 Shelf is as follows:

• Power is connected through the PFUs, which are housed in the power distributionframe.

• Each PFU supplies power to the shelves through two 20 A breakers.


• Each PFU contains OR-ing diodes which ensures uninterrupted system operationeven if one input feeder fails.

• Since each input feeder must support the full output load if the other one fails, eachshould be rated at 40 A.

• As the power distribution frame houses up to ten PFUs, up to twenty 40 A feedersmay be connected to the power distribution frame, depending on the systemconfiguration.

The required number of PFUs and feeders is shown in the table below

Configuration Number of PFUs Number of 20 A feeders

1 LAG 4300 Shelf 4 8

2 LAG 4300 Shelves 8 16

2 LAG 4300 Shelves and 2ETSI V5 Shelves

10 20

Power distribution frame

The power distribution frame is located on the front side of the cabinet. It houses up toten PFU520. The PFUs are numbered 1 through 12, where PFU slots 7 and 8 are notused.

Power input cables

The power input cables are user supplied. They are orderable (ED7C867-31, G31).They are 8 AWG, rated for 900C operation. The connector is Molex 42816-0412 usingterminal 42815-0031.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

7-18 363-211-585Issue 8, September 2008

Internal cabling

The following PFUs supply the different shelves of theAnyMedia® LAG 4300 Shelfconfiguration.

• PFU520-1 to PFU520-4 supply LAG 4300 Shelf 1

• PFU520-5 and PFU520-6 supply ETSI V5 Shelves 2 and 4 (redundant ETSI V5Shelf configuration)

• PFU520-7 and PFU520-8 are not used

• PFU520-9 to PFU520-12 supply the LAG 4300 Shelf 3.

Power filter unit (PFU520)

The PFU520 accommodates two internal filters for two power supply feeders,″Feed 0″and″Feed 1″.

The figure below shows the PFU520 front side and rear side.

Main function PFU

The main functions of the PFU are:

• Noise filtering of both DC power input feeders in both directions

• Protection of the LAG 4300 Shelf configuration against transient overvoltages

• Providing an OR-ing diode or single feed functionality (if one input feeder goes outof service, the other feeder can carry the entire load)

• Voltage gap buffering

• Surge protection.

PFU520

FE

ED

0

FE

ED

1

Feed BRTN B

RTN AFeed A

P1

J2

General system planning and engineering Centralized powering for LAG 4300 Shelves

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................363-211-585Issue 8, September 2008

7-19

Internal and external ringing for LAG 4300 Shelves...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Overview

The AnyMedia® LAG 4300 Shelf configuration supports provisioning of

• One or two internal ringing generator pack(s) RGP100 (installed in the upper rowof the LAG 4300 Shelf) or

• One or two internal ringing generator unit(s) RGU100 (installed in any applicationpack slot of the LAG 4300 Shelf) or

• One common external ringing source for each LAG 4300 Shelf and ETSI V5 Shelfin maximum LAG configuration (via ringing filter units RFU520).

The ringing sources for theAnyMedia® LAG 4300 Shelf configuration (internal as wellas external ringing sources) can feed one or two ringing busses on the backplane,which are connected to each AP, the CIU and the COMDAC slot.

Important! No alarm connection is needed. Each COMDAC monitors the tworinging bus voltages.

Important! The ETSI V5 Shelves always use external ringing voltage. Theprotection of external ringing supply (if required) must be supplied at the source.

Internal ringing

For internal ringing, ringing supply protection can be provided by the provisioning oftwo RGPs or two RGUs.

Important! If a RGP/RGU for the LAG 4300 Shelves is used, the connectionbetween connector P115 on the LAG 4300 Shelf connector field and the RFU mustbe disconnected.

The RGU100 provides OR-ing diodes onboard by its own.

Main function RGP100

The RGP100 is a dual slot pack, which may be plugged in slot 40/41 and slot 42/43 ofthe LAG 4300 Shelf. The main features and functions of the RGP100 are:

• Ringing power 100 VA (sufficient for all POTS APs with 32 z-ports in a fullyequippedAnyMedia® LAG 4300 Shelf)

• Programmable ringing voltage 75, 80, 85, or 90 Vrms

• Three programmable ringing frequencies (20/25/30 Hz)

• Battery-backed or earth-backed ringing

• Programmable overload threshold

For protection, reliability, and load sharing a second RGP is used.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

7-20 363-211-585Issue 8, September 2008

Main function RGU100

The RGU100 is a 3N one slot wide ringing generator unit, which may be plugged inany application pack slot of the LAG 4300 Shelf. The RGU100 operational aspects canbe configured via the UART-based control link from COMDAC or via jumper setting(eight DIP switches). The main features and functions of the RGU100 are:

• Ringing power 100 VA (sufficient for all POTS APs with 32 z-ports in a fullyequippedAnyMedia® LAG 4300 Shelf)

• Ringing frequency (16/20/25/30/50 Hz)

• Ringing output voltage (70/75/80/85/90/95/100 Vrms)

• Ringing mode (earth-backed/battery-backed)

• Master mode (controlled/uncontrolled)The default delivery setting for the master mode is “controlled” mode. In the“uncontrolled” mode, the ringing frequency, the ringing output voltage, and theringing mode are configured by the DIP switch settings. In the “controlled” mode,these parameters are defined via the COMDAC.

Load sharing mode

The LAG 4300 Shelf provides two internal ringing busses. Both ringing busses areused in a load sharing mode with two RGP100. This load sharing mode can still beused together with an RGU100 and one RGP100 or external ringer, where the RGU100feeds ringing bus 0 (from any AP slot). The ringing bus 1 is fed by an RGP100 in APslot 43 or an external ringer. So a mix of RGP100 and RGU100 within one LAG 4300Shelf is possible.

Active/standby ringing protection mode (RGU 100)

The two internal ringing generator units (RGU100) on the LAG 4300 Shelf areworking in active/standby protection mode. The active RGU100 provides a ringingvoltage on ringing bus 0, where the POTS APs take their ringing voltage from. If theringing voltage on ringing bus 0 fails, a protection switch to the standby RGU100 isperformed under control of the COMDAC.

Ringing filter units (RFUs) for external ringing

In the LAG 4300 Shelf configuration up to three ringing filter units (RFUs) arecurrently needed. If external ringing source is used they are required to distribute theexternal ringing voltage to the shelves. The RFUs are located in the distribution frameon the rear side of the cabinet.

The following table shows the ringing distribution:

RFU Number Connects to:

RFU1 ETSI V5 Shelf 2 J1 ETSI V5 Shelf 4 J1

RFU2 LAG 4300 Shelf 1 P115

RFU3 LAG 4300 Shelf 3 P115

General system planning and engineering Internal and external ringing for LAG 4300 Shelves

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................363-211-585Issue 8, September 2008

7-21

Ringing voltage input cables

Ringing input cables are user supplied and orderable. The cables must be 16 AWG,rated for 85˚C operation. The connector is a Molex 39-01-4031 using terminal39-00-0078.

Fusing values

The ringing filter units are equipped with two front accessible glass-type fuses (5x20)of a nominal value of 2A. Only the output connector terminal for connecting the ringpotential (RRG) is protected.

General system planning and engineering Internal and external ringing for LAG 4300 Shelves

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

7-22 363-211-585Issue 8, September 2008

AnyMedia® ETSI V5 Shelf powering and ringing - Overview...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Overview

The powering and ringing of theAnyMedia® ETSI V5 Shelf includes engineering forthe following:

• Centralized powering and ringing

• Internal ringing

• Grounding (see“Grounding concept” (p. 7-7))

• Fan requirements (see“Usage of fan units” (p. 7-32)).

The AnyMedia® ETSI V5 Shelf requires centralized powering with - 48 V DC.

The AnyMedia® Access System is designed to work in mesh-BN or mesh-IBNenvironments according to EN 300 253. To provide redundancy and decoupling, dualpower distribution is provided. Therefore theAnyMedia® ETSI V5 Shelf has two- 48 V inputs.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................363-211-585Issue 8, September 2008

7-23

Centralized powering and ringing for ETSI V5 Shelves...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Overview

Centralized powering and ringing is used for theAnyMedia® ETSI V5 Shelf in aDC-powered rack configuration.

Power interfaces

For centralized powering an external - 48 V source is connected to the two feeders ofthe AnyMedia® Access System. This source can be:

• the - 48 V of the central office

• a co-located external AC/DC converter from an uninterrupted mains.

- 48 V source requirements

The external - 48 V source supplies theAnyMedia® ETSI V5 Shelf and the optionalfan units. The – 48 V source must fulfill the following parameters and regulations

The table below shows the requirements for - 48 V


Voltage –40.5 V to –57 V ETS 300 132-2

Power Filter Unit

For centralized powering the Power Filter Unit (PFU501) must be equipped. It is notallowed to bypass the filter via power lugs on the backplane.

Redundant power feeding

Both – 48 V feeders have to be used. The two feeders are connected in parallel insidethe PFU501 via″OR-ing″ diodes to achieve redundant powering. This means onemissing input voltage will not disrupt the powering of theAnyMedia® Access Systembut the second feeder must deliver the load completely.

Dual power feeding

If the jumper MP1 inside the PFU501 is not equipped, normal dual power feeding isachieved. This means one missing input voltage will disrupt the powering of half ofthe APs (except the AFMs in the slots 15/16).

Fusing the power source

The - 48 V voltage is primary fused by theAnyMedia® Access System with trip-freecircuit breakers of a nominal value of 25 A. Only one power input of theAnyMedia®

ETSI V5 Shelf is connected to one circuit breaker.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

7-24 363-211-585Issue 8, September 2008

Important! Back-up fusing is required, because interruption capacity may be toolow.

Requirements for external ringing source

An external ringing source with a ringing frequency of 20 Hz or 25 Hz is required.

The backup of the ringing supply for theAnyMedia® Access System is also achievedby the external ringing plant.

The ringing source must fulfill the following parameters and regulations


input voltage (battery packedringing)

75 to 105 Vrms

superimposed on DCcomponent of - 40.5 Vto - 57 V. The tipconductor shall beearthed.

IEC 60950, EN 60950The ringing voltage isclassified as hazardousvoltage.

ringing frequencies (for example) 17 to 23 Hz or 22 to 28Hz

nominal 20 Hz or25 Hz, no mixed mode

harmonic distortion of the ringingsignal

less than 5% recommended

passive load AC min. 50 VA The input power shallbe limited with 1 Afuses.resistive load DC min. 10 W

allowed transients limited to values below470Vp-0

see the important notebelow

rise time of the applied inputvoltage

limited to values below200V/ms

Ringing Filter Unit

For centralized ringing the Ringing Filter Unit (RFU) must be used, if the distance tothe ringing source is longer than three meters.

Important! Generally all ringing cables from external ringing sources where theunshielded cable length exceeds 3 m or theshielded cable length exceeds 10 mmust be filtered. For ringing the use of the ringing filter unit (RFU100) with thecomcode 108791278 is recommended. The RFU is designed to be mounted on aT-rail.

Fusing the ringing source

The ringing source is primary fused by glas-type fuses (5×20) of a nominal value of1 A via inside the RFUs. If the RFU is not used an external ringing fuse of 1 A mustbe provided.

General system planning and engineering Centralized powering and ringing for ETSI V5 Shelves

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................363-211-585Issue 8, September 2008

7-25

Centralized powering and ringing in a DC-powerd rack

The next figure shows the centralized powering and ringing and the grounding in aDC-powered rack.

Bonding ring conductor/green

AP: 3,4,7,8,11,12,15,16

-48VA

-48VRTNA

-48VB

-48VRTNB

-48A

-48RTN

-48B

-48A

-48RTN

-48B

-48RTN

AnyMedia shelves 1 to 3

PFU 501

AnyMedia rack

E12E13

Power lugs, NO connection!

E10E11

-48AE

-48RTNE

-48BE

-48RTNE

RRG0

TRG0

AP: 1,2,5,6,9,10,13,14

Via mounting screws

Connection inside thefuse blocks via T-rail/stud

F1 to 3 (25A)

F7 to 9 (25A)

wire

Note: Three single ringing sources are connected to F21 to F23 directly, removing the bridges from theclamp to F21...23. The Ring_Return wire must be earthed externally!FFCU, circuit breakers F4 and F10 and the cabling between them is part of the retofit kit ED7C842-30 Gr.2.

IO_E1 packs are only necessary if TDM COMDAC is used

F4 (2A)

F10 (2A)

L-

N+

L-

N+

RNG

Clamp

Potential equalization lines

COMDAC: 1,2CIUIO_E1: 1 to 4HDLC: 1,2

Fan3

Fan2

Fan1

J1,4/8

J1,4/8

J1,4/8

-48BE

-48AEFFCU

J3

J2

J1

J4

J4

A1

B1

RFU1J11 J21

F21 (1A)RFU2J11 J21

F21 (1A)RFU3J11 J21

F21 (1A)RRG

TRG

RRG0

TRG0

RRG0

TRG0

J1 (shelf1)

J1 (shelf2)

J1 (shelf3)

MP1

RFP

( 6 mm2 / 9 AWG recommended)

( 16 mm2 / 6 AWG)

General system planning and engineering Centralized powering and ringing for ETSI V5 Shelves

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

7-26 363-211-585Issue 8, September 2008

Internal ringing for ETSI V5 Shelves...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Overview

For internal ringing, theAnyMedia® ETSI V5 Shelf configuration supportsprovisioning of one or two internal ringing generator unit(s) RGU100 (installed in anyapplication pack slot of theAnyMedia® ETSI V5 Shelf).

Ringing supply protection can be provided by the provisioning of two RGUs.

Main function RGU100

The RGU100 is a 3N one slot wide ringing generator unit, which may be plugged inany application pack slot of theAnyMedia® ETSI V5 Shelf. The RGU100 operationalaspects can be configured via the UART-based control link from COMDAC or viajumper setting (eight DIP switches). The main features and functions of the RGU100are:

• Ringing power 100 VA

• Ringing frequency (16/20/25/30/50 Hz)

• Ringing output voltage (70/75/80/85/90/95/100 Vrms)

• Ringing mode (earth-backed/battery-backed)

• Master mode (controlled/uncontrolled)The default delivery setting for the master mode is “controlled” mode. In the“uncontrolled” mode, the ringing frequency, the ringing output voltage, and theringing mode are configured by the DIP switch settings. In the “controlled” mode,these parameters are defined via the COMDAC.

Active/standby ringing protection mode

The two internal ringing generator units (RGU100) on theAnyMedia® ETSI V5 Shelfare working in active/standby protection mode. The active RGU100 provides a ringingvoltage on ringing bus 0, where the POTS APs take their ringing voltage from. If theringing voltage on ringing bus 0 fails, a protection switch to the standby RGU100 isperformed under control of the COMDAC in “controlled” mode or by the RGUs oftheir own in “uncontrolled” mode.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................363-211-585Issue 8, September 2008

7-27

AnyMedia® LAG 200 Shelf powering and ringing...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Principle

The AnyMedia® LAG 200 Shelf supports local and centralized powering and internaland external ringing via:

• A power filter unit (PFU503) for centralized DC-powered applications in centraloffices

• A rectifier for AC-powered applications (included in the configuration in the indoorcabinet)

• A ringing generator unit if internal ringing voltage supply for VoIP applications isrequired.

The powering and ringing options can be adapted via jumpers on the I/O-connectors ofthe backplane.

Centralized powering

Centralized powering is used for DC-powered applications. An external power source(- 48 V) will be connected to the shelf connection panel (connector J101). In thisapplication a PFU is required in the shelf.

Local powering

The local powering is used in AC-powered applications. In this application a rectifier isrequired. The rectifier is already included in the configuration in the indoor cabinet.

For bypassing the empty PFU slot, a jumper is provided for connector J102 on thebackplane. The jumper bridges the external power supply line (-48 VA) with theinternal power bus -48 V. The internal power bus is dimensioned to support 10 A.

The figure shows the internal power distribution of the LAG 200 shelf with the jumper.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

7-28 363-211-585Issue 8, September 2008

Power consumption

For the LAG 200 application the power consumption depends on the differentconfigurations.

Power consumption of common packs/units:

Common packs/units Maximum power consumption - normal case

ESIM LPE408 Approx. 36 W

RGU550 66 W

Fan unit 50 W

Assumed application pack (AP) power consumption depending on the traffic rate andAP type:

Application packs Pack power at supply voltage

42 V 52 V 56 V

32 port VoIP AP LPZ6001 25.8 W 29.2 W 30.5 W

32 port VoIP AP LPZ6002 52.0 W 61.5 W 65.3 W

VSIM LPV417 Approx. 40 W (in worst case3)

Notes:

1. For traffic rate 9 CCS.

2. For traffic rate 36 CCS.

PFU

-48 VA

-48 V

RGU

FAN

AP 1 - 3

PIN1 PIN3

J101

J102

General system planning and engineering AnyMedia® LAG 200 Shelf powering and ringing

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................363-211-585Issue 8, September 2008

7-29

3. All lines off hook, 0 loop length.

Fan unit

A fan unit is mandatory in the LAG 200 Shelf. Additional filtering is provided on thefan unit to prevent fan noise from affecting line service.

Fusing

The LAG 200 Shelf is fused either by the PFU, the rectifier or by internal fuses to thecircuit packs. If the rectifier fuse is blown, the rectifier must be replaced.

Rectifier

For AC-powered applications a rectifier is required. TheAnyMedia® LAG 200 Shelfconfiguration in the indoor cabinet is shipped with a rectifier.

The rectifier is mounted on the rear of the LAG 200 Shelf, on the side where the IPAPs are inserted. From the rectifier backplane power cables are routed to the LAG 200Shelf.

The rectifier is designed for 300 W (derated) and operates at 90 V up to 264 V.

Ringing supply

For VoIP applications, ringing supply is required. It is supported by a single ringingbus, which is sourced either from an external ringing source or internally from aringing generator unit (RGU550) in the shelf.

• Internal ringing supply:For internal ringing supply an RGU is inserted into theAnyMedia® LAG 200Shelf. The backplane passes the voltage through to the APs transparently.The supply voltage of the ringing generator is -48 V DC.

• External ringing supply:External ringing voltage is connected to connector P113 on the backplane. Ajumper is provided for connector P301. Bypassing the empty RGU slot, it bridgesthe external ringing voltage with the internal ringing bus.

The figure shows the ringing architecture and distribution of the LAG 200 Shelf withthe jumper location.


....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

7-30 363-211-585Issue 8, September 2008

Ringinggenerator

Ringing bus

RGU

AP 2

AP 3

AP 1

P113Externalringing P301

Ringingjumper


....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................363-211-585Issue 8, September 2008

7-31

Usage of fan units...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Overview

Depending on which shelf type is used and which type of service is supported withinthe shelves, fan units may or may not be required. Although fan units may be includedin the delivery of the shelf, there are also separate deliverable items For details refer tothe Ordering Guide 363-211-144.

Configuration with LAG shelves

Configuration with LAG shelves strictly require a fan unit above each LAG shelfindependent of the service supported.

Configuration with ETSI V5 shelves in racks

The AnyMedia® rack variants provisioned for NB-only services up to an expectedtraffic rate of less than 0.25 Erlang (exception: Configurations equipped with″ZeusSeries″ packs LPZ12x for 32 Z ports or with LPZ64x for 64 Z ports)do not requirethe useof fan units.

Rack variants equipped for NB-only services with an expected traffic rate of greaterthan 0.25 Erlangor POTS services via LPZ12x or via LPZ64xor ATM xDSL-onlyservicesor mixed servicesrequire the useof fan units.

On delivery theAnyMedia® racks arenot equipped with fan units.

Configuration in AnyMedia ® LAG 4300 System

The AnyMedia® LAG 4300 Shelf configuration is factory equipped with up to two fanunits and two fan filters to ensure correct heat dissipation.

One fan unit is accessible through the front side of the cabinet, and one is accessiblethrough the rear side.

The figure below shows the connector and LED arrangement of the fan unit.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

7-32 363-211-585Issue 8, September 2008

The fan unit is monitored by the COMDAC and powered via the fan connector P117.

The fan alarm will be signalled by the following:

• Bay alarm LED on the upper part of the cabinet is red

• MJ LED on the COMDAC is red

• GSI/Element Manager raise a fan alarm.

Maintenance intervals for fan unit

Depending on the working conditions, check the fans for replacement after 70,000working hours in a central office environment (about 8 years if working 24 hours aday). If a cabinet fan alarm occurs, attend to the fan units and service themimmediately. Replace defective fan units without delay.

Each fan unit is equipped with an LED which indicates the fan status. The LED shouldbe green for operational status.

Maintenance intervals for filters

Check the fan filters to determine if they need to be cleaned about 2 months after theinitial installation and four months after that and then every 90 days there after. Adjustthe inspection period based on the cleanliness of the environment, but inspect at leastevery 90 days after six months of installation.

P117

1

Fan 1 Fan 2 Fan 3

Alarm relay

soldering side

LED

APA-843991 fan unit

P117Lucent

ACTIVE

ACTIVE LED (green) will light in case of normal operation )

FAN connector

General system planning and engineering Usage of fan units

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................363-211-585Issue 8, September 2008

7-33

Alarming

Overview...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Purpose

This section provides information about the alarming concept and the provisioning ofenvironmental alarms for the different shelf types.

Contents

Alarming concept for environmental alarms inAnyMedia® ETSI V5Shelf

7-35


7-37


7-40


...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

7-34 363-211-585Issue 8, September 2008

Alarming concept for environmental alarms inAnyMedia®

ETSI V5 Shelf...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Overview

The CIU supports 8 miscellaneous alarm closure inputs. The alarm input polarity ofeach miscellaneous alarm closure input can be set to “normal” or “inverse”. If thepolarity value is set to normal, a closure to ground indicates an environmental faultcondition. If the polarity value is set to inverse, a closure to ground indicates the goodcondition. The 8 inputs will be used for power, environmental monitoring and/orcustomer-designated monitoring.

Miscellaneous alarm inputs

The miscellaneous alarm inputs can be provisioned via the SET-ATTR-ENV TL1command. Here the alarm type, the severity, polarity and integration time can beassigned to each individual alarm input. The default alarm polarity is “normal” and thedefault integration time is 5 seconds. Alarms detected at the miscellaneous alarm inputsare treated in the same way as alarms in the system itself. An additional LED at theCIU indicates an active alarm input.

Note:Alarm integration time provisioning is only possible together with a DTP501.

Sample miscellaneous alarms

The following table provides an example of the environmental fault conditions that canbe monitored.

Miscellaneous FaultCondition 1

Possible Cause

mc-1-6, FAN, MN High cabinet temperature caused by fan unit fault

mc-1-7, TAMPER, MJ Intrusion door open (cabinet)

mc-1-8, MISC1.....MISC64,NONE

User-defined usage

Notes:

1. Abbreviations used as at the TL1 interface (AID, condition type, severity level, mc =miscellaneous contact)

ALARM IN connector

The alarm inputs of the CIU are connected to theALARM INconnector on the shelfconnection panel (SCP). This input is connected to the rack connection panel (RCP).For this purpose a cable coming from the RCP is plugged into theALARM INconnector on the SCP.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................363-211-585Issue 8, September 2008

7-35

Office alarm outputs

There are three software-controlled output relays on the CIU. Each relay provides atwo-way contact with neutral position (dry contact closures). They are used to indicateactive alarms. Each output relay is provisionable to one or more alarm severity levels.

The CIU alarm relays are operated if alarms with corresponding the alarm severitylevel are detected. In the event of a system power fault all relays are operated toindicate the alarm. For theAnyMedia® Access System the common ground has to beconnected to the - 48RTN potential.

The relays are connected to theALARM OUTconnector on the shelf connection panel(SCP). This output is connected to the RCP. For this purpose a cable coming from theRCP is plugged into theALARM OUTconnector.

Alarm cutoff function (ACO)

The ACO function provides the possibility to immediately cut off the audible/visiblealarms active on the alarm interface outputs. The ACO function can be activated bypressing the ACO button on the CIU or with the TL1 command.

Inhibiting/resuming alarm

The system provides the capability to inhibit and resume autonomous alarm reportingto any narrowband OAM&P interfaces.

It is possible to disable all alarms of one (or more) specific entity or of an entitygroup. The ability to disable alarms can be useful for example during troubleshootingto avoid a great amount of alarm reports.

General system planning and engineering Alarming concept for environmental alarms in AnyMedia®

ETSI V5 Shelf

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

7-36 363-211-585Issue 8, September 2008


LAG 1900 Shelf...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Alarm input conditions

The environmental alarms are detected by the 8 alarm inputs of theAnyMedia® LAG1900 Shelf which are connected to the alarm connection panel (ACP). These 8 alarminputs TLM1 to TLM8 are ground closures. For theAnyMedia® LAG 1900 Shelf thealarm inputs TLM3 and TLM4 are redefined in order to detect a removal of the fanunit and of the RGU550.

The alarm outputs of the fan and RGU550 are internally routed to theAnyMedia®

LAG 1900 Shelf alarm inputs TLM3 and TLM4 via the backplane. Therefore the alarminputs TLM3 and TLM4 are forbidden for external use.

For TLM3 and TLM4 a closure to GND is the good condition.

The rest of the TLMs are for user-defined usage and can be changed in the field by themaintenance personnel. When changing these TLMs additional cabling in the ACP maybe necessary.

The miscellaneous alarm inputs can be provisioned via the SET-ATTR-ENV TL1command. Here the alarm type, the severity, polarity and integration time can beassigned to each individual alarm input. For the TLM 1, 2, 5, 6, 7, 8, the default alarmpolarity is “normal” and the default integration time is 5 seconds. For TLM3 andTLM4, the default alarm polarity is “inverse” and the default integration time is 5seconds as well.

The alarm inputs are connected to the alarm interface input detectors (TLM in) on theCIU.

Alarms of the LAG 1900

The following table shows an example of using alarms in theAnyMedia® LAG 1900Shelf

AID setting 1 RecommendedALMTYPE;environmentalfault 2

Recommendedalarm severity

Possible failure causes Alarm input(connectorJ108)

mc-1-1 MISC1 Customer specific3 TLM1


mc-1-3 FAN MJ The alarm message ispredefined

• Fan unit removal(ground is disconnected)

• Fan unit failure

• Internal fuse inside thefan is blown.

TLM3 4


...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................363-211-585Issue 8, September 2008

7-37

AID setting 1 RecommendedALMTYPE;environmentalfault 2


Possible failure causes Alarm input(connectorJ108)

mc-1-4 MISC4 MJ The alarm message isuser-defined, for example:RGU550 failure:

• The ringing output ACvoltage drops below 60Vrms during normaloperation (for S1:1)

• The ringing output ACvoltage drops below 50Vrms in constant powermode (for S1:1)

• Over temperature

• Over voltage of the ACcomponent (105 Vrms)

• In duplex operation theconfiguration of bothRGUs does not match

• Hardware diagnosticfailure.

For interchangeability code>S1:1, the status conditionof the standby RGU550 isalarmed, in duplexoperation mode as follows:

• detection of any failureon the standby RGU550

• activation of alarm ifstandby RGU550 ismissing.

TLM4 4





Notes:

1. Note for setting: mc-1-1..8 where the first 1 is the indication for theAnyMedia® LAG 1900 Shelf,the second is the alarm input number corresponding to TLM1 to TLM8.

2. All alarm types (ALMTYPE) and alarm messages (ALMMSG) for the AIDs mc-1-1...8corresponding to the alarm inputs TLM1 to TLM8 must be provisioned by the operator via the PC GSI(“Fault Management”, command SET-ATTR-ENV). For provisioning the alarm messages to the AIDs


LAG 1900 Shelf

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

7-38 363-211-585Issue 8, September 2008

mc-1-1...8 the operator can assign the predefined ALMTYPE (for example FAN) using thepredefined unchangeable alarm messages or the operator must create a new alarm message in the ALMMessage input line using the ALMTYPEMISC1 to MISC8.

3. For TLMs coming from the external alarm inputs additional cross connections in the ACP are necessary,seeInstallation Manual.

4. Internally routed via the backplane, not for external use.


LAG 1900 Shelf

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................363-211-585Issue 8, September 2008

7-39


LAG 4300 Shelf...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Location of alarm connection panels ACP

The alarm connection panels (ACP1 and ACP2) are located at the top rear of theAnyMedia® LAG 4300 cabinet as shown in the next figure. On ACP1 reside all alarmsof AnyMedia® LAG 4300 Shelf 1 and ETSI V5 Shelf 2, the ACP2 contains all alarmsof AnyMedia® LAG 4300 Shelf 3 and ETSI V5 Shelf 4. The following alarmconnectors are provided on the shelves:

• Alarm input conditions forAnyMedia® LAG 4300 Shelf and ETSI V5 Shelf

• Alarm output conditions forAnyMedia® LAG 4300 Shelf and ETSI V5 Shelf

• Fan unit alarm output only forAnyMedia® LAG 4300 Shelf

• Summary alarm output on COMDAC520 optional only forAnyMedia® LAG 4300Shelf.

The connectors are precabled and cross-connected to the alarm connection panels(ACP1 and ACP2).

The figure below shows the location of the alarm connection panels in the distributionframe. The distribution frame is located on top of the rear side of the cabinet.

Alarm connection panel (ACP )

The alarm connection panel (ACP) is a panel with 96 wire wrap pins, divided in sixpin columns (A to F).


...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

7-40 363-211-585Issue 8, September 2008

The table below shows the different pin columns and their connections

Pincolumn

Description Connected to

A Alarm out LAG 4300 Shelf(used for CIU alarm contactsCR, MJ, MN)

AnyMedia® LAG 4300 Shelf connector J105

B Alarm out ETSI V5 Shelf(used for CIU alarm contactsCR, MJ, MN)

ETSI V5 Shelf connector F2

C Alarm in LAG 4300 Shelf(used for TLM inputs on theCIU)

LAG 4300 Shelf connector J111

D Alarm in ETSI V5 Shelf(used for TLM inputs on theCIU)

ETSI V5 Shelf connector J3

E Fan unit alarm out andCOMDAC520 summaryalarm out

LAG 4300 Shelf connector J120

F Spare (for future use)

Default ″alarm wiring ″ on ACP

The following alarms are wire wrapped on the ACPs by default and will lead to a bayalarm (one of the two bay alarm summary LED will lit):

• Major fuse alarm (MJF) - circuit breaker on the PFU520 is open or tripped

• Fan unit alarm (FAN)

Optional ″alarm wiring ″ on ACP

The following alarms can be wire wrapped on the ACPs optionally (during installationby customer request) and will lead to a bay alarm (one of the two bay alarm summaryLED will lit):

• Output alarms for CIU alarm contacts

– critical (CRALM)

– major (MJALM)

– minor (MNALM)

• COMDAC summary alarm (SUALM)

For detailed information about ACP wiring and cabling between ACP and the alarmconnectors, see theInstallation Manual for AnyMedia® LAG System.


LAG 4300 Shelf

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................363-211-585Issue 8, September 2008

7-41

Alarm input conditions

The internal environmental alarms (fan, fuse, ...) are detected by the 8 alarm inputs ofthe AnyMedia® LAG 4300 Shelf (via the backplanes of the shelves and cables to thealarm connection panel ACP). These 8 alarm inputs are ground closures. For theAnyMedia® LAG 4300 Shelf the alarm inputs TLM3 and TLM6 are factorycross-connected as described in“Default alarms of the LAG 4300” (p. 7-43).

The rest of the TLMs are for user-defined usage and can be changed in the field by themaintenance personnel.

The miscellaneous alarm inputs can be provisioned via the SET-ATTR-ENV TL1command. Here the alarm type, the severity, polarity and integration time can beassigned to each individual alarm input. The default alarm polarity is “normal” and thedefault integration time is 5 seconds.

Two alarm inputs of theAnyMedia® LAG 4300 Shelf are not accessible by thecustomer. The alarm outputs of the fan and PFU circuit breakers are internally(cabinet) routed via ACP to theAnyMedia® LAG 4300 Shelf alarm inputs and viacircuitry on the ACPs to control the bay alarm summary LEDs. They are alsoconnected to the alarm interface input detectors (TLM in) on the CIU to indicate thefan and fuse failure alarms.

Bay alarm summary LEDs

For theAnyMedia® LAG 4300 Shelves one bay alarm summary LED per cabinet sideis available, one for the front side cabinet bay and one for the rear side cabinet bay(see“Front view and side view of the cabinet” (p. 3-15)). This bay alarm summaryLED is switched on when a failure in the related cabinet bay is detected and is visibleto a local operator even if the cabinet doors are closed.

The bay alarm summary LED is accessed via the ACP. It operates″directly″ onoccurrence of fan unit or fuse failures by wiring the appropriate alarm outputs of thefan and PFUs to the ACP. The LED can also be operated″indirectly″ through theCOMDAC on occurrence of any narrowband or broadband failures by wiring one ofthe alarm interface outputs of the CIU to the ACP. In a broadband-only system the bayalarm summary LED is only operated on occurrence of failures whose alarm outputsare″directly″ wired to the ACP.

The alarm summary status of the BB-subsystems are sent to the COMDAC and theCOMDAC reports it via a data summary alarm. Thus, via this mechanism it is alsopossible to indicate broadband related failures on the bay alarm summary LED″indirectly″ via the alarm interface outputs of the CIU.

Important! The ″alarm wiring″ to/from the ACP may also require inverters ordecoupling devices, when interfacing to alarm inputs for other network elements.The ″alarm wiring″ may be changed in the field by installation/service personnel.


LAG 4300 Shelf

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

7-42 363-211-585Issue 8, September 2008

Default alarms of the LAG 4300

The table below shows an example of using alarms in theAnyMedia® LAG 4300Shelf.

AnyMedia ®

LAG 4300Shelf AIDsetting 1

RecommendedALMTYPE 2;environmentalfault 3


Possible failure causes AnyMedia ®

LAG 4300Shelf alarminput(connectorJ111)



mc-1-3 MJF MJ The alarm message ispredefined

Major fuse alarm(monitoring)

Circuit breaker on thePFU520 open or tripped(cause: For exampleshort-circuit, overload,....)

TLM3



mc-1-6 FAN MJ The alarm message ispredefined

• Fan unit removal(ground is disconnected)

• One of the three internalfans is defective or isblocked

• Internal fuse inside thefan is blown

TLM6



Notes:

1. Note for setting: mc-1-1..8 where the first 1 is the indication for theAnyMedia® LAG 4300 Shelf,the second is the alarm input number corresponding to TLM1 to TLM8.

2. All alarm types (ALMTYPE) and alarm messages (ALMMSG) for the AIDs mc-1-1...8corresponding to the alarm inputs TLM1 to TLM8 must be provisioned by the operator via the PC GSI(“Fault Management”, command SET-ATTR-ENV). For provisioning the alarm messages to the AIDsmc-1-1...8 the operator can assign the predefined ALMTYPE (e.g. FAN or MJF) using the predefinedunchangeable alarm messages or the operator must create a new alarm message in the ALM Messageinput line using the ALMTYPEMISC1 to MISC8.

3. For theAnyMedia® LAG 4300 Shelf the alarm inputs TLM3 and TLM6 are factory cross-connected onthe ACPs as described in the table.


LAG 4300 Shelf

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................363-211-585Issue 8, September 2008

7-43

4. For user-defined TLMs additional cross connections in the ACP1 or ACP2 are necessary, seeInstallationManual for AnyMedia® LAG System.


LAG 4300 Shelf

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

7-44 363-211-585Issue 8, September 2008

Synchronization and timing

Considerations for synchronization and timing...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Overview

Network synchronization is critical for error-free services. Synchronization problemswill manifest themselves as clicking in voice calls, distortion of video, retransmissionin data calls, or dropping of data or facsimile (fax) calls altogether. Correctsynchronization engineering will ensure transmission quality and network performanceby reducing timing slips and limiting network degradation from synchronization faultsthat are passed on to theAnyMedia® Access System.

Synchronization modes

The system supports different synchronization and timing modes:

• Loop timed mode (E1 or station clock)

• External synchronization modes

• Free-running mode

The free-running mode can be selected via a TL1 command. For free-runningoperation, the system derives its timing from an internal crystal oscillator. Thefree-running mode provides no holdover capability. The free-running mode is intendedonly for system turn-up and for backup operation during fault conditions.

For a detailed description of the synchronization modes refer to the APOG partNarrowband and ATM xDSL services.

The figure below shows the different clock sources for theAnyMedia® Access System.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................363-211-585Issue 8, September 2008

7-45

Since the E1 link signals may be sourced from different network elements (NEs), all ofthese NEs and the station clock, if applicable, must derive their timing from a timingsource traceable to the same primary reference source (PRS).

General system planning and engineering Considerations for synchronization and timing

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

7-46 363-211-585Issue 8, September 2008

Passive clock distribution for LAG 4300 Shelves...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Overview

The Passive Clock Distribution panels (PCDs) are only applicable for external officeclocks. TheAnyMedia® LAG 4300 Shelf configuration supports 2 modes for externalclock distribution.

• DOTS clock configurationIn this mode the DOTS clock feeds both LAG 4300 Shelves in duplex mode. Thesystems in the ETSI V5 Shelves are line-timed from an E1 input and are notconnected to the external timing source.

• Station clock configurationIn this mode the station clock feeds all four shelves in simplex mode.

Passive clock distribution (PCD) for DOTS clock

To support redundancy of the external clock in DOTS clock configurations, the cabinetcontains two PCDs, PCD1 and PCD2 which are mounted in the distribution frame ontop of the cabinet rear side. Both PCDs distribute the clock to the LAG 4300 Shelvesin the cabinet.

For a station clock configuration only PCD1 is used to distribute the clock to all fourshelves in the cabinet.

Each PCD can terminate the clock source either via a balanced input (120 Ohms) orvia an unbalanced coax input (75 Ohms; BNC connector). A switch on the PCD selectsthe active input clock source.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................363-211-585Issue 8, September 2008

7-47

On-demand testing

Overview...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Purpose

On-demand testing means that the test is not performed automatically but initiated bythe operator via a TL1 command.

Contents

Integrated testing 7-49

Manual testing 7-56

Monitoring 7-57

Wiring 7-58

Circuit testing 7-59

Subscriber line test via external test head 7-60


...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

7-48 363-211-585Issue 8, September 2008

Integrated testing...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Integrated testing capabilities

For integrated testing one of the following application packs is necessary:

• test application pack (TAP10x)

• application pack LPZ200 with integrated test head.

The following sections describe the integrated testing with test application packsTAP10x. For integrated testing using the LPZ200 see“Integrated testing using theLPZ200” (p. 7-54).

Test access path (TAP)

A TAP is a metallic test bus that allows full splitting access (that is, looking in bothdirections):

• towards the facility and

• towards the drop.

One 4-wire test access path (a-wire and b-wire, in both port and drop directions),called TAP-B, is provided.

Required equipment

For integrated testing the following components are required

• CIU

• Test application pack (TAP10x)The TAP10x is the internal test head executing the measurements. One TAP10xcorresponds either to a TAP100, TAP100B, or TAP101. It can be installed per eachAnyMedia® Mainshelf and plugged-in in any application pack slot.

• a/b cable

• TAP-B cableThe TAP-B cable is a special cable which consists of five wires. Four of them arefor the circuit and the drop pair. The fifth one is for future use.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................363-211-585Issue 8, September 2008

7-49

TAP connector via TAP-B

The following connections have to be done for providing the test access path in anAnyMedia® LAG Shelf (see“AnyMedia® LAG 1900 Shelf cabling for integratedtesting” (p. 7-52)and“AnyMedia® LAG 4300 Shelf cabling for integrated testing”(p. 7-53)) or AnyMedia® Mainshelf (see“ETSI V5 Shelf cabling for integrated testing”(p. 7-51)) :

• The TAP connector on the connector field (AnyMedia® LAG 4300 Shelf) or shelfconnection panel (SCP ETSI V5 Shelf) has to be connected via a TAP-B cable tothe MDF.

• The connector on the faceplate of the test TAP10x has to be connected to the MDFvia an a/b cable.Although the a/b cable consists of 64 wires, only four of them are used by theTAP10x to supply the circuit and the drop pair.

• At the MDF a connection has to be made between the a/b cable coming from theTAP10x and the TAP-B cable coming from the TAP connector on the connectorfield/shelf connection panel.

Important! It is also possible to connect the test access path not via the MDF, butto connect the TAP10x via a short TAP-B cable directly to the TAP connector onthe connector field in theAnyMedia® LAG 4300 Shelf or on the shelf connectionpanel (SCP) in the ETSI V5 Shelf.

The CIU contains a connection to the test access path B (TAP-B) connector on thebackplane. TAP-B is a metallic test access path, consisting of two pairs which provideboth internal and external metallic test access to the ports and drops of the applicationpacks. The CIU supports metallic test access by providing a relay hardware forconnecting the general purpose bus (GPB) and the TAP-B. Via this connector theTAP10x will be connected to theAnyMedia® Access System for subscriber linemeasurement.

ETSI V5 Shelf cabling for integrated testing

The figure below shows anAnyMedia® ETSI V5 Shelf cabling for integrated testingvia MDF.

General system planning and engineering Integrated testing

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

7-50 363-211-585Issue 8, September 2008

AnyMedia ® LAG 1900 Shelf cabling for integrated testing

The figure below shows anAnyMedia® LAG 1900 Shelf cabling for integrated testingvia MDF.

01 02 03 04

AP

AP

AP

CO

MD

AC

TAP

10x

CO

MD

AC

1 2

AP

CIU

AP

16

C1C

TAP

12GPB

MDF

AnyMedia ETSI V5 Shelf

5 4

TAP-B cable a/b cable

DROP

CHAN/MON

Shelf Connection Panel


....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................363-211-585Issue 8, September 2008

7-51

AnyMedia ® LAG 4300 Shelf cabling for integrated testing

The figure below shows anAnyMedia® LAG 4300 Shelf cabling for integrated testingvia MDF.


....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

7-52 363-211-585Issue 8, September 2008

General purpose bus

Each AP can switch any of its lines to the general purpose bus (GPB) on the backplaneof the shelf. The line can be switched either bridged (connection between port andsubscriber line is kept) or split (connection between port and subscriber line is opened)to the GPB. The CIU connects the GPB to the TAP-B interface.

Access modes

Depending on the hardware capabilities of the AP not all access modes are supported.Additionally the split mode is either supported as half-split mode where only thefacility or equipment pair is accessible or as full split where both pairs are accessibleat the same time (see next figure).

Important! There are four series resistors in the test access path (TAP) which areused to protect the AP circuitry and the backplane connectors from damage due tohigh transient voltage spikes, for example, lightning hits. These additional resistorsare compensated in measurements via TAP10x but are visible to the maintenancepersonnel doing the tests via Remote Test Unit (RTU).

The next figure illustrates the locations of the relays in the AP and in the CIU that areused to obtain metallic test access.

25 26 27 28

AP

CO

MD

AC

AP

AP

AP

CO

MD

AC

CIU

1 2

4 5

2 3

P 1

IO_E

1

1 2 3 4 6 7 18

TAP

10xAP

AP

AP

AP

AP

24

Upper Row

Lower RowAP

IO_E

1

IO_E

1

spar

e

IO_E

1

IO_E

1

DROP

CHAN/MON

12GPB

5

AP

AP

MDF 5 4

39

AP

17

AP

19

AP

a/b cableTAP-B cable

J101

J103

J102

J104

J112

J113

J107

J109

J108

J110

J106

J106

A

J203

J111

J120

J105 P115 P205P204P202

AnyMedia LAG 4300 Shelf

41

RG

P

43

RG

P

29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38

98 10 11 12 13 14 15 16


....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................363-211-585Issue 8, September 2008

7-53

The figure below shows the hardware architecture for metallic circuit testing.

Integrated testing using the LPZ200

For integrated testing using the LPZ200 no external cabling is necessary. Testing ofdrops on other application packs is done via the GPB on the backplane and does notrequire any other hardware resources. Testing of drops on an LPZ200 also requires onededicated virtual test line in the shelf, either on a TAP10x or on an LPZ200.

NOTE: Even if no POTS service is used on the LPZ200, the AP connector has to beconnected to the faceplate of the LPZ200 anyway in order to allow testing of drops onother application packs.

For the testing with the LPZ200 the same principles as for the TAP10x apply. The onlydifference is the initial setup of the testing infrastructure. While for the TAP10x avirtual test line is to be provisioned on the virtual drop #1 on the TAP10x it is the realdrop #32 of a LPZ200 which has to serve the virtual test line. Once this drop #32 isprovisioned as virtual test line this drop is not available for POTS service, and viceversa, anymore.

The TL1 command set to perform the actual testing is exactly the same for bothsetups. The system automatically selects the virtual test line within the same shelf, thatis, regardless whether it is served by a TAP10x or LPZ200, to perform the testing.

Application Pack

port

MetallicLoop

Equipment Pair

Facility Pair

TAP-B-EQ TAP-B-FAC22


Faceplate connector for manual testing and

monitoring

TAP10x

2

GPB

relay contact normally open

relay contact normally closed

Cross-connectionbetween TAP10x

and TAP-B

Connection via MDF ordirect via short cable

TAP-B Test Diode(only for TAP consistency test,in normal operation removed)

a/b cable

Connector field

CIU


....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

7-54 363-211-585Issue 8, September 2008

The following figure illustrates the locations of the relays in the AP and in the CIUthat are used to obtain metallic test access.

The GSI/EMS initiates all test actions. The controlling of the testing is done in theAnyMedia® Access System which means it checks the state of the entities, requestsblocking and is able to abort the test session even if the connection to the GSI/EMS isinterrupted.

NOTE: The measurement results are viewed directly and are not stored in theAnyMedia® Access System.

Hardware architecture for metallic circuit testing with LPZ200.


....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................363-211-585Issue 8, September 2008

7-55

Manual testing...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

When the test is initiated by a TL1 command the connection between the port and thesubscriber line is split on the AP. The split wires are internally connected to thefaceplate jacks of the CIU (see“ETSI V5 Shelf cabling for integrated testing” (p. 7-51)and the figure above). The test is then performed by connecting external test andmeasurement equipment to the jacks on the faceplate of the CIU:

• To theDrop jack for testing the subscriber line and partly the equipment on thesubscriber side (full-splitting access to the drop side, that is toward drop andsubscriber equipment)

• To theCHAN/MONjack for testing the port hardware if supported by theapplication pack type.

The test session is finished by a TL1 command.

Required equipment

The following equipment is required for manual testing:

• CIU

• Additional measurement equipment.

Important! The network provider itself is responsible for ensuring that theconnected equipment does not initiate trouble on the active subscriber line.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

7-56 363-211-585Issue 8, September 2008

Monitoring...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Introduction

Monitoring provides bridging access to an active subscriber line (listening in to anexisting call).

For this purpose the subscriber line is switched internally without an isolatingmechanism on the faceplate connector CHAN/MON of the CIU.

Monitoring can only be done locally via the faceplate connector. It is not possible toperform it remotely (see“Access modes” (p. 7-54)).

Monitoring is performed by connecting external test and measurement equipment to theCHAN/MONjack on the faceplate of the CIU for bridging access, monitoring mode,that is the operator can listen in to an existing call.

Required equipment

The following equipment is required for monitoring:

• CIU

• An appropriate headphone

• Optionally additional equipment from the network provider (for examplevoltmeter).

Important! The network provider itself is responsible for ensuring that theconnected equipment does not initiate trouble on the active subscriber line.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................363-211-585Issue 8, September 2008

7-57

Wiring...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

At the test session mode WIRE, the maintenance personnel is able to check theInternal test path switched from CIU faceplate connector via the backplane to TAP-Binterface, test access at faceplate connector and TAP-B interface.

Important! At the test session mode WIRE the shelf in which the test access setupshall be tested must be specified because no drop is involved at this test.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

7-58 363-211-585Issue 8, September 2008

Circuit testing...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Test access

The circuit test is a self-test of a Z port, U port, or an [S]HDSL port of an applicationpack (AP).

The circuit test is initiated via TL1 commands.

No additional test equipment is necessary.

A detailed description of the circuit test procedure is given in theC & P forNarrowband Services.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................363-211-585Issue 8, September 2008

7-59

Subscriber line test via external test head...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Overview

The test of subscriber lines can be performed via an external test head (RTU, remotetest unit) collocated to theAnyMedia® Access System. The RTU is a testing equipmentand provides test functions (application of test signals and making measurements)under control of a test system controller (TSC).

The control information exchanged between RTU and theAnyMedia® Access Systemsis performed via TL1 commands according to a subset of the Bellcore GR-834standard for the RTU-NE interface.

The subscriber line test via external test head can be performed for subscriber linesconnected to an AP in theAnyMedia® Access System.

Installations

Two possible installations are conceivable:

• The control commands from the test system controller (TSC) are sent to the RTU,and the RTU issues its control commands via a local link to theAnyMedia® AccessSystem. In this case, the RTU is connected to theRTU connector of the connectorfield/shelf connection panel (SCP) over a serial EIA-232C link to exchange controland status information .

• The control commands from the TSC are issued directly via the normalmanagement interfaces to theAnyMedia® Access System. In this case, a secondconnection from the TSC to the RTU has to exist to control the RTU and to obtainthe test results.

The test capabilities are RTU vendor-specific.

Testing assumption

On-demand line test for trouble shooting purposes is initiated at the TSC’s workstationproviding the user interface to the operator. The TSC is responsible for

• identifying the AID of the line under test for a subscriber’s directory number givenas part of the trouble ticket. The mapping is achieved via a database kept locally inthe TSC

• determining the responsible external test head (RTU)

• establishing the communication TSC - RTU. This is done via a POTS dial-upconnection which is transparent to theAnyMedia® Access System. Alternatively,the same data communication network (DCN) as used by the GSI or the EMS canbe utilized

• establishing the talk and monitor channel to the RTU. This is a dial-up POTSconnection transparent to theAnyMedia® Access System

• controlling the test session.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

7-60 363-211-585Issue 8, September 2008

The actual external test head (RTU) is connecting to theAnyMedia® Access Systemvia two interfaces:

• The metallic test bus access.The current system supports TAP-B type accesses, that is 4 wire lines can beaccessed at the SCP (TAP connector).

• The RTU port.The RTU port is a EIA-232C serial link run at 9600 kbps maximum. The RTU portis used by the RTU to direct TL1 commands to theAnyMedia® Access System forestablishing/tearing down the test session, requesting the mode of line access and tosupervise the availability of the control link.

Talk and monitor channel

A talk and monitor channel can be used to talk with or listen to a subscriber. An RTUwhich supports a talk and monitor channel has an additional connection.

This talk and monitor channel is provided as a normal POTS subscriber by the systemand connected to the RTU via the MDF. The talk and monitor capability is providedwithin the RTU by connecting the talk and monitor channel to the line under test.

Metallic test access

In both cases, the metallic connection to the subscriber line under test is made with a4-wire cable between the RTU and theTAP connector of the SCP. The TAP-B interfaceallows the testing of 2-wire subscriber line interfaces in either direction (subscriber orcircuit). All tests performed by the RTU are performed using metallic test accesstowards the subscriber (equipment) and/or towards the circuit (facility).

For cabling of the test installations, seeInstallation Manual.

External test equipment setup

The subscriber line is externally wired via the main distribution frame (MDF) to theapplication pack (AP) which serves the subscriber. During a test session the systemconnects the subscriber line via internal application pack relays to the general purposebus (GPB) which connects each AP to the CIU. From the CIU the subscriber lineunder test is connected to the internal test link which terminates at the TAP-B on theTAP connector. The RTU is externally connected to this metallic interface to performits measurements and tests.

If the AnyMedia® Access System is controlled directly from the RTU the serialEIA-232C control link between the RTU and the system is externally wired to theRTUconnector in the SCP. If the control is not performed directly from the RTU, anymanagement interface of the system can be used and the TSC must have twoconnections to the system site:

• One control for theAnyMedia® Access System and

• one control for the RTU.

The figure below shows a test installation example 1.

General system planning and engineering Subscriber line test via external test head

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................363-211-585Issue 8, September 2008

7-61

The figure below shows a test installation example 2.

LE

Ext. TestMetallicTest Access

TSC/RTU

Service Provider

Head

Modem

Talk & MonitorTAP-B

Serial RTU/

Control

RTU-Port

POTSAP

TSC

(RTU)

AnyMedia Control

Test Center


Talk&Monitor

RTU Control

a/b

4 CIU

GPB

Modem

PSTN

a/b


....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

7-62 363-211-585Issue 8, September 2008

Test session typical sequence

The typical sequence of an RTU test session is:

• The RTU requests a test session for a specified subscriber line from theAnyMedia®

Access System.

• The AnyMedia® Access System grants the test session and switches a testloop-around at the TAP-B interface.

• The RTU can check for correct cabling by detecting the loop-around.

• The RTU requests a metallic test connection to the subscriber line.

• The AnyMedia® Access System releases the test loop-around and switches thefacility and equipment pairs of the subscriber line in bridging mode to the TAP-Binterface.

LE

Ext. Test MetallicTest Access

Service Provider

Head

Talk & MonitorTAP-B

POTSAP

TSC

(RTU)

Test Center


Talk&Monitor

RTU Control AnyMedia Control

DCN PSTN

4

a/b


....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................363-211-585Issue 8, September 2008

7-63

• The RTU is able to request a switch between a bridging test access or full-split testaccess (With full-split test access, transmission is interrupted in both the transmitand receive directions at the test access point and the tester is allowed to inject andlook at the transmitted and received signals both in the equipment (towards theend-customer) and in the facility (towards the network) directions simultaneously)to the subscriber line from theAnyMedia® Access System.

• The RTU performs its measurements and tests on the subscriber line.

• The RTU releases the test session.

• The AnyMedia® Access System releases the internal test connections of thesubscriber line.

The exact steps depend on the RTU manufacturer.

Interaction during an RTU test session

During an RTU test session, the RTU and theAnyMedia® Access System supervise thecontrol link for availability.

Once an RTU test session is initiated, the system starts a 75-second timer within whichit must receive a command from the RTU. Each received command resets and restartsthe timer. If the timer expires the system autonomously releases the test relays to returnthe subscriber line under test to normal operation mode and end the RTU test session.


....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

7-64 363-211-585Issue 8, September 2008

8 8DCN configurations forOAM&P

Overview...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Purpose

This chapter gives some information concerning data communications networks (DCN)to transport the OAM&P information from theAnyMedia® Access System to themanagement systems (GSI/EMS).

Introduction

The table below shows examples ofgeneralDCN configurations

General DCNconfigurationsusing

In NB-onlyconfiguration

InATM xDSL-onlyconfiguration

In mixed NB andATM xDSLconfiguration

For DCNconfigurationssee

PLL-based ROC (forTDM COMDAConly)

indoor,outdoor

not applicable indoor/outdoor “PLL-based ROC”(p. 8-6)

MNI for PLL- orSPLL-based ROC (forTDM COMDAConly)

indoor,outdoor

not applicable indoor/outdoor “MNI for PLL- orSPLL-based ROC”(p. 8-12)

SPLL-based ROC (forTDM COMDAConly)

indoor,outdoor

not applicable indoor/outdoor “SPLL-based ROC”(p. 8-15)

POTS dial-up DCN indoor not applicable not applicable “Examples of POTSdial-up DCN”(p. 8-17)

ISDN dial-up DCN indoor not applicable indoor “Examples of ISDNdial-up DCN”(p. 8-20)

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................363-211-585Issue 8, September 2008

8-1

General DCNconfigurationsusing




For DCNconfigurationssee

BB ATM OperationsChannel

not applicable indoor, outdoor indoor, outdoor “Communicationwith remoteAnyMedia® AccessSystems using BBATM OperationsChannel withinPVC” (p. 8-23)

The table below shows examples ofspecificDCN configurations

Specific DCNconfigurations using




For DCNconfigura-tions see

WaveStar® ADM 4/1point-to-point accessnetwork

indoor,outdoor

not applicable not applicable “SDHpoint-to-pointaccess networkbased onWaveStar®

ADM 4/1”(p. 8-30)

multiple AnyMedia®

Access Systems inWaveStar® ADM 4/1ring configurationover F1-byte

indoor,outdoor

not applicable not applicable “ManagingmultipleAnyMedia®

Access Systemsin a WaveStar®

ADM 4/1 ringconfigurationover F1-byte”(p. 8-32)

SynCom PDHequipment inpoint-to-pointstructure

indoor,outdoor

not applicable not applicable “UsingSynCom PDHequipment in apoint-to-pointstructure”(p. 8-34)

remoteAnyMedia®

Access Systems via IPnetworks

indoor,outdoor

indoor, outdoor indoor, outdoor “Access toremoteAnyMedia®

Access Systemsvia IPnetworks”(p. 8-37)

DCN configurations for OAM&P Overview

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

8-2 363-211-585Issue 8, September 2008

Specific DCNconfigurations using




For DCNconfigura-tions see

remoteAnyMedia®

Access Systems viaX.25

indoor indoor indoor “Access toremoteAnyMedia®

Access Systemsvia an X.25DCN ”(p. 8-39)

remoteAnyMedia®

Access Systems viaPositron OSIRIS(SDH ADM) withTCP/IP over DCC

indoor,outdoor


Access Systemsvia TCP/IPover DCC”(p. 8-42)

remoteAnyMedia®

Access Systems viaAM 1 Plus (SDHADM) with TCP/IPover DCC

indoor,outdoor


Access Systemsvia AM 1 Plusover DCC”(p. 8-45)

Contents

General data communications network (DCN) configurations 8-5

PLL-based ROC 8-6

Cross-connect 8-7

Router/bridge 8-8

Transport network 8-9

Example of a PLL-based ROC using aWaveStar® ADM 4/1 8-10

MNI for PLL- or SPLL-based ROC 8-12

SPLL-based ROC 8-15

Examples of POTS dial-up DCN 8-17

Examples of ISDN dial-up DCN 8-20

Communication with remoteAnyMedia® Access Systems using BB ATMOperations Channel within PVC

8-23

Remote operations via ATM Operations Channel for mixed configuration 8-26

Specific data communications network (DCN) configurations 8-29


...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................363-211-585Issue 8, September 2008

8-3

SDH point-to-point access network based onWaveStar® ADM 4/1 8-30

Managing multipleAnyMedia® Access Systems in aWaveStar®

ADM 4/1 ring configuration over F1-byte8-32

Using SynCom PDH equipment in a point-to-point structure 8-34

Access to remoteAnyMedia® Access Systems via IP networks 8-37

Access to remoteAnyMedia® Access Systems via an X.25 DCN 8-39

Access to remoteAnyMedia® Access Systems via TCP/IP over DCC 8-42

Access to remoteAnyMedia® Access Systems via AM 1 Plus over DCC 8-45


....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

8-4 363-211-585Issue 8, September 2008

General data communications network (DCN)configurations

Overview...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Purpose

Contents

PLL-based ROC 8-6

Cross-connect 8-7

Router/bridge 8-8

Transport network 8-9

Example of a PLL-based ROC using aWaveStar® ADM 4/1 8-10

MNI for PLL- or SPLL-based ROC 8-12

SPLL-based ROC 8-15

Examples of POTS dial-up DCN 8-17

Examples of ISDN dial-up DCN 8-20

Communication with remoteAnyMedia® Access Systems using BB ATMOperations Channel within PVC

8-23

Remote operations via ATM Operations Channel for mixed configuration 8-26

DCN configurations for OAM&P

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................363-211-585Issue 8, September 2008

8-5

PLL-based ROC...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Introduction

The PLL-based ROC (for TDM COMDAC only) uses TCP/IP over HDLC protocol.The ROC is a nailed-up 64-kbps channel that is part of a leased line link (E1)connectivity to the system. The 64-kbps channel originates from a DCN that supportsTCP/IP over an HDLC connection on one side and does a translation to a WAN via ann×64-kbps link on the other.

Remote operations path and protocols

Remote operations path

The TSI of the COMDAC routes the 64-kbps remote operations channel from theIO_E1 to the microcontroller on the COMDAC. The COMDAC does the protocoltermination.

V5.x

Cross-Connect

TransportNetwork 1 31

E1 - LAN Router/Bridge

LAN (10BaseT)

1 x E1

E1

1 ... 15 x E1

Ethernet

GSI EMS

TSI

CO

MD

AC

IO_E1s

TSI

CO

MD

AC

IO_E1s

TCPIP

DS0

TL1

TL1/TCP/IP/Ethernet

Protocols



1 x E1

Local Exchange

1 ...15 x E1

1x

E1

1... 15

xE

1

Local Exchange

HDLC

Central Office

LL

ROC

Micro-controller

ROC

Micro-controller

LL

V5.x

1 x E1

1 ... 15 x E1


...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

8-6 363-211-585Issue 8, September 2008

Cross-connect...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Cross-connect function

The basic function of the digital cross-connect is to cross-connect 64-kbps timeslots(TS) or n×64-kbps channels in a non-blocking manner in 2-Mbps G.704 streams.

The cross-connect is only needed if there is no leased line service node in the CO. Thefunction of the cross-connect is:

• To extract the individual ROCs

• To concentrate ROCs into a single E1 link to the router (channelized E1 interface)


...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................363-211-585Issue 8, September 2008

8-7

Router/bridge...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Purpose of a router

The router/bridge, located at the central office site, performs the translation from LANto HDLC/64-kbps access via channelized E1 interfaces. It passes up to 31 64-kbpsleased lines (ROCs) per E1 link to the LAN to which the GSI/EMS is connected.

A DCN-based on ROCs uses a router that performs the translation between TCP/IPover an Ethernet LAN on one side and TCP/IP/HDLC/64 kbps via channelized E1interface on the other side (WAN).

Router connected over WAN interface

Router function

The router functions are:

• Terminating the multiple point-to-point ROCs (HDLC channels)

• Mapping IP addresses to ROCs

• Providing Ethernet interface for GSI/EMS

Features of a router

A suitable router has at least the following features:

• WAN interface:At least one channelized E1 interface, 2048 kbps, according to ITU G.703, G.704.The symmetrical 120 ohms resistive (balanced) or the coaxial 75 ohms resistive(unbalanced) versions of the E1 interface should be supportedThe number of channelized E1 interfaces depends on the number ofAnyMedia®

Access Systems to be managed. The physical and electrical interface must becompatible to the interface provided by the local exchange or LL network. The useof NTs may be necessary.

• WAN protocols (OSI Layer 2):Raw HDLC.

• LAN interface:At least one Ethernet (IEEE 802.3) 10BaseT LAN port.

• Routing capabilities: IP routing. It must be possible to assign one IP address toeach 64-kbps HDLC channel of the channelized E1 interface.

router

GSI

LAN 1 LAN n

E1-IF

WAN Interface

EMS


...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

8-8 363-211-585Issue 8, September 2008

Transport network...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Transport network

The E1 link carrying the permanent leased line ROC is transparently routed throughthe network independent the used transport network (PDH, SDH, fiber, wireless).


...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................363-211-585Issue 8, September 2008

8-9

Example of a PLL-based ROC using aWaveStar® ADM 4/1...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Introduction

The SDH ring network with multipleAnyMedia® Access Systems is based onWaveStar® ADM 4/1 access multiplexers, operating in add/drop multiplexer mode. Inthis example a single or multipleAnyMedia® Access Systems are connected to remoteWaveStar® ADM 4/1 access multiplexers via an STM-1 ring.

SDH ring network with multipleAnyMedia® Access Systems

SDH ring network, multiple AnyMedia ® Access Systems

The management of the multipleAnyMedia® Access Systems is performed byGSI/EMS via Ethernet connection to a router, for example CISCO 36xx family.

The remoteAnyMedia® Access Systems are addressed via their IP addresses.

The data transfer is via 64-kbps payload channels (PLL-based ROC).

The SDH management of theWaveStar® ADM 4/1 is performed by the LCS V3 viaEIA-232C, connected to a PC port. The remote ADMs are accessed via the QECC.

criticalcriticalmajormajorminorminor

E1E1

E1E1

AnAnyMediayMedia

EIA-232 PC connectorEIA-232 PC connector

AnAnyMediayMedia

criticalcriticalmajormajorminorminor

Remote LocationRemote LocationAnAnyMediayMedia

AnAnyMediayMedia

AAnnyMediayMedia officofficeealaralarm outputsm outputssseerriesies connected toconnected toWWaavveStareStar ADM 4/1ADM 4/1exterexternal inputsnal inputs

STM-1STM-1RingRing

DACS IDACS III AXAX

Central OfficeCentral Office

64-kbps cross-connect:64-kbps cross-connect:grooms out Rgrooms out ROOCCssand inserand inserts into single E1ts into single E1-- DDAACS IICS II AX4 fAX4 for up to 3or up to 311 AAnnyMediayMedia AcceAccessss SSyysstemstems-- DDAACS IICS II AX1AX11 f1 foorr up to 87up to 87 AAnnyMediayMedia AcceAccess Systss Systeemmss

ChannelizChannelized E1 interfed E1 interfaacceetteerrminates up to 31minates up to 3164-kbps HDLC channels64-kbps HDLC channelsProtocol isProtocol isTCP/IPTCP/IP oovver HDLCer HDLC

1 E1 per1 E1 per AAnnyMediayMedia SystemSystemcarrcarrying single Rying single ROOCC

RouterRouter ff or eor exxaammpplleeCCISCO 36ISCO 36 xx familxx familyy

No Leased Line Service Node in CONo Leased Line Service Node in CO

EthernetEthernet EMSEMS

LCSLCS VV33

majormajorminorminor

WWaaveStarveStarADM 4/1ADM 4/1



EMS SeEMS Se rrvveerr


...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

8-10 363-211-585Issue 8, September 2008

Alarming

Alarm supervision of multipleAnyMedia® Access Systems is accomplished by utilizingexternal inputs and relay outputs.

• The threeAnyMedia® Access System office alarm outputs are connected to threecorrespondingWaveStar® ADM 4/1 external inputs (according to severity);multiple AnyMedia® Access Systems are″series connected″.

• AnyMedia® Access System alarms appear in the LCS alarm window. Additionally,the correspondingWaveStar® ADM 4/1 external alarm outputs are operated at thegateway ADM in the CO.

• The GSI/EMS is used to identify theAnyMedia® Access System raising the alarmand the root cause of the alarm.

DCN configurations for OAM&P Example of a PLL-based ROC using a WaveStar® ADM4/1

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................363-211-585Issue 8, September 2008

8-11

MNI for PLL- or SPLL-based ROC...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Introduction

The multiple network interface (MNI) is used for both the PLL- or the SPLL-basedROC (for TDM COMDAC only). In this subsection the example PLL-based ROCset-up via an LL feeder is described. The SPLL-based scenario can be easily derivedfrom that.

The V5.x interfaces ofAnyMedia® Access Systems are connected via a switchedservice (SS) transport network to the central office (CO). At least one 2 Mbps LLinterface carrying the 64-kbps ROC is connected via a DCN transport network to theCO per remote location.

Managing multiple co-locatedAnyMedia® systems via a PLL-based ROC and MNI


The TSI of the COMDAC routes the 64-kbps ROC from the IO_E1s to serialcommunication channels (SCC) of the microcontroller that are allocated for remoteoperations. The COMDAC terminates the lower OSI layer 2 of the ROCs. TheCOMDAC then relays IP datagrams destined for a co-locatedAnyMedia® Access

V5.x

SSTransportNetwork

1 31

E1 - LAN Router/Bridge

LAN (10BaseT)

Ethernet

GSI EMS

TSI

CO

MD

AC

TSI

CO

MD

AC

IO_E1s

TL1/TCP/IP/Ethernet

AnyMedia Access System 1

AnyMedia Access System 2

Central Office

Micro-controller

DS0 ROC

Micro-controller

V5.xI/F

SCCIO_E1s

V5.xI/F

LocalExchange

V5.x I/FV5.x I/F

V5.x I/FV5.x I/F

V5.x

V5.x

HDLC/DS0

channelized E1

LL SNI(groomingout all64 kbpsROCs)

Eth

TCPIP

10BaseT

TL1Protocols

LLC/MAC

10 BaseT Hub

SCCEth

V5.x

LLI/F

HDLCIP

TL1

DS0Protocols

TCP

DCN TransportNetwork

Remote AnyMedia Access System Location 1LL

(2Mbp

s with

64kb

ps R

OC

Loca

tion 1

Location 2LL (2 Mbps with64 kbps ROC)

2 Mbps

2 Mbps


...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

8-12 363-211-585Issue 8, September 2008

System to the Ethernet LAN, via a hub or, in the case of just two co-locatedAnyMedia® Access Systems over a cross-over 10BaseT cable, the IP datagrams reachthe destination system.

Requirements

The requirements for this configuration are:

• The LAN-based GSI and an EMS are located in the CO.

• A leased line service node is available in the CO.

• The LL service node in the CO extracts the 64-kbps ROCs from each 2 Mbps linkand concentrates up to 30×64 kbps ROCs into a single 2 Mbps link to the router(channelized E1 interface).

• A router/bridge (could be delivered by Alcatel-Lucent) is used for interfacing thechannelized E1 interface to the LAN in the CO.

• One ROC is used per remote location (64-kbps ROC carried on a 2 Mbps LLinterface).

• The AnyMedia® Access System supports routing between all managementinterfaces (MNI).

• Multiple AnyMedia® Access Systems at remote location in controlled environment.

• OneAnyMedia® Access System can be connected directly via 10BaseT cross-overcable, multiple systems are connected via an Ethernet hub to the routingAnyMedia® Access System.

Important! Only theAnyMedia® Access Systems are connected to the gatewaysystem, no other IP equipment is allowed to be connected. From an IP addresspoint of view there is no limitation imposed by the gatewayAnyMedia® AccessSystem. However the maximum number of systems connected to one gatewayAnyMedia® Access System is limited as the routing has impact to call processing atthe gateway system. The maximum number ofAnyMedia® Access Systems allowedto be connected must be measured.

• For OSI layer 2, the HDLC protocol is used between the routing V5DLC and therouter in the CO.

• For up to 30 remote locations connected to the LE, a single E1 interface for therouter is sufficient.

Provisioning AnyMedia ® Access System

The initial provisioning has to be done via pre-provisioning (off-site provisioning ontop of the factory settings) or via a local GSI (LAN or EIA-232C) because the LLinterface, carrying the ROC, must be in service to get remote access via ROC. Toenable the use of 64 kbps bearer channels for remote operations, the followingprovisioning steps for theAnyMedia® Access System are required:

• Create a ROC line (virtual subscriber)

• Set the IP address and subnetwork mask for the ROC line

• Define a default route with the IP address of the router’s ROC interface as gateway

DCN configurations for OAM&P MNI for PLL- or SPLL-based ROC

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................363-211-585Issue 8, September 2008

8-13

• Set the IP address and subnetwork mask for the Ethernet interface

• Create a leased line link entity

• Create a cross connection between the ROC line entity and a 64 kbps timeslot ofleased line link.

For the co-locatedAnyMedia® Access Systems the following provisioning needs arerequired:

• Set the IP address and subnetwork mask for the Ethernet interface

• Enter a default route to the gatewayAnyMedia® Access System’s Ethernet IPaddress.

Provisioning router/bridge

The provisioning needs for the router/bridge are as follows:

• E1 interface functionality (line code, framing type etc.)

• Timeslot mapping

• Protocols (IP) and encapsulations (raw HDLC)

• IP addresses for IP routing (routing tables), the IP addresses of the ROC interfacefor the router and theAnyMedia® Access System must belong to one (sub) network

• Ethernet media.

The initial provisioning of a router/bridge is typically performed by a VT100/ANSIterminal, connected to a EIA-232C port. When the IP-address of the router isprovisioned, the router may be configured via LAN (TELNET, SNMP) but thisdepends on the router/bridge being used.

Important! Managing multiple co-locatedAnyMedia® Access Systems via onechannelized E1 interface leads to the loss of remote operations for all connectedAnyMedia® Access Systems, if the interface of the gateway system fails. ForSPLL-based ROC the V5.2 interface provides link protection. For PLL-based ROCit is in the responsibility of the service provider to protect the channelized E1interface within the DCN transport network.

DCN configurations for OAM&P MNI for PLL- or SPLL-based ROC

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

8-14 363-211-585Issue 8, September 2008

SPLL-based ROC...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Introduction

The figure below shows the application using the V5 semipermanent leased line(SPLL) for transport of management information within a V5.x interface from centraloffice (CO) to remote locations and vice versa (for TDM COMDAC only).

The V5.x interfaces ofAnyMedia® Access Systems are connected via a switchedservice (SS) transport network to the CO. One 64 kbps remote operations channel(ROC) is transported via SPLL within the V5.x interface. At the CO the local exchange(LE) grooms out the 64 kbps ROCs from the V5.x interfaces and put them on one ormore E1 lines (ITU G.703/G.704). The router/bridge performs the translation fromLAN to HDLC/DS0 access via channelized E1 interfaces.

Remote operations via SPLL-based ROC


The TSI of the COMDAC routes the 64-kbps ROC from the IO_E1s to themicrocontroller on the COMDAC. The COMDAC does the protocol termination.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................363-211-585Issue 8, September 2008

8-15

Provisioning

The initial provisioning has to be done via pre-provisioning (off-site provisioning ontop of the factory settings) or via a local GSI (LAN or EIA-232C) because the V5.xinterface, carrying the SPLL-based ROC, must be in-service to get remote access viaROC. To enable the use of 64 kbps bearer channels for remote operations, thefollowing provisioning steps for theAnyMedia® Access System are required:

• Create a ROC line (virtual port)

• Create a V5.x user port of the type single channel semipermanent leased line(SSPLL) using the ROC line

• Create a cross-connection between the ROCs V5 user port entity and a V5.xinterface

• Additionally a cross-connection between the ROCs bearer channel and the timeslotof the V5.1 interface have to be created in case of V5.1 interface

• Define an IP address and subnetwork mask for the ROC interface

• Define the default route with router’s IP address (ROC interface) as gateway.

For the above provisioning it is assumed that the V5.x interface is already correctprovisioned.

Provisioning router/bridge

The provisioning needs for the router/bridge are as follows:

• E1 interface functionality (line code, framing type etc.)

• Timeslot mapping

• Protocols (IP) and encapsulations (raw HDLC)

• IP addresses for IP routing (routing tables), the IP addresses of the ROC interfacefor the router and theAnyMedia® Access System must belong to one (sub) network

• Ethernet media.

The initial provisioning of a router/bridge is typically performed by a VT100/ANSIterminal, connected to a EIA-232C port. When the IP-address of the router isprovisioned, the router may be configured via LAN (TELNET, SNMP) but thisdepends on the router/bridge being used.

Important! Management via SPLL-based ROC carried over a V5.1 interface leadsto a loss of ROC, if the V5.1 link bearer channel carrying the ROC fails. If the LEsupports automatic reconnect the ROC becomes available again with the V5.1 linkbearer channel. If the bearer channel of a V5.2 interface used for the SPLL-basedROC fails, another bearer channel is assigned via the bearer channel controlprotocol and the ROC becomes available again.

DCN configurations for OAM&P SPLL-based ROC

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

8-16 363-211-585Issue 8, September 2008

Examples of POTS dial-up DCN...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Introduction

The figure below shows examples of a POTS dial-up DCN configuration to accessmultiple AnyMedia® Access Systems in an NB-only configuration at a remote location.

POTS dial-up DCN with multipleAnyMedia® Access Systems

POTS dial-up DCN configuration examples

The requirements for these network configurations are:

• An EMS is located at the central office.

• The AnyMedia® Access Systems are located in remote locations in a controlledenvironment.

• The management information is communicated between EMS andAnyMedia®

Access Systems by means of POTS dial-up WAN connections.

AnyMedia

NB

AnyMedia

EMS

Router

EMS Server

modem card

IPTCP

Transport Network

V5.

x I/F

V5.

x I/F

V5.

x I/F

V5.

x I/F Hub

10BaseT 10BaseT

EthernetModem

Modem

CIT port (with PPP) Hub

10BaseT

RemoteModem

POTS line

Single Port RAS

Remote LAN

E1

Example 1

LAN port

Example 2

POTS lines

E1s

E1

Example 3

Local Exchange

NB

AnyMedia

NB

AnyMedia

NB

AnyMedia

NB

AnyMedia

NB

E1s

POTS line

V5.x

Remote LAN

V5.xV5.x

V5.x

POTS line

Remote LAN


...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................363-211-585Issue 8, September 2008

8-17

• Analog modems are needed at central office and remote locations. The maximumdata speed is limited for modems to 56 kbps downstream and 33 kbps upstream.

• At the central office some communication/routing devices are used to make anadaptation between 10BaseT/MAC&LLC1/IP EMS protocol stack and the protocolstack used at the POTS WAN connection (for example E0/PPP or HDLC/IP).

Configuration on EMS side

On the EMS side the following configurations can be used:

• A RAS together with a pool of modems. The RAS performs ports/protocolsconversions and routing functions, so as to route an IP packet to a serial port towhich a modem is attached.

• A router with cards consisting of a pool of modems.

Configuration on NE side

On the remote locations (NE side) the following configuration can be used:

• Example 1: A remote modem attached to a single port RAS which makes anadaptation between theAnyMedia® Access System LAN port and the POTS WANlink provided by the modem. The RAS is connected to the system by means of itsLAN port. To access multiple systems in this location, a 10BaseT hub (if notintegrated in the RAS) is needed.

• Example 2: A modem with an Ethernet port directly attached to theAnyMedia®

Access System or to a 10BaseT hub, if multiple systems are in this location.

• Example 3: A modem is connected to the CIT port (with PPP protocol) of theAnyMedia® Access System. For multiple systems a modem for every system and adifferent subscriber port (line) is used. The bandwidth is not shared between severalsystems.

RAS/router requirements

The minimal requirements for the RAS / routers on the EMS side are:

• IP as routing protocol (routing based on IP address / serial port interface)

• Dial-on-demand routing functionality

• PPP support for POTS WAN ports. The PPP multilink for supporting bandwidth ondemand. HDLC can be used instead of PPP in the DCN configuration where onerouter is used at the central office and another one at the remote location

• Some kind of scripting language like chat for setting up PPP mode at CIT port (ifCIT port is used)

• Link management functions

DCN configurations for OAM&P Examples of POTS dial-up DCN

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

8-18 363-211-585Issue 8, September 2008

Provisioning

If the local LAN port for communication with theAnyMedia® Access System is used,the initial provisioning has to be done via pre-provisioning (factory settings) or via alocal GSI (LAN or EIA-232C). The following IP parameters have to be set:

• IP address - the local LAN port’s IP address

• Subnet mask of the local LAN port

• Default route to the IP address (LAN address of the router located on the remoteLAN).

If the CIT port for interfacing with the POTS WAN device (analog modem) is used,the CIT port is switched to PPP protocol.

The router/RAS has to use always the same translation IP address to phone numbers(AnyMedia® Access System) if connected to CIT port. The CIT port (PPP) must beprovisioned with the same IP address.

The EMS has to use the same IP address that is provisioned in the router/RAS routingtable for addressing the relatedAnyMedia® Access System.

In both cases the POTS subscriber which is carried the management information hasalso to be provisioned.

Transport element configuration

• The network provider should provide the POTS numbers (on the EMS andAnyMedia® side) which are needed for establishing communication.

• The WAN devices (RAS/routers) on the EMS side are in charge of setting upPOTS dial-up connections when receiving IP packets which need to reach the otherdestination (for example dial on demand routing).

• WAN connections and WAN devices can be shared between severalAnyMedia®

Access Systems.

DCN configurations for OAM&P Examples of POTS dial-up DCN

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................363-211-585Issue 8, September 2008

8-19

Examples of ISDN dial-up DCN...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Introduction

The figure below shows examples of an ISDN dial-up DCN configuration to accessmultiple AnyMedia® Access Systems in an NB-only configuration at a remote location.

ISDN dial-up DCN with multipleAnyMedia® Access Systems

ISDN dial-up DCN configuration examples

The requirements for these network configurations are:

• An EMS is located at the central office.

• The AnyMedia® Access Systems are located in remote locations in a controlledenvironment.

EMS

Router

EMS Server

IPTCP

Transport Network

V5.

x I/F

V5.

x I/F

V5.

x I/F

V5.

x I/F

ISDN lines

E1s

ISDN NT +TA

CIT port (with PPP)

ISDN line Hub

10BaseT

ISDN BRIRouter

ISDN PRI interface

Remote LAN

V5.xV5.x

ISDN Line

LAN port

Example 1

Local Exchange

AnyMedia

NB

AnyMedia

NB

AnyMedia

NB

Example 2AnyMedia

NB

Remote LAN

LAN


...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

8-20 363-211-585Issue 8, September 2008

• The management information is communicated between EMS andAnyMedia®

Access Systems by means of ISDN dial-up WAN connections.

• On the central office some communication/routing devices (RAS/ISDN routers) canbe used to make an adaptation between 10BaseT/MAC&LLC1/IP EMS protocolstack and the protocol stack used at the ISDN WAN connection (for exampleE0/PPP or HDLC/IP).

Configuration on EMS side

On the EMS side the following configurations can be used:

• A multiprotocol router with one channelized ISDN PRI interface which is able toestablish several ISDN connections with different remote locations or

• a router with a set of ISDN BRI ports.

Configuration on NE side

On the remote locations (NE side) the following configuration can be used:

• Example 1: Any ISDN BRI router. If the router does not include a 10BaseT hubthis has to be provided if severalAnyMedia® Access Systems share this router.

Important! For the international market usually an S/T router must be used (doesnot include ISDN NT). If the operator company does not provide the ISDN NT(usually in the American market) a U router must be used.

• Example 2: An ISDN NT+TA device.The ISDN NT+TA device is connected to theAnyMedia® CIT port which providesPPP as WAN protocol. The ISDN line is extracted from oneAnyMedia® AccessSystem.

Router requirements

The minimal requirements for the router on the EMS side are:

• IP as routing protocol (routing based on IP address / serial port interface)

• Dial-on-demand routing functionality

• Support of ISDN PRA or several ISDN BRA

• PPP support for WAN ports. PPP multilink for supporting bandwidth on demand.HDLC can be used instead of PPP (if NT + TA is used, then PPP-only)

• Some kind of scripting language like chat for setting up PPP mode at the CIT port

• Link management functions.

DCN configurations for OAM&P Examples of ISDN dial-up DCN

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................363-211-585Issue 8, September 2008

8-21

Provisioning

If the local LAN port for communication with theAnyMedia® Access System is used,the initial provisioning has to be done via pre-provisioning (factory settings) or via alocal GSI (LAN or EIA-232C). The following IP parameters have to be set:

• IP address - the local LAN port’s IP address

• Subnet mask of the local LAN port

• Default route to the IP address (LAN address of the router located on the remoteLAN).

If the CIT port for interfacing with the ISDN WAN device (that is ISDN TA device) isused, the CIT port is switched to PPP protocol.

The router/RAS has to use always the same translation IP address to phone numbers(AnyMedia® Access System) if connected to CIT port. The CIT port (PPP) must beprovisioned with the same IP address.

The EMS has to use the same IP address that is provisioned in the router routing tablefor addressing the relatedAnyMedia® Access System.

In both cases the ISDN subscriber which carries the management information has alsoto be provisioned.

Transport element configuration

The network provider should provide the ISDN telephone numbers which are neededfor establishing communication between the EMS and theAnyMedia® Access Systems.

• The WAN devices are in charge of setting up ISDN dial-up connections whenreceiving IP packets which need to reach the other destination (for example dial-ondemand routing).

• WAN connections and WAN devices can be shared between severalAnyMedia®

Access Systems. For example one ISDN connection can be used to interchangemanagement information between the EMS and multipleAnyMedia® AccessSystems.

DCN configurations for OAM&P Examples of ISDN dial-up DCN

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

8-22 363-211-585Issue 8, September 2008

Communication with remoteAnyMedia® Access Systems usingBB ATM Operations Channel within PVC...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Introduction

The figure below shows a transport network example usingWaveStar® ADM 4/1access multiplexers in a point-to-point configuration to access multipleAnyMedia®

Access Systems in mixed configuration at a remote location. Mixed configurationmeans there are narrowband (NB) and ATM xDSL access technologies co-located inthe sameAnyMedia® Access System.

Communication with remoteAnyMedia® Access Systems using BB ATM OperationsChannel within PVC

TransportNetwork

ATM Switch

Central Office

10BaseT/100Base T

EMS

E3/DS3

criticalmajorminor

IP5

ATM router

Remote Location

ATMNB

AnyMedia

AnyMedia office alarm outputsseries connected toWaveStar ADM 4/1external inputs 1

Local GSI

E3/DS3

IP6

NB

AnyMedia

IP4

ATMNB

AnyMedia

cross-over

E3/DS3

Hub

10BaseT/100Base T

Ethernet

EM Server

IP over ATMPVC service

E3/DS3

E3/DS3

majorminorADM alarm

outputs

LCS V3

ATM xDSL OAM&P and alarming path

SDH OAM&P (DCC) path

NB alarming path

NB OAM&P path

10BaseT cable

WaveStar ADM 4/1

WaveStar ADM 4/1

cross-over 10BaseT cable

cross-over 10BaseT cable

1 not mandatory for managing via EMS

10BaseTIP

TCPTL1

10BaseTIP

UDPSNMP

NB ATM xDSL

(optionallyconnected)

GSI

xDSL

xDSL

ATMxDSL


...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................363-211-585Issue 8, September 2008

8-23

Mixed configurations using BB ATM Operations Channel

An ATM router at the central office makes the transformation (The transformationfunctionality can also be performed by the ATM switch connected by means of a LANconnection with the central office. In these cases there is no need for a separate router)between the OAM&P stream using AAL5 encapsulation over E3/DS3 and the 10BaseTEthernet interface.

The OAM&P operations use ATM permanent virtual connections (PVCs) tocommunicate narrowband (TL1) and ATM xDSL (SNMP) management traffic betweenthe EMS and theAnyMedia® Access Systems.

The AnyMedia® narrowband and ATM xDSL summary alarms are reported directly tothe respective EMS.

Provisioning

The provisioning comprises:

• To provision the narrowband LAN port the following IP parameters have to be set:

– IP address - the narrowband LAN port’s IP address

– Subnet mask of the narrowband LAN port

– Default route to the IP address of the AFM LAN port.

• BB ATM Operations Channel on the AFM. The BB ATM Operations Channel isterminated at the AFM and the IP packets contained in it are extracted. The BBATM Operations Channels are provisioned via local GSI/EMS together with IPaddresses (one for the E3/DS3 interface and another one for the LAN port).

• A routing table on the AFM (so that IP packets related to the COMDAC areforwarded to the AFM LAN port and IP packets related to the AFM are terminatedat the AFM).

• To provision the ATM xDSL E3/DS3 interface the following IP parameter has tobe set:

– IP address of the E3/DS3 interface

• To provision the ATM xDSL LAN port the following IP parameter has to be set:

– IP address of the AFM LAN port

– Subnet mask of the AFM LAN port.

Alarming

The three office alarm outputs (minor, major, critical) of theAnyMedia® AccessSystems at the remote locations are″series connected″ (if applicable) and connected tothe corresponding external alarm inputs of theWaveStar® ADM 4/1.

The WaveStar® ADM 4/1 maps

• the major and critical alarm contacts at the remote location to the major contact ofthe WaveStar® ADM 4/1 located in the CO.

• the minor alarm contact from the remote location to the minor alarm contact of theWaveStar® ADM 4/1 located in the CO.

DCN configurations for OAM&P Communication with remote AnyMedia® Access Systemsusing BB ATM Operations Channel within PVC

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

8-24 363-211-585Issue 8, September 2008

The LCS V3 alarm window indicatesAnyMedia® Access System alarms forwarded viaWaveStar® ADM 4/1 alarm inputs.

Transport elements

Transport elements are:

• ATM switches which will transport the BB ATM Operations Channels

• ATM router which is attached to the ATM switch

• AnyMedia® network elements (NEs) which are attached to the ATM network byusing E3/DS3 links

• WaveStar® ADM 4/1 access multiplexers which are used to transport the ATMinformation.

The AFM LAN port (10BASE-T connector) has to be joined with the NB LAN port(located on the SCP) of theAnyMedia® shelf by means of a cross-over 10BaseT cable.

DCN configurations for OAM&P Communication with remote AnyMedia® Access Systemsusing BB ATM Operations Channel within PVC

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................363-211-585Issue 8, September 2008

8-25

Remote operations via ATM Operations Channel for mixedconfiguration...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Introduction

The figure below shows an ATM network example usingWaveStar® AM 1 Plusaccess multiplexers in a ring configuration to access multipleAnyMedia® AccessSystems in narrowband (NB) only or mixed configuration at a remote location. Mixedconfiguration means there are NB and ATM xDSL access technologies collocated inthe sameAnyMedia® Access System.

OAM&P management

The management system can either be an EMS or a remote Graphical System Interface(GSI).

The GSI/EMS sends the OAM&P data via Ethernet LAN over 10/100 BaseT to theATM-IP router, which is connected via ATM switch to the local gateway AM 1 Plus.The AM 1 Plus is responsible for the particular ring (network address) of which theaddressedAnyMedia® Access System is part. The ATM-IP router encapsulates the IPpacket in AAL5 PVC via RFC 2684 in routed mode. The destinationAnyMedia®

network element (NE) receives the data via AAL5 PVC.

Transport elements

Transport elements are:

• ATM switch, which transports the ATM Operations Channels, is located at the ATMnetwork boundary and interfaces with other networks (for example Central OfficeLAN) or network elements that are not part of the ATM network.

• ATM router, which is attached to the ATM switch and located at the central office.It performs the transformation (The transformation functionality can also beperformed by the ATM edge switch connected by means of a LAN connection withthe central office. In these cases there is no need for a separate router) between theOAM&P stream using logical link control (LLC)/subnetwork attachment point(SNAP) encapsulation according to RFC2684 over an AAL5 PVC and the 10/100BaseT Ethernet interface.

• AnyMedia® network elements (NEs), which are connected to the ATM network byusing PVC links viaWaveStar® AM 1 Plus.

• WaveStar® AM 1 Plus access multiplexers, which are used to transport the ATMinformation.

The figure below shows the communication with remoteAnyMedia® Access Systemsusing ATM Operations Channel.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

8-26 363-211-585Issue 8, September 2008

AM 1 Plus provisioning aspects

• The external alarm inputs of the AM 1 Plus have to be configured so that they arecompatible withAnyMedia® network elements.

• The OSI DCN has to be set up for all AM 1 Plus systems in the SDH ring.

• The local gateway and all remote AM 1 Plus systems have to be provisioned withan IP address and a corresponding subnetwork mask address for their EthernetLAN (Q-LAN) interface.

Ethernet Switch

ATM TransportNetwork, for example STM-1/4 Access Ring

Central Office

EMS

ATM-IP Router for OAM&P

RemoteLocation

AAL5 PVC

EM Server

SDH OAM&P (DCC) path

Alarming path

OAM&P path

10BaseTIP

TCPTL1

10BaseTIP

UDPSNMP

NB ATM xDSLAAL5 PVC

Central Office LAN

IP tunneled via

TP4/IPCLNPLAPDDCC

(optionallyconnected)

GSI

TP4CLNP

Ethernet10BaseT

ITM-SC10/100 BaseT Ethernet LAN

criticalmajorminor

AnyMedia office alarm outputsseries connected toWaveStar AM1 Plusexternal inputs

Local GSI

AAL5 PVC

IP2.4

NB

AnyMedia

AAL5 PVC

AAL5 PVC

ATMxDSL

OSI DCN

AAL5 PVC

criticalmajorminor

majorminor

ITM CIT

AM1 Plus alarm outputs

GatewayAM1 Plus

NSAP1

ATM Switch

AM1 Plus

NSAP3

AM1 Plus

NSAP2

IP2.2

ATMNB

AnyMedia

xDSLIP3.2

ATMNB

AnyMedia

xDSL

IP2.3

ATMNB

AnyMedia

xDSL

Q-LAN carries IP and OSI data

DCN configurations for OAM&P Remote operations via ATM Operations Channel formixed configuration

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................363-211-585Issue 8, September 2008

8-27

AnyMedia ® Access System provisioning

The provisioning of a singleAnyMedia® network element in routed mode for multipleshelves scenario comprises the following:

• Provisioning of the AFM related to the NB ATM Operations Channel:

– The″normal turn-up″ provisioning of the AFM

– On the AFM provision a cross-connect between a control virtual pathtermination (CVPT) and an AFM feeder VPI on the virtual path terminationgroup VPTGrp.

Important! The ATM Operations Channel uses the virtual path (VP) identified bythe VPI value for transporting the narrowband OAM&P data through the ATMtransport network.

• Provisioning of the AFM related to the BB ATM Operations Channel:

– Set the IP address of the ATM port and select the network managementinterface

– Provision the VPI/VCI for the BB ATM Operations Channel.

Important! The provisioning is valid in the same way for allAnyMedia® networkelements used in this network configuration example.

Alarming

The three office alarm outputs (minor, major, critical) of theAnyMedia® networkelements at the remote locations are connected in series (if applicable) and connectedto the corresponding external alarm inputs of theWaveStar® AM 1 Plus.

The WaveStar® AM 1 Plus maps the alarm contacts as follows:

• The major and critical alarm contacts at the remote location to the major contact ofthe WaveStar® AM 1 Plus located in the Central Office.

• The minor alarm contact from the remote location to the minor alarm contact of theWaveStar® AM 1 Plus located in the Central Office.

The WaveStar® ITM CIT alarm window indicatesAnyMedia® Access System alarmsforwarded viaWaveStar® AM 1 Plus alarm inputs.

DCN configurations for OAM&P Remote operations via ATM Operations Channel formixed configuration

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

8-28 363-211-585Issue 8, September 2008

Specific data communications network (DCN)configurations

Overview...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Purpose

Contents

SDH point-to-point access network based onWaveStar® ADM 4/1 8-30


ADM 4/1 ring configuration over F1-byte8-32

Using SynCom PDH equipment in a point-to-point structure 8-34

Access to remoteAnyMedia® Access Systems via IP networks 8-37

Access to remoteAnyMedia® Access Systems via an X.25 DCN 8-39

Access to remoteAnyMedia® Access Systems via TCP/IP over DCC 8-42

Access to remoteAnyMedia® Access Systems via AM 1 Plus over DCC 8-45


...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................363-211-585Issue 8, September 2008

8-29

SDH point-to-point access network based onWaveStar® ADM4/1...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Introduction

The SDH point-to-point network is based onWaveStar® ADM 4/1 access multiplexers,operating in terminal mode. In this example a singleAnyMedia® Access System isconnected to oneWaveStar® ADM 4/1 access multiplexer.

SDH point-to-point access network

Management

The management of the singleAnyMedia® Access System is performed by GSI/EMSvia CIT port EIA-232C (19,200 kbps, 8N1, Rx, Tx, ground) and the remote access viathe SDH F1-byte connected to aWaveStar® ADM 4/1 service channel (SVC) accessboard.

The SDH management of theWaveStar® ADM 4/1 is performed by the LCS V3 viaEIA-232C, connected to a PC port. The remote ADMs are accessed via the QECC

(DCC-bytes in the SDH overhead).

nn 22MbpMbp ss(V5.X)(V5.X)

to LEto LE

IndicateIndicate AAnnyMediayMediaalaralarmmss ffoorrwwardedardedviavia WWaavveStareStar ADM 4/1ADM 4/1exterexternal alarnal alarm inputsm inputs

GSIGSI

LCSLCS VV33

exterexternal relanal relayycontactscontacts

MessageMessageccoommmmunicationunicationffuunction andnction andprotocolprotocolccoonnvversionersion

PC connectorPC connector

Connector to SVCConnector to SVC

EIA-2EIA-23322CC

EIA-2EIA-23322CCEIA-232CEIA-232C totoF1 -F1 -bbyteyteccoonvnversionersion

Central OfficeCentral OfficeTTransmissionransmissionPPathath

QQECCECC ffor remoteor remoteWWaavveStareStar ADM 4/1ADM 4/1managementmanagement

FF11-- bbyteytefforor AAnnyMediayMediamanagementmanagement

WWaaveStarveStar

ExterExternnaall aallaarrmminputsinputs

OfficOfficeealaralarmm

EIA-EIA-232C232C

Remote LocationRemote Location

AnAnyMediayMedia

ccrriticaliticalmajormajorminorminor

ADM 4/1ADM 4/1WWaaveStarveStarADM 4/1ADM 4/1


...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

8-30 363-211-585Issue 8, September 2008

Alarming

Optionally, external alarm inputs and relay outputs can be utilized:

• The threeAnyMedia® Access System office alarm outputs are connected to threecorrespondingWaveStar® ADM 4/1 external inputs (according to severity)

• AnyMedia® Access System alarms appear in the LCS V3 alarm window.Additionally, the correspondingWaveStar® ADM 4/1 external alarm outputs areoperated.

DCN configurations for OAM&P SDH point-to-point access network based on WaveStar®

ADM 4/1

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................363-211-585Issue 8, September 2008

8-31


ADM 4/1 ring configuration over F1-byte...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Introduction

The figure below shows the application usingWaveStar® ADM 4/1 access multiplexersin a ring configuration to access one or multipleAnyMedia® Access Systems at aremote location. Communication is only possible with one remoteAnyMedia® AccessSystem at any one time.

Managing multipleAnyMedia® Access Systems in aWaveStar® ADM 4/1-based SDHring via multi-drop PPP over EIA-232C over F1-byte

AnyMedia ® Access Systems in SDH ring over F1-byte

For accessing the remoteAnyMedia® Access Systems, the EIA-232C interface of theremote system is connected directly or via EIA-232C diffusion box to theEIA-232C interface (connector V28-1) of theWaveStar® ADM 4/1. TheWaveStar®

STM-1Ring

criticalmajorminor

criticalmajorminor

AnyMedia office alarm outputsconnected toWaveStar ADM 4/1externals inputs

major

minorADM alarm

V5.

x

V5.

x

LocalExchange

V5.

x I/F

V5.

x I/F

V5.

x I/F

V5.

x I/F

...TCPIP

PPPEIA-232C

TCPIP

PPPEIA-232C

TL1TCPIP

PPPEIA-232C

TL1

IP4

IP6

EIA-232C

Diffusion Box

TCPIP

PPPF1

TCPIP

PPPEIA-232C

broadcast

QECC for WaveStar ADM 4/1management

F1-byte for AnyMediamanagementRemote

Location

Central Office

outputs

LCS V3

GSI

AnyMedia

AnyMedia

IP5

AnyMedia

AnyMedia office alarm outputsseries connected toWaveStar ADM 4/1external inputs

Alarming path

OAM&P path

WaveStar ADM 4/1

WaveStar ADM 4/1

WaveStar ADM 4/1

IP7AnyMedia


...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

8-32 363-211-585Issue 8, September 2008

ADM 4/1 converts the data on the EIA-232C interface (connector V28-1) to theF1-byte of the STM-1 transmission section. The EIA-232C interface of theWaveStar®

ADM 4/1 does not serve the control lines DTR, RTS, DSR and CTS of the EIA-232Cinterface. Therefore the control lines have to be bridged within the cable connectors onthe AnyMedia® side as well as on the GSI side. Only RxD, TxD and ground areconnected at the EIA-232C interface between theAnyMedia® Access System and theWaveStar® ADM 4/1. The transmission parameters shall be 19.2 kbps, 8 bit, no parity,1 stop bit.

At the central office theWaveStar® ADM 4/1 converts the F1-byte back to serial dataand routes the serial data to the EIA-232C interface on the SVC card of theWaveStar®

ADM 4/1. To this EIA-232C interface the GSI is connected.

Controlling a remote AnyMedia ® Access System

Via the F1-byte only one remoteAnyMedia® Access System can be controlled at atime. The controlledAnyMedia® Access System is selected by a special PPP linkset-up procedure. The transmission capacity of the EIA-232 interface is limited to 19.2kbps by the F1-byte of theWaveStar® ADM 4/1.

The OAM&P information of theWaveStar® ADM 4/1 at the remote location istransferred via embedded control channel (QECC) to the management system LCS V3.

Diffusion box

The diffusion box is a serial broadcast device. This device broadcasts all serial datareceived from one main serial port to all other ports. All data received from the otherports will be sent immediately to the main port.

Alarming

Optionally, external alarm inputs and relay outputs can be utilized:

• The threeAnyMedia® Access System office alarm outputs are connected to threecorrespondingWaveStar® ADM 4/1 external inputs (according to severity)

• AnyMedia® Access System alarms appear in the LCS V3 alarm window.Additionally, the correspondingWaveStar® ADM 4/1 external alarm outputs areoperated.

DCN configurations for OAM&P Managing multiple AnyMedia® Access Systems in aWaveStar ® ADM 4/1 ring configuration over F1-byte

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................363-211-585Issue 8, September 2008

8-33

Using SynCom PDH equipment in a point-to-point structure...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Introduction

The figure below shows the application using SynCom optical multiplexers in a taperconfiguration to access up to threeAnyMedia® Access Systems at remote locations.

Remote operations in point-to-point connections.

SynCom - embedded EIA-232C channel configuration

The requirements for this configuration example are:

• The EIA-232C interface on the CIU is used to access the management capability ofAnyMedia® Access System.

• The SynCom optical multiplexer is used as transmission equipment.

• The EIA-232C interface of the remoteAnyMedia® Access System is connected tothe EIA-232C interface of the SynCom.

• The SynCom offers up to three EIA-232C interfaces located on one 9-pin D-subconnector.

• A special cable is needed to adapt three EIA-232C interfaces to the three EIA-232Cinterfaces on one 9-pin D-sub connector of the SynCom optical multiplexer (to bedelivered by SynCom).

• The SynCom transmits data at the EIA-232C interface in a bit stream of 2 Mbps.

SynComSynComnn ¥¥ 22MbpsMbps

(V5.X)(V5.X)

to LEto LE

Indicate SynComIndicate SynComalaralarms andms and AnAnyMediayMediaalaralarms fms forworwarded viaarded viaSynCom miscella-SynCom miscella-neous alarneous alarm inputsm inputs

GSIGSI

CITCITSynComSynCom

offioffice alarce alarmmoutputsoutputs

44 xx E1 fE1 for EM4or EM488 xx E1 fE1 for EM8or EM81616 xx E1 fE1 for EM16or EM16

EIA-EIA-232C232C

EIA-EIA-232C232Cmanmanual sual switchwitch

EIA-EIA-232C to E1232C to E1conconvversionersion

Central OffiCentral Offi ceceTTransmissionransmissionPPathath

aalarlarm inputsm inputsAnAnyMediayMedia offioffice alarce alarmmoutputs (wired OR)outputs (wired OR)

EIA-EIA-232C232C

Remote LocationRemote Location

AnAnyMediayMedia

crcriticaliticalmajormajorminorminor

majormajorminorminor

AnAnyMediayMedia

E1 toE1 to EIA-EIA-232C con232C convver-er-

OneOne AAnnyMediayMedia ffor EM4or EM4max.max. twtwoo AAnnyMediayMedia ffor EM8or EM8max.max. tthhreeree AAnnyMediayMedia ffor EM16or EM16

crcriticaliticalmajormajorminorminor

SynComSynCom


...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

8-34 363-211-585Issue 8, September 2008

• A manual switch supports access of up to fourAnyMedia® Access Systems atremote locations.

• The SynCom EM16 supports access of up to threeAnyMedia® Access System fromone remote location.

• The SynCom CIT located in the CO for managing both SynCom opticalmultiplexers (local and remote one).

SynCom multiplexer type SPF52-E

Depending on the SynCom SPFS2-E optical multiplexers (EM4, EM8, or EM16) one,two or threeAnyMedia® Access Systems at remote locations can be connected viaEIA-232C to the SynCom optical multiplexers.

At the local exchange (LE) the SynCom SPFS2-E optical multiplexer converts themanagement information of the 2-Mbps bit stream to serial data and routes the serialdata to the EIA-232C interface on the SynCom SPFS2-E optical multiplexer.

Management

The LAN-based GSI/EMS and SynCom optical multiplexers are located in the CO. Toestablish a connection from the GSI/EMS to the different remoteAnyMedia® AccessSystems the manual switch has to be set by the operator or via remote access server(RAS). The GSI/EMS accesses one remote system at a time, that is one login sessionis active, there is no automatic polling.

Remote access server (RAS)

The remote access servers (RAS) are useful if more remoteAnyMedia® AccessSystems are controlled from one location (for example multiple SDH transmissionpaths are terminated by multiple SynComs in one CO). The RAS converts multipleEIA-232C interfaces to an LAN interface (Ethernet). The transport/network layer forremote access is TCP/IP.

Important! If using RAS, the CIT port has to be used in PPP mode.

The following protocol stack is needed:

• On the CO side TCP/IP over an Ethernet LAN.

• On theAnyMedia® Access System side TCP/IP/PPP/EIA-232C.

Provisioning of a RAS

The initial provisioning of a RAS is typically performed by a VT100/ANSI terminal,connected to an EIA-232C port. When the IP address of the RAS is provisioned, theRAS may be configured via LAN (TELNET, SNMP) but this depends on the RASbeing used.

DCN configurations for OAM&P Using SynCom PDH equipment in a point-to-pointstructure

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................363-211-585Issue 8, September 2008

8-35

Alarming

The three office alarm outputs (minor, major, critical) of theAnyMedia® AccessSystems at remote locations are″wired-or″ and connected to the corresponding externalalarm inputs of the SynCom SPFS2-E. The SynCom SPFS2-E offers up to four alarminputs (EM16, EM8, EM4).

The SynCom SPFS2-E located in a CO can detect alarm inputs at the remote end andoperate the office alarm outputs.

DCN configurations for OAM&P Using SynCom PDH equipment in a point-to-pointstructure

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

8-36 363-211-585Issue 8, September 2008

Access to remoteAnyMedia® Access Systems via IP networks...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Introduction

The figure below shows remoteAnyMedia® Access Systems which are attached to anIP network (for example the Internet, private IP networks). For the EMS the access tothese systems would be similar to the access to collocatedAnyMedia® Access Systems,no protocol translation is required.

EMS and remoteAnyMedia® Access Systems configuration via IP network.

IP network configuration examples

The local LAN interfaces of the COMDAC and the AFM are used for transporting theOAM&P information to theAnyMedia® Access Systems, so the local LAN port has tobe configured.

The initial provisioning has to be done via pre-provisioning (factory settings) or a localGSI (LAN or EIA-232C), because the local LAN interface must be in service so thatthe EMS server can access theAnyMedia® Access System.

Requirements for EMS connection

The requirements for this connection between the EMS and theAnyMedia® AccessSystems can be fulfilled in several ways:

• The LAN-based EMS with the EMS server is located in the central office

• Direct connection between EMS andAnyMedia® Access System through cross-over10BaseT cable

• The remoteAnyMedia® Access Systems are in different LAN segments connectedvia the EMS server to the EMS by means of router/bridges


...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................363-211-585Issue 8, September 2008

8-37

• The communication between EMS andAnyMedia® Access Systems uses a TCP/IPlocal LAN by means of 10BaseT hubs

• The protocol profiles are the same on the EMS side, remote side and in all theDCN,TL1/TCP/IP/MAC&LLC1/IEEE 802.3. and FTP over /TCP/IP/MAC&LLC1/IEEE 802.3.

Router/bridge configuration

• The router/bridge has to be configured (for example Ethernet interfacesconfiguration, filtering parameters, etc.)

• Any IP router or MAC&LLC1 bridge is suitable for this configuration

• If it is an IP public network (Internet), IP addresses have to be publicly assigned tothe EMS andAnyMedia® Access Systems

• Security issues have to be addressed in the IP network.

DCN configurations for OAM&P Access to remote AnyMedia® Access Systems via IPnetworks

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

8-38 363-211-585Issue 8, September 2008

Access to remoteAnyMedia® Access Systems via an X.25DCN...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Introduction

The figure below shows remoteAnyMedia® Access Systems which are attached to anX.25 public/private data network (PDN), which transports the OAM&P informationfrom the GSI/EMS to the systems.

Example of X.25 access to remoteAnyMedia® Access Systems.

X.25 public data network configurations

Two X.25 configurations are possible:

• The communication is achieved by means of X.25 permanent virtual circuits(PVCs), so the X.25 PVCs have to be provisioned in the X.25 PDN betweenrouters on both sides before the GSI/EMS andAnyMedia® Access Systems are ableto exchange OAM&P information.

• The communication is achieved by means of X.25 switched virtual circuits (SVCs),so no previous provisioning is needed in the X.25 PDN. The routers are responsiblefor establishing and releasing SVCs before the GSI/EMS andAnyMedia® AccessSystems are able to exchange OAM&P information.

Hub

RouterEMS

Router

EMS Server

10BaseT

TCPTL1

X.25 WAN

TCPIP

10 BaseT

EIA-232D

IP over X.25

IP over X.25DTE

AnyMedia

NB

AnyMedia

NB

AnyMedia

NB

DCE

DCE

EIA-232D

DTE

TCPIP

IP


...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................363-211-585Issue 8, September 2008

8-39

The initial provisioning for the external LAN OAM&P interface has to be done viapre-provisioning (factory settings) or a local GSI (LAN or EIA-232C).

Requirements


• The LAN-based EMS is located in the central office.

• The AnyMedia® Access Systems are located in remote locations (a remote LANcan exist in the remote location).

• An X.25 router (maybe a PC with X.25 and Ethernet cards) is needed on both sides(EMS and remote sides) for mediating from the X.25 network (playing the role ofX.25 DTE) to the LANs. The router performs the mapping from IP to X.25. Theexternal LAN OAM&P NE interface can be used for the communication betweenthe router and the EMS/AnyMedia® Access Systems.

• If SVCs are used the routers at the GSI/EMS and on the remote sides areresponsible for establishing, transmitting information and releasing the SVCs. TheX.121 addresses are needed for the routers’ serial ports.

• If PVCs are used the routers do not perform X.25 call setup procedures. The PVCsare the X.25 equivalent of leased lines; they are never disconnected and they areestablished by the PDN service provider.

Router configuration

The X.25 routers are needed at the GSI/EMS and on the remote side (except in thecase of having Sun Solstice installed in the EMS, in that case no router is needed onthe EMS side).

The minimal router requirements for supporting WAN/LAN configurations are:

• For a WAN interface the router must have one or more X.25 DTE interfaces. An IPaddress is to be assigned to every X.25 DTE interface.

• For a LAN interface the router must have one or two (for cascading purposes)Ethernet (IEEE 802.3) 10BaseT ports. In the event of two LAN ports,LAN-to-LAN routing should be supported.

Router provisioning

The initial provisioning of a router is performed by a VT100/ANSI terminal, connectedto an EIA-232 port. The provisioning needs are the following:

• X.25 interface functionality:

– Set the X.25 encapsulation (PVC or SVC).

– Set the virtual circuit ranges.

– Set the packet numbering modulo.

– Set the X.121 address.

– Set the default flow control values, etc.

• Protocols and encapsulations

DCN configurations for OAM&P Access to remote AnyMedia® Access Systems via anX.25 DCN

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

8-40 363-211-585Issue 8, September 2008

• IP addresses for IP routing (routing tables)

• Ethernet media.

DCN configurations for OAM&P Access to remote AnyMedia® Access Systems via anX.25 DCN

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................363-211-585Issue 8, September 2008

8-41

Access to remoteAnyMedia® Access Systems via TCP/IP overDCC...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Introduction

The figure below shows the configuration using the data communication channel(DCC) for transport of management information from a central office (CO) to remotelocations and vice versa. It also shows the protocols, terminated at different points.

Remote operations over DCC via TCP/IP protocol.

SDH TCP/IP via DCC overhead

The remoteAnyMedia® Access Systems are connected via 10BaseT Ethernet LAN tothe remote SDH ADM. TheAnyMedia® Access System sends the data over EthernetLAN to the remote ADM. The remote ADM converts the Ethernet (LLC/MAC) to

STM-1Ring

criticalmajorminor

criticalmajorminor

AnyMedia office alarm outputsconnected toPositron OSIRIS ADMexternal inputs

V5.

x

V5.

x

LocalExchange

V5.

x I/F

V5.

x I/F

V5.

x I/F

V5.

x I/F

...

TCPIP

Ethernet10BaseT

TCPIP

Ethernet10BaseT

TL1

TCPIP

Ethernet10BaseT

TL1IP2.2

IP2.4

10 BaseT Hub

TCPIP

LAPDDCC

RemoteLocation

Central Office

AnyMedia

AnyMedia

IP2.3

AnyMedia

AnyMedia office alarm outputsseries connected toPositron OSIRIS ADMmiscellaneous inputs

Alarming path

OAM&P path

OSIRIS ADM

OSIRIS ADM

IP3.2

AnyMedia

TCPIP

Ethernet10BaseT

TL1

from/to other

10 BaseT Hub

access networks

EMSGSISDH EM

10 BaseT Ethernet LAN

Router IP2.1

IP0.2

Router IP3.1

IP0.3

IP address n from subnet m (same network id for all ADMs)

IPn.m

TCP/IP Gateway / Router

V5.x Payload

OSIRIS ADM

all ADMs mediate DCC/LAN

IP1.1

Gateway IP0.2


...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

8-42 363-211-585Issue 8, September 2008

LAPD protocol and sends the data over the DCC bytes of the ring to the gatewayADM in the CO. The gateway ADM at the CO mediates the LAPD to the Ethernet(LLC/MAC) protocol and sends the data over the local LAN to the GSI/EMS.

Requirements


• SDH Add/Drop Multiplexers (Positron OSIRIS ADM) in standard or extendedshelves are deployed as transmission equipment.

• All SDH Add/Drop Multiplexers (ADM) provide 10BaseT Ethernet LAN(IEEE802.3) interface and utilize the network MCU (NMCU-SDH).

• Local gateway ADMs as well as remote ADMs support TCP/IP protocol over DCC(DCCm or DCCr) and mediation from DCC to 10BaseT Ethernet LAN and viceversa.

• The GSI/EMS are located in the CO and connected via 10BaseT Ethernet LAN tothe local gateway SDH ADM.

• Multiple remoteAnyMedia® Access Systems collocated at an ADM in a controlledenvironment.

• OneAnyMedia® Access System is connected to the ADM directly, multipleAnyMedia® Access Systems are connected via an Ethernet hub to the ADM.

Management

The GSI/EMS will send the management data via Ethernet LAN over 10BaseT to thelocal gateway ADM which is responsible for the particular ring (network address) ofwhich the addressedAnyMedia® Access System is part. The local gateway ADM thenmediates the Ethernet (LLC/MAC) to LAPD protocol and broadcasts the data over theDCC bytes in the STM-1 ring. All ADM NEs of the ring will receive data and discardit if the addressedAnyMedia® Access System does not match the subnetwork id of theremote Ethernet LAN. The ADM NE responsible for the addressed subnetwork idmediates the LAPD to the Ethernet (LLC/MAC) protocol and sends the data over theEthernet LAN to the addressedAnyMedia® Access System.

Positron OSIRIS ADM provisioning aspects

• The external alarm inputs (alarm contact closures) of the Positron OSIRIS ADM tobe configured are compatible with theAnyMedia® Access System.

• The local gateway ADM has to be provisioned with the network address of theSTM-1 ring for which it is responsible.

• The remote ADM has to be provisioned with the subnetwork address of theEthernet LAN it for which is responsible.

• Each ADM has to be provisioned with a subnetwork mask and IP address for theSDH interface.

DCN configurations for OAM&P Access to remote AnyMedia® Access Systems via TCP/IPover DCC

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................363-211-585Issue 8, September 2008

8-43

AnyMedia ® Access System provisioning aspects

The initial provisioning is done via pre-provisioning (off-site provisioning on top of thefactory settings) or via a local GSI (LAN or EIA-232C).

To enable the use of an Ethernet interface for remote operations, the followingprovisioning needs for theAnyMedia® Access System are required:

• Define an IP address and subnetwork mask for the Ethernet interface.

• Define the default route with the IP address of the ADM as gateway.

Ethernet hub provisioning aspects

No provisioning should be necessary. The hub connects all point-to-point 10BaseTinterfaces at one location to build an Ethernet LAN.

The Ethernet hub/multi port repeater must have two or more 10BaseT ports (RJ45) atremote locations and four or more 10BaseT (RJ45) ports at the CO.

Alarming

The three alarm contact outputs (minor, major, critical) of theAnyMedia® AccessSystems at remote locations are″wired-or″ and connected to the correspondingmiscellaneous alarm inputs of the ADM. A special cable might be necessary to connectthe AnyMedia® Access System alarm outputs to the ADM alarm inputs.

The ADM located in the CO can detect alarm inputs at the remote end and will operatethe office alarm outputs.

DCN configurations for OAM&P Access to remote AnyMedia® Access Systems via TCP/IPover DCC

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

8-44 363-211-585Issue 8, September 2008

Access to remoteAnyMedia® Access Systems via AM 1 Plusover DCC...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................


The figure below shows the configuration using the data communication channel(DCC) for transport of management information from the central office (CO) to remotelocations and vice versa. It also shows the protocols, terminated at different points.

Remote operations with AM 1 Plus over DCC via TCP/IP protocol.


The remoteAnyMedia® Access Systems are connected via 10BaseT Ethernet LAN tothe remote AM 1 Plus. TheAnyMedia® Access System sends the TCP/IP data overEthernet LAN to the remote AM 1 Plus. The remote AM 1 Plus encapsulates IP

SDHRing

promptdeferredinfo V

5.x

V5.

x

LocalExchange

V5.

x I/F

V5.

x I/F

V5.

x I/F

V5.

x I/F

...

TP4CLNP

Ethernet10BaseT

TCPIP

Ethernet10BaseT

TL1

TCPIP

Ethernet10BaseT

TL1IP3.2

IP3.4

10 BaseT Hub

TP4/IPCLNPLAPDDCC

RemoteLocation

Central Office

AnyMedia

AnyMedia

IP3.3

AnyMedia

Alarming path

OAM&P path

AM1 Plus

IP2.2

AnyMedia

TCPIP

Ethernet10BaseT

TL1

from/to other

10 BaseT Hub

access networks

EMSGSIITM-SC

10 BaseT Ethernet LANQ-LAN, carries IP and

IP3.1

IP1.1

Gateway

IP2.1

NSAP2

IP address n from subnet mIPn.m

TCP/IP Gateway

V5.x Payload

AM1 Plus’s miscella-neous discrete out-puts (MDO) are con-nected to the miscel-laneous alarm inputs of the AnyMedia Access System

AM1 Plus

NSAP3

AM1 Plus’s miscella-neous discrete out-puts (MDO) are con-nected to the miscel-laneous alarm inputs of the AnyMedia Access System

promptdeferredinfo

AM1 Plus

NSAP1

ITM-CIT

All ADMs support

EIA-232C

tunneling of TCP/IPover OSI DCN

OSI data

AM1alarms


...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................363-211-585Issue 8, September 2008

8-45

packets in CLNP envelopes (OSI) and sends the packets via DCC overhead bytes tothe gateway AM 1 in the CO. This gateway AM 1 Plus receives the CLNP packets,extracts the IP data and sends it over the local LAN to the GSI/EMS.

Requirements


• SDH Add/Drop Multiplexers (ADM) from Alcatel-Lucent (AM 1) are deployed astransmission equipment throughout the entire SDH network or at least on the fringeof the SDH network. EachAnyMedia® Access System managed via this featuremust be connected to an AM 1 Plus, other kinds of ADMs without this feature canalso be part of the OSI DCN but are only used as intermediate systems.

• All AM1s provide a 10BaseT Ethernet LAN (IEEE802.3) interface.

• The local gateway AM 1 Plus as well as remote AM1s support dual stack withtunneling of IP datagrams received over 10BaseT through an OSI DCN utilizingDCC-bytes (DCCm or DCCr) and vice versa.

• Up to 20 AM1s can be deployed in an SDH ring using the IP tunneling feature.

• The GSI and an EMS are located in the CO and connected via 10BaseT EthernetLAN to the local gateway AM. GSI and EMS have to ignore OSI messages.

• The ITM-CIT and an optional ITM-SC are located in the CO. The ITM-SC isconnected via 10BaseT Ethernet LAN and the ITM-CIT is connected via RS-232 tothe local gateway AM 1 Plus. The ITM-SC has to ignore IP packets.

• Multiple remoteAnyMedia® Access Systems co-located at an AM 1 Plus in acontrolled environment.

• OneAnyMedia® Access System is connected to the AM 1 Plus directly viacross-over 10BaseT cable, multipleAnyMedia® Access Systems are connected viaan Ethernet hub.

Management

The GSI/EMS will send the management data via Ethernet LAN over 10BaseT to thelocal gateway AM 1 which is responsible for the particular ring (network address) ofwhich the addressedAnyMedia® Access System is part. The local gateway AM 1 Plusthen encapsulates the IP packets in CLNP envelopes (OSI) and sends the packets overthe SDH DCC overhead bytes to the destination AM 1 Plus. The destinationAM 1 Plus NE receives the data and extracts the IP data and transmits it via theremote Ethernet LAN to the addressedAnyMedia® Access System.

AM 1 provisioning aspects

• The miscellaneous discrete outputs of the AM 1 Plus have to be configured to becompatible withAnyMedia® Access System.

• The OSI DCN has to be set up for all AM1s in the SDH ring.

DCN configurations for OAM&P Access to remote AnyMedia® Access Systems via AM 1Plus over DCC

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

8-46 363-211-585Issue 8, September 2008

• The local gateway and all remote AM1s have to be provisioned with an IP addressand a corresponding subnetwork mask address for their Ethernet LAN (Q-LAN)interface.

• IP tunnels over OSI DCN must be provisioned from each remote location to thelocal gateway AM 1 Plus in the CO.

AnyMedia ® Access System provisioning aspects

The initial provisioning has to be done via pre-provisioning (off-site provisioning ontop of the factory settings) or via a local GSI (LAN or EIA-232C).

To enable the use of Ethernet interface for remote operations, the followingprovisioning needs for theAnyMedia® Access System are required:

• The miscellaneous alarm inputs for theAnyMedia® Access System have to beconfigured to be compatible with the AM 1 Plus.

• Define an IP address and subnetwork mask for the Ethernet interface.

• Define the default route with the IP address of the AM 1 Plus as gateway.

Ethernet hub provisioning aspects

No provisioning is necessary for the Ethernet hub.

Alarming

The miscellaneous discrete outputs of the AM 1 Plus at remote locations areconnected to the corresponding miscellaneous alarm inputs of theAnyMedia® AccessSystem. A special cable might be necessary to connect the AM 1 Plus alarm outputs tothe AnyMedia® Access System alarm inputs.

The EMS located in the CO can then detect alarm inputs at the remote locations andwill indicate alarms of the AM1s accordingly.

DCN configurations for OAM&P Access to remote AnyMedia® Access Systems via AM 1Plus over DCC

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................363-211-585Issue 8, September 2008

8-47

9 9Technical specifications

Overview...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Purpose

Contents

Overview 9-2

System performance 9-3

External transmission interfaces network side 9-4

External transmission interfaces subscriber side 9-8

Other external transmission interfaces 9-15

External OAM&P interfaces for narrowband services 9-16

External OAM&P interfaces for ATM xDSL services 9-18

Environmental conditions 9-19

Environmental classification 9-20

Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) 9-21

Resistibility 9-22

Standards compliance 9-23

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................363-211-585Issue 8, September 2008

9-1

Overview...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Technical specifications

This section provides the technical specifications of the Alcatel-LucentAnyMedia®

Access System:

• System performance

• External transmission interfaces network side

– E1 interfaces on IO_E1 and AFME1

– E1 interfaces on SHDSL AP

– E3 interfaces

– DS3/DSX-3 interfaces

– STM-1/OC-3c optical interfaces

• External transmission interfaces subscriber side

– Z interfaces

– U interfaces

– HDSL interfaces

– SHDSL interfaces

– ADSL interfaces

– E1 interfaces

• Other external transmission interface

– Station clock interface

• External OAM&P interfaces for narrowband services

– CIT port

– LAN interface

– Alarm interfaces

– Remote operations channel (ROC) when using a TDM COMDAC

• External OAM&P interfaces for ATM xDSL services

– Console port

– Local LAN interface

– BB ATM Operations Channel (ATM PVC)

• Battery capacities

• Environmental conditions

• Environmental classification

• Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC)

• Resistibility

• Standards compliance

NOTE: The pinning of the connectors in theAnyMedia® Access System is described inthe Installation Manual.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

9-2 363-211-585Issue 8, September 2008

System performance...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

The AnyMedia® Access System fulfills the ETSI Model reference load A and referenceload B. The detailed evaluation of the capacity for the different system configurationsis listed in the APOG partNarrowband and ATM xDSL servicesin the chapterSystemplanning and engineering for NB services.

Call capacity V5.1 Load A: 3264 BHCA, 0.91 Calls/s, 480 subscribers, 0.17Erlang/line

Load B: 4406 BHCA, 1.22 Calls/s, 480 subscribers, 0.21Erlang/line −020

Call capacity V5.2ETSI V5 Shelfconfiguration

Load A: 3482 BHCA, 0.97 Calls/s, 512 subscribers, 0.17Erlang/line −030

Load B: 4700 BHCA, 1.31 Calls/s, 512 subscribers, 0.21Erlang/line −035

Call capacity V5.2LAG 4300 Shelf

Load A: 9357 BHCA, 2.59 Calls/s, 1376 subscribers, 0.17Erlang/line

Load B: 12630 BHCA, 3.51 Calls/s, 1376 subscribers, 0.21Erlang/line

Reliability The downtime for any individual subscriber line caused byAnyMediaAccess System hardware faults does not exceed anaverage of 13 minutes per year

The downtime for any individual subscriber line caused byAnyMediaAccess System software faults does not exceed anaverage of 3 minutes per year

The maintenance rate does not exceed 1.5 maintenance actionsper 100 lines per year for anAnyMediaAccess Systemoperating in an uncontrolled environment

The maintenance rate due to hardware faults does not exceed1.2 maintenance actions per 100 lines per year for anAnyMediaAccess System operating in an uncontrolledenvironment

The AnyMediaAccess System operating in an uncontrolledenvironment fulfills the call handling performance objectivesin accordance to ETS 300 795 −095


...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................363-211-585Issue 8, September 2008

9-3

External transmission interfaces network side...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

This section lists the technical specifications of the external transmission interfacesnetwork side of theAnyMedia® Access System. The transmission interfaces towardsthe network are the E1 interfaces, the E3/DS3 interfaces, and the STM-1/OC-3coptical interfaces.

E1 interfaces on IO_E1 and AFME1

The E1 interfaces are valid for E1 links on IO_E1 packs and for E1 feeders of theAFME1 (IMA).

Transmission rate 2.048 Mbps ± 50 ppm according to ITU-T G.703

Line code HDB3 code according to ITU-T G.703

Line impedance 75 Ω for coaxial-pair cables (not applicable for E1 interfaceson AFME1)

120 Ω for symmetrical-pair cables

Input signal loss 0 to 6 dB at 1024 kHz

Signal transmissioncharacteristic

According to ITU-T G.703, ITU-T G.823

Digital signal framing According to ITU-T G.704, ITU-T G.706

CRC4 procedure According to ITU-T G.706

NOTE: Enabling/disabling the CRC4 check for leased linelinks is provisionable by the operator.

E1 link fault detection Loss of frame (LOF)

Loss of signal (LOS)

High bit error ratio (HBER 10-3)

LBER E1 signal degrade threshold monitoring is provisionableby the operator (LBER 10-4, 10-5, 10-6, 10-7) (not applicable forE1 interfaces on AFME1)

Alarm indication signal (AIS)

Remote alarm indication (RAI)

Overvoltageprotection

According to ITU-T G.703, Annex B

E1 interfaces on SHDSL AP

The E1 interfaces are provided for unstructured leased lines via E1 ports on SHDSLAPs.



...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

9-4 363-211-585Issue 8, September 2008


Line impedance 120 Ω for symmetrical-pair cables; via patch panel E1termination impedance 75Ω for coaxial-pair cables is possible




E1 link fault detection Loss of signal (LOS)


According to ITU-T K.21

E3 interfaces


E3 cell format In accordance with ATM Forum user-network interface (UNI3.1) specification


Line impedance 75 Ω for coaxial-pair cables; separate wires for transmit andreceive direction

Input signal loss max. 0 to 12 dB at 17.184 kHz


According to ITU-T G.703

Digital signal framing According to ITU-T G.832

E3 feeder faultdetection


Bit error ratio (BER≥ 10-6)

Loss of frame (LOF)



According to ITU-T G.703, Annex B

DS3/DSX-3 interfaces

Important! The termDS3 interface refers to a bit rate of 44.736 Mbps andframing according to ITU-T Recommendations G.804, I.432 and ANSI T1.107,without specifying the physical interface. The termDSX-3interface refers toeverything that DS3 refers to with the addition of a specific physical interface

Technical specifications External transmission interfaces network side

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................363-211-585Issue 8, September 2008

9-5

according to Telcordia specification GR-499. The ATM feeder multiplexerAFMDS3 provides a DSX-3 interface. In this manual the more general term DS3interface is used.

Transmission rate 44.736 Mbps ± 20 ppm according to Telcordia specificationGR-499

DS3 cell format In accordance with ATM Forum user-network interface (UNI3.1) specification

Line code B3ZS code

Line impedance 75 Ω for coaxial-pair cables; separate wires for transmit andreceive direction


According to Telcordia specification GR-499

Digital signal framing According to ANSI T1.107

DS3 feeder faultdetection


Bit error ratio (BER 10-6)

Loss of frame (LOF)


Synchronization signal failed

Electrical andphysicalcharacteristics

According to ANSI T1.107, Telcordia specification GR-499,ITU-T G.804, ITU-T I.432

STM-1/OC-3c optical interfaces

Wavelength 1310 nm ±50 nm (transmit/receive)

Optical interface Class L-1.1 according to ITU-T G.957 (long-haul)

Optical line rate Input: 155.52 Mbps

Output: 155.52 Mbps

Framing ATM cell mapping according to Telcordia specification GR253and ITU G.707

Cell format UNI 3.1/4.0 as defined in the ATM Forum

Line code Binary Non-Return to Zero (NRZ) optical

Laser type Laser transmitter of″Laser Class 1″

Cabling Separate single-mode fiber for each direction

Connector type Two single SC-type connectors

LBO for opticalattenuation

External per optical receive-connector


...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

9-6 363-211-585Issue 8, September 2008

Optical link range 40 km

Optical receivesensitivity

Minimum: -34 dBm

Maximum: -10 dBm

Optical laser averagetransmit power

Minimum: -5 dBm

Maximum: 0 dBm

Optical laser averagereceive power

Minimum: -34 dBm

Maximum: -10 dBm

Bit error rate (BER) ≤ 1×10-10


...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................363-211-585Issue 8, September 2008

9-7

External transmission interfaces subscriber side...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

This section lists the technical specifications of the external transmission interfacessubscriber side of theAnyMedia® Access System. The transmission interfaces towardsthe subscriber are the Z interfaces, U interfaces,, HDSL interfaces, SHDSL interfacesand the ADSL interfaces.

Z interfaces

Feeding range RLoop = 2200 Ω (includes subscriber terminal, DC resistancetypically between 280Ω and 540Ω), ILoop≥ 16 mA at V =-48 V

RLoop = 1800 Ω (includes subscriber terminal, DC resistancetypically between 280Ω and 540Ω), ILoop≥ 18 mA at V =-48 V

RLoop = 1500 Ω (includes subscriber terminal, DC resistancetypically between 280Ω and 540Ω), ILoop ≥ 22 mA at V =-48 V

Maximum feedingcurrent

Low current limit: 30 mA ± 3 mA

High current limit: 40 mA ± 3 mA

NOTE: The current limit is provisionable by the operator (lowor high).

Feeding polarity Support of both feeding polarities:

• a-wire more positive with respect to b-wire

• b-wire more positive with respect to a-wire

Feeding voltage V = -48 V nominal, allowed range -57 V up to -40.5 V



Ringing Ringing frequency f = 20 Hz or f = 25 Hz

VAC = 75 Vrms up to 105 Vrms (no load)

VDC = -57 V up to -40.5 V (no load)

Minimum ringing current IAC≥ 15 mA with 5 ringers (load ofone ringer: 1000Ω, 1 mF serial)

Ringing mode: battery-backed ringing (one wire is connectedto the ringing signal, the other wire is connected to ground)

Supervisory range Off-hook: RLoop≤ 2500 Ω

On-hook: RLoop≥ 10000Ω

Periodic pulsemetering

12-kHz or 16-kHz pulse signals

NOTE: Periodic pulse metering is only supported byapplication pack LPP100.

Loop signaling timing Customer specific


...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

9-8 363-211-585Issue 8, September 2008

Pulse dialing Customer specific

DTMF dialing According to ITU-T Q.23

Terminationimpedance

Customer specific

Balance networkimpedance

Customer specific

NOTE: Up to five different balance network impedances areprovisionable by the operator, depending on the customer’sspecification

Relative input level 0 dBr (default)

Operator provisioning range: -4 dBr up to 8 dBr in steps of0.5 dB

Relative output level -7 dBr (default)

Operator provisioning range: -12 dBr up to 3 dBr in steps of0.5 dB


According to ITU-T G.712, ITU-T Q.517 (Red Book), ITU-TQ.552

Test access Full-splitting access to the channel side and to the drop side

Bridging access (monitoring mode)

NOTE:The Z interface of the LPZ12x does not support channelside test access.

U interfaces

Technical conformity According to ETR 080 Annex A, ITU-T G.961

Transmission method 2-wire duplex transmission with echo cancellation

Channel structure 2 B + D16 + synchronization + maintenance data

Line code 2B1Q and 4B3T

Total modulation rate 80 kbaud (2B1Q) / 120 kbaud (4B3T)

Maximum feedingcurrent

Per line current limit: 45 mA

Remote feedingvoltage range

91 V to 99 V

Transmit amplitude Single pulse: 2.5 Vp± 5 % at 135 Ω

Encoded signal: Max. 4 Vp± 10 % at 135Ω

Internal resistance 135 Ω

Line Balanced copper wire pair

Technical specifications External transmission interfaces subscriber side

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................363-211-585Issue 8, September 2008

9-9

Range for BER ≤10-7

Loops 1 15 (ANSI), Loops 1 8 (ETSI)

Range (with noiseµV

Hz----------- as per ETR 080)

• Cable 0.4 mm∅ 4.2 km

• Cable 0.6 mm∅ 8.0 km

Subscriber loopbacktesting

Loopback 1, 1A, 2

BER measurement BER 10-3, BER 10-6

Safety status TNV circuit (IEC 950)

U interface faultdetection

Power overload

Loss of frame (LOF)

High bit error ratio (HBER 10-3)

Low bit error ratio (LBER 10-6)



Test access Half-splitting access to the channel side and to the drop side

HDSL interfaces

Transmission rate 1168 kbps per HDSL pair and two pairs in parallel accordingto ETSI TS 101 135

Application modes Point-to-multipoint

Point-to-point

Single pair

V3 point-to-point

Unstructured point-to-point

Supported subscriberinterfaces via NTU

G.703 interface

V.35 interface according to ITU-T V.35


X.21 interface according to ITU-T X.21

Line code 2B1Q

Total modulation rate 584 kbaud

Bit rate 2×1168 kbps, duplex

Transmission rangefor BER ≤ 10 - 8

Cable 0.4 mm∅ 3.2 km typical

Cable 0.6 mm∅ 5.3 km typical

Return loss ≥ 16 dB at 40 kHz < f < 300 kHz


...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

9-10 363-211-585Issue 8, September 2008


Loopback 1 and 2

Safety status TNV circuit (IEC950)

Test access Test access to the drop side

HDSL interface faultdetection

Loss of frame


According ITU-T K.20

SHDSL interfaces (narrowband)

Transmission rate 200 kbps up to 2056 kbps per SHDSL port according toITU-T G.991.2/ Annex B standard

Application modes Multi-rate single pair (MRS)

Point-to-point single pair (PPS)

V3 point-to-point single pair (V3PPS)

Unstructured point-to-point single pair (UPPS)

Supported subscriberinterfaces via NTU

G.703 interface



X.21 interface according to ITU-T X.21

Line code 16 TC-PAM Symmetrical PSD modes according ITU-TG.991.2/Annex B

Bit rate The SHDSL link bit rate can be configured for payload ratesbetween 192 kbps and 2048 kbps

Transmission range Max. reach at 2048 kbps SHDSL link bit rates without noise at0.4 mm is approximately 3.5 km

Line terminationreference impedance

135 Ω

Return loss According ITU-T G.991.2/chapter 11.3


Loopback 1 and 2

Safety status TNV circuit (IEC950)

Test access Test access to the drop side

SHDSL interface faultdetection

Loss of frame (LOF)



...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................363-211-585Issue 8, September 2008

9-11


According ITU-T K.20

E1-interfaces (APE1 on LPS510)

V5 ISDN PRA subscribers can be supported via AP_E1 ports on LPS510.



Line impedance 120 Ω for symmetrical-pair cables; via patch panel E1termination impedance 75Ω for coaxial-pair cables is possible




E1 link fault detection Loss of signal (LOS)



ADSL interfaces

Transmission rate Full-rate ADSL Up to 6.144 Mbps downstream, up to 640 kbpsupstream (any multiple in steps of 32 kbps) according to ANSIT1.413

ADSL-lite (Universal) Up to 1.536 Mbps downstream, up to512 kbps upstream

Modulation Discrete multitone (DMT)

Output impedance 100 Ω

Return loss ≥ 10 dB from 25 kHz to 1104 kHz

Longitudinal balance > 40 dB from 30 kHz to 1104 kHz (measured per ANSIT1.413, Issue 2)

Transmit powerspectral density,inband, peak

Full-rate ADSL, downstream, 26 kHz to 1104 kHz, –36.5dBm/Hz

ADSL-lite, downstream, 138 kHz to 552 kHz, –36.5 dBm/Hz

Full-rate ADSL, upstream, 26 kHz to 138 kHz, –34.5 dBm/Hz

ADSL-lite, upstream, 26 kHz to 138 kHz, –34.5 dBm/Hz


...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

9-12 363-211-585Issue 8, September 2008

Transmit powerspectral density,out-of-band, peak

Full-rate ADSL, downstream, < 4 kHz, > 3093 kHz,–90dBm/Hz (measured per ANSI T1.413)

ADSL-lite, downstream, < 4 kHz, > 2290 kHz, –90 dBm/Hz(measured per ITU-T G.992.2)

Full-rate ADSL, upstream, < 4 kHz, > 307 kHz, –90 dBm/Hz(measured per ANSI T1.413)

ADSL-lite, upstream, < 4 kHz, > 307 kHz, –90 dBm/Hz(measured per ITU-T G.992.2)

DC loop resistanceadded by eachsplitter

≤ 25 Ω

Insertion loss addedby each splitter

≤ 1.0 dB at 1004 Hz

VF attenuationdistortion added byeach splitter

Maximum variation, ± 1.5 dB, 0.2 kHz to 3.4 kHz, relative to1004 Hz

SHDSL interfaces (ATM)

Application Mode ATM Transport

PayloadTransmission Rate

In 2-wire mode: 192 kbps to 2304 kbps in 64 kbps increments and 2312 kbpsas per ITU-T G.991.2 Annex E standard for ATM transport; In 4-wire mode(Bonding): 384 kbps to 4608 kbps

Transmission Range Approximately 3.5 km (12 kft) for a 2304 kbps payload carried on 0.4 mm(26 AWG) twisted-pair copper wire in a noiseless environment

TransmissionPerformance

Bit Error Ratio (BER) is better than 10-7 for the conditions typicallyencountered with European and North American networks; verified using theITU-T G.991.2 Annex A and Annex B standard loops and noise impairments

Line Code Trellis Coded Pulse Amplitude Modulation (TC-PAM)

Line Termination 135 Ω

Return Loss 10 kHz to 20 kHz

20 kHz to 2000 kHz

>12 dB

> 14 dB

LongitudinalBalance

5 kHz to 200 kHz

200 kHz to 500 kHz

500 kHz to 1000 kHz

1000 kHz to 2000 kHz

> 70 dB

> 60 dB

> 55 dB

> 48 dB

Longitudinal OutputVoltage

10 kHz to 20 kHz

20 kHz to 450 kHz

< -50 dBV

< -80 dBV


...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................363-211-585Issue 8, September 2008

9-13

Transmit Power(data mode)

Transmit power is dependent on the payload transmission rate, the type ofPower Spectral Density (PSD), and the Power Backoff (PBO). For PBO =0 dB, transmit power (data mode) is as follows:

Annex A Symmetric,

Annex B Symmetric,

Annex B Symmetric,

192 kbps to 2304 kbps



13.5 0.5 dBm

13.5 0.5 dBm

14.5 0.5 dBm

Power SpectralDensity

Power Spectral Density (PSD) conforms to ITU-T G.991.2 Annex A andAnnex B

Test Access Metallic access to the SHDSL loop


...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

9-14 363-211-585Issue 8, September 2008

Other external transmission interfaces...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

This section lists the technical specifications of other external transmission interfacesof the AnyMedia® Access System.

Station clock interface

Input frequency 2.048 MHz ± 50 ppm according to ITU-T G.703 (2.048-MHzsynchronization interface)

Input impedance 75 Ω for coaxial pair cables

120 Ω for symmetrical pair cables

Peak voltage level 0.75 V0p up to 1.5 V0pfor 75 Ω

1.0 V0p up to 1.9 V0pfor 120 Ω

Return loss ≥ 15 dB at 2.048-MHz

External timed to DOTS E1 interface for LAG System

Input frequency 2.048 Mbps ± 50 ppm according to ITU-T G.703

Input impedance 75 Ω for coaxial pair cables

120 Ω for symmetrical pair cables

Peak voltage level 2.37 V± 0.237 for 75Ω

3.0 V± 0.3for 120Ω

Return loss 0 to 6 dB at 1024 kHz


...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................363-211-585Issue 8, September 2008

9-15

External OAM&P interfaces for narrowband services...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

This section lists the technical specifications of the external OAM&P interfaces of theAnyMedia® Access System. The OAM&P interfaces for narrowband services comprisethe EIA-232C interface, the 10BaseT LAN interface, and the alarm interfaces.

CIT port

Specification According to EIA standard 232C

Maximum data rate 115 kbps

LAN interface

Specification According to IEEE 802.3 10BaseT twisted pair interface,D-Sub connector

Maximum data rate 10 Mbps

Alarm interfaces

Alarm inputs Alarm interface inputs must only be connected to commonground closures which are established inside the same buildingas theAnyMedia® Access System or inside the same cabinet.The alarm interface inputs are designed to operate inunexposed environments only

Electrical safety According to IEC 60950 / EN 60950

Resistibility againstforeign voltages

VAC≤ 230 V, 50 Hz

VDC≤ |75 V|

VAC≤ 105 V, 20 Hz or 25 Hz

Alarm outputs Alarm interface outputs must only be connected to equipmentwhich is installed inside the same building as theAnyMedia®

Access System or inside the same cabinet. The alarm interfaceoutputs are designed to operate in unexposed environmentsonly.

Each alarm output relay provides a two-way contact withneutral position (dry contact closures)

Load condition Only resistive loads allowed

Maximum voltage VDC≤ |75 V|, maximum current IDC≤ 0.1 A

Electrical safety According to IEC 60950 / EN 60950


...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

9-16 363-211-585Issue 8, September 2008

Resistibility againsttransient voltages

V ≤ 230 V, maximum pulse duration≤ 5 ms

I ≤ 0.5 A, maximum pulse duration≤ 10 ms

NOTE: All alarm inputs and outputs are not fuse protected

Remote operations channel (ROC) when using TDM COMDAC

Specification One 64 kbps timeslot in E1 according to ITU-T G.703

Timeslot nailed up in leased line link or semipermanent via V5interface

Used protocol is IP over raw HDLC encapsulation

Maximum data rate 64 kbps in upstream and downstream direction

Technical specifications External OAM&P interfaces for narrowband services

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................363-211-585Issue 8, September 2008

9-17

External OAM&P interfaces for ATM xDSL services...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

This section lists the technical specifications of the external OAM&P interfaces of theAnyMedia® Access System. The OAM&P interfaces for ATM xDSL services comprisethe console port, the 10BaseT port, and the BB ATM Operations Channel.

The AnyMedia® Access System supports SNMP protocol language.

Console port

Specification According to EIA standard 232D

Maximum data rate 28.8 kbps

Local LAN interface

Specification According to IEEE 802.3 10BaseT twisted pair interface(UTP 4/5), RJ45 connector

Maximum data rate 10 Mbps

BB ATM Operations Channel

The BB ATM Operations Channel is provisioned as a permanent virtual connection(PVC) within the ATM feeder. For the settings of the traffic parameters for theconnection see APOG partNarrowband and ATM xDSL services.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

9-18 363-211-585Issue 8, September 2008

Environmental conditions...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

The AnyMedia® Access System is deliverable in different housing configurations tomeet several system configurations for different environments. The housings arequalified in a range from partly temperature controlled environments intelecommunication centres to hostile outdoor environments.

The AnyMedia® Access System is designed to meet the appropriate regulations ofEuropean Telecommunication Standards ETS 300 019-1 (Environmental conditions andenvironmental tests for telecommunications equipment).


...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................363-211-585Issue 8, September 2008

9-19

Environmental classification...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Indoor operation in telecommunication centres

An DC-powered ETSI rack is orderable for partly temperature controlled environmentsin telecommunication centres according to ETS 300 019-1-3, class 3.2 (stationary useat weather protected locations, partly temperature-controlled) but without condensation,icing or biological influence. For the climatogram see“Environmental conditions forstorage, transport and operation” (p. 7-4).

The upper ambient temperature range can be extended up to +55° C using fans, forinformation contact your local customer technical support team.

Indoor operation in partly temperature- controlled environments

For partly controlled environments according to ETS 300 019-1-3, class 3.2 completely(including ordinary storage rooms, entrances and staircases of buildings) where icing,condensation, the attacks of animals, the probability of mould growth or a closeproximity to sand and dust can occur open framework racks may not be used. Forthese locations Indoor cabinets approved by Alcatel-Lucent shall be used. Thesecabinets are equipped with fans and circulate air through shelf or cabinet level filters.The minimum cooling air velocity shall be 400 linear ft/min (about 2 m/s) through theAnyMedia® shelves.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

9-20 363-211-585Issue 8, September 2008

Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC)...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Areas for using telecommunication systems

Two different classes for use are defined with reference to CISPR 22 or EN 55022:

• Class A Device that is intended for use in a commercial, industrial or businessenvironment (applicable forAnyMedia® Access System housed in a rackconfiguration and forAnyMedia® LAG 200 Shelf)

• Class B Device that is intended primarily for use in a domestic environment(applicable forAnyMedia® Access System housed in a cabinet).


...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................363-211-585Issue 8, September 2008

9-21

Resistibility...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Primary protection, for example gas tube arrestors, shall be supported by the networkprovider. Under this assumption theAnyMedia® Access System meets the requirementsof ITU-T K.20.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

9-22 363-211-585Issue 8, September 2008

Standards compliance...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

CE marking

TheAnyMedia® Access System fulfills the requirements of the following Europeandirectives:

• CE EMC Directive 89/336/EEC, modified by 92/31/EEC, 92/263/EEC, 93/68/EEC,and 93/97/EEC

• CE Low Voltage Directive 73/23 EEC

Conformity is indicated by the CE marking affixed to the rack.

Telephony standards compliance

Within the AnyMedia® Access System the following standards are considered:

• International Electrotechnical Commission (IEC)

• International Standards Organization (ISO)

• International Telecommunication Union - Telecommunication Sector (ITU-T)

• Telcordia Technologies Inc.

• European Norm (EN)

• European Telecommunication Standard (ETS)

• Federal Communications Commission (FCC)

• American National Standards Institute (ANSI)

• Underwriter Laboratories (UL)

• Year 2000 compliance

ATM xDSL standards compliance

The AnyMedia® Access System complies with standards from the following sources:

• Telcordia Technologies Inc.

• American National Standards Institute (ANSI)

• Federal Communications Commission (FCC)

• Underwriter Laboratories (UL)

• ATM Forum

• International Telecommunication Union (ITU)

• Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE)

• IETF.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................363-211-585Issue 8, September 2008

9-23

IEC specifications

Within the AnyMedia® Access System the applicable sections of the following IECspecifications are considered:

• IEC 364-3 Electrical installation of buildings. Part 3: Assessment of generalcharacteristics

• ISO/IEC 2749, CD 9241, Ergonomic Requirements for Office Work With VisualDisplay Terminals (VDTs), Parts 8, 10, 14

• IEC 60529 Protection against contact, foreign bodies and water

• IEC 60664-1 Insulation coordination for equipment within low voltage systems -Part 1: Principles, requirements and tests

• IEC 60801 EMC for industrial-process measurement and control equipment

• IEC 60825-1 Safety of laser products Part 1: Equipment classification, requirementsand user’s guide, 11/93

• IEC 60898 Circuit-breakers for overcurrent protection for household and similarinstallations

• IEC 60934 Circuit-breakers for equipment (CBE)

• IEC 60950 Safety of information technology equipment, including electricalbusiness equipment

• IEC 61312-1 Protection against lightning electromagnetic impulse - Part1: Generalprinciples

• IEC 61643-1 Surge protective devices connected to low-voltage power distributionsystems - Part 1: Performance requirements and testing methods.

ISO specifications

Within the AnyMedia® Access System the applicable sections of the following ISOspecifications are considered:

• ISO 8824

• ISO 3309

• ISO/IEC 2749, CD 9241, Ergonomic Requirements for Office Work with VisualDisplay Terminals (VDTs), Parts 8, 10, 14

ITU-T specifications

Within the AnyMedia® Access System the applicable sections of the following ITU-Tspecifications are considered:

• ITU-T G.101 The transmission plan

• ITU-T G.111 Loudness ratings (LR’s) in an international connection

• ITU-T G.120 Transmission characteristics of national networks

• ITU-T G.121 Loudness ratings (LR’s) of national systems

• ITU-T G.122 (Blue Book): Influence of national systems on stability and talkerecho in international connections

Technical specifications Standards compliance

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

9-24 363-211-585Issue 8, September 2008

• ITU-T G.701, Vocabulary of digital transmission and multiplexing, and pulse codemodulation (PCM) terms, Issue 03/93

• ITU-T G.703, Physical/electrical characteristics of hierarchical digital interfaces,Issue Geneva, 1991

• ITU-T G.704, Synchronous frame structures used at 1544, 6312, 2048, 8488 and44736 kbps hierarchical levels, Issue 07/95

• ITU-T G.706, Frame alignment and cyclic redundancy check (CRC) proceduresrelating to basic frame structures defined in recommendation G.704, Issue Geneva,1991

• ITU-T G.711 (Blue Book): Pulse code modulation (PCM) of voice frequencies

• ITU-T G.712 (Blue Book): Transmission performance characteristics of pulse codemodulation channels

• ITU-T G.804, ATM cell mapping into plesiochronous digital hierarchy (PDH),November 1993

• ITU-T G.811, Timing requirements at the outputs of primary reference clockssuitable for plesiochronous operation of international digital links, (Melbourne,1988)

• ITU-T G.813., Timing characteristics of SDH equipment slave clocks (SEC),(08/96)

• ITU-T G.821, Error performance of an international digital connection operating ata bit rate below the primary rate and forming part of an integrated services digitalnetwork

• ITU-T G.822, Controlled slip rate objectives on an international digital connection,(Geneva, 1980; further amended)

• ITU-T G.823, The control of jitter and wander within digital networks which arebased on the 2048 kbps hierarchy, Issue 03/93

• ITU-T G.826, Error performance parameters and objectives for international,constant bit rate digital paths at or above the primary rate, August 1996

• ITU-T G.921, Digital sections based on the 2048 kbps hierarchy, Extract from theBlue Book

• ITU-T G.961, Digital sections and digital line systems, Digital transmission systemon metallic local lines for ISDN basic rate access, March 1993

• ITU-T G.962, Access digital section for ISDN primary rate at 2048 kbps, March1993

• ITU-T G.964, V-Interfaces at the digital local exchange (LE) - V5.1-Interface forthe support of access network (AN), (06/94)

• ITU-T G.965, V-Interfaces at the digital local exchange (LE) - V5.2-Interface forthe support of access network (AN), (03/95)

• ITU-T G.991.2, Single-pair high speed digital subscriber line (SHDSL)transceivers/ Annex B

• ITU-T G.992.1, Transmission systems and media, Asymmetric Digital SubscriberLine (ADSL) Transceivers


...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................363-211-585Issue 8, September 2008

9-25

• ITU-T G.992.2, Transmission systems and media, Splitterless Asymmetric DigitalSubscriber Line (ADSL) Transceivers

• ITU-T G.992.3, Transmission systems and media, Asymmetric Digital SubscriberLine Transceivers2 (ADSL2)

• ITU-T G.992.5, Asymmetric Digital Subscriber Line (ADSL) transceivers –Extended bandwidth ADSL2 (ADSL2+)

• ITU-T G.994.1, June, 1999, Handshake procedures for digital subscriber line (DSLtransceivers

• ITU-T G.996.1, Transmission systems and media, Test Procedure for DigitalSubscriber Lines (DSL) Transceivers

• ITU-T I.361, B-ISDN ATM Layer Specification, November 1995

• ITU-T I.363.1, B-Overall aspects and functions - Protocol layer requirements, ISDNATM Adaptation Layer specification: Type 1 AAL, August 1996

• ITU-T I.431, Primary rate user-network interface - Layer 1 specification, Issue03/93

• ITU-T I.432, B-ISDN User-Network Interface-Physical Layer Specification, March1993

• ITU-T I.610, Maintenance principles, B-ISDN operation and maintenance principlesand functions, Issue 2/99

• ITU-T K.11 Principles of protection against overvoltages and overcurrents

• ITU-T K.17 (Blue Book): Tests on power-fed repeaters using solid state devices inorder to check the arrangements for protection from external interference

• ITU-T K.20 Protection against interference; Resistibility of TelecommunicationSwitching Equipment to overvoltages and overcurrents

• ITU-T K.27 Bonding configurations and earthing inside a telecommunicationbuilding

• ITU-T K.34 Classification of electromagnetic environmental conditions fortelecommunication equipment - fast transient and radio-frequency phenomena

• ITU-T K.41 Protection against interference Resistibility of internal interfaces oftelecommunication centres to surge overvoltages

• ITU-T M.1020 (Blue Book): Characteristics of special quality international leasedcircuits with special bandwidth conditioning

• ITU-T M.1025 Characteristics of special quality international leased circuits withbasic bandwidth conditioning

• ITU-T M.1040 Characteristics of ordinary quality international leased circuits

• ITU-T O.9, Measuring arrangements to assess the degree of unbalance output earth,Issue 1988

• ITU-T Q.23 Technical features of push-button telephone sets

• ITU-T Q.24 Multifrequency push-button signal reception

• ITU-T Q.45 (Blue Book): Transmission characteristics of an analogue internationalexchange

• ITU-T Q.517 (Red Book): Transmission characteristics


...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

9-26 363-211-585Issue 8, September 2008

• ITU-T Q.543: Digital Exchange Design Objectives; March 1993

• ITU-T Q.551 (Blue Book): Transmission characteristics of digital exchanges

• ITU-T Q.552 (Blue Book): Transmission characteristics at 2-wire analogueinterfaces of digital exchanges

• ITU-T Q.921, ISDN user-network interface-data link layer specification, March1993

• ITU-T V.14 Transmission of start-stop characters over synchronous bearer channels

• ITU-T V.35 Data Communication Over The Telephone Network; Modems forsynchronous data transmission using 48-168 kHz group band circuits

• ITU-T V.36 Data Communication Over The Telephone Network; Modems forsynchronous data transmission using 60-108 kHz group band circuits

• ITU-T X.21 Data Communication Network: Interfaces; Interface between dataterminal equipment and data circuit-terminating equipment for synchronousoperation on public data networks

Telecordia Technologies, Inc. specifictions

Within the AnyMedia® Access System the applicable sections of the followingTelcordia specifications are considered:

• TR-NWT-000057, Issue 2,1/93 Functional Criteria for Digital Loop Carrier Systems

• GR-199-CORE, Issue 2, November 1996 Operations Application Messages,Memory Administration Messages

• TR-NWT-000332 Reliability Prediction Procedure for Electronic Equipment

• TR-NWT-000357 Generic Requirements for Assuring the Reliability of ComponentsUsed in Telecommunications Systems

• TR-NWT-000418 Generic Reliability Assurance Requirements for Fiber OpticTransport Systems

• TR-NWT-000499, Issue 5, 13-3, December 1993 Common Requirements/ PowerSystems Interfaces

• TR-NWT 000831 Operations Technology Generic Requirements (OTGR):Operations Application Messages - Language for Operations Application Messages

• TA-NWT-000909 Generic Requirements and Objectives for Fiber in the LoopSystems

• TA-NWT-000942, Hardware Reliability Assurance Program Generic Requirementsfor Telecommunications Products

• GR-253-CORE, Issue 2, December 1995,″Synchronous Optical Network (SONET)Transport Systems: Common Generic Criteria,″ (a module of TSGR, FR-440)


...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................363-211-585Issue 8, September 2008

9-27

ATM Forum

The ATM xDSL feature of theAnyMedia® Access System complies with or is designedto meet the applicable sections of the following ATM Forum specification:

• ATM Forum, ″ATM User-Network Interface (UNI) Specification,″ version 3.1,September, 1994.

• ATM Forum, ″Traffic Management Specification,″ version 4.0, April, 1996.

• ATM Forum, ″Inverse Multiplexing for ATM (IMA) Specification,″ version 1.1,March, 1999.

• ATM Forum, Circuit Emulation Service Interoperability Specification, Version 2.0,af-vtoa-0078.000, January 1997.

EN specifications

Within the AnyMedia® Access System the applicable sections of the following ENspecifications are considered:

• EN 50081-1 Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) - Generic Emission StandardPart 1: Residential, commercial and light industry

• EN 50081-2 Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) - Generic Emission StandardPart 2: Industrial environment

• EN 50082-1 Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) - Generic Immunity StandardPart 1: Residential, commercial and light industry

• EN 50082_2 Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) - Generic Immunity StandardPart 2: Industrial environment

• EN 50272-2 Safety requirements for secondary batteries and battery installations-Part 2: Stationary batteries

• EN 55022 Limits and methods of measurement of radio disturbance characteristicsof information technology equipment (CISPR 22: 1993)

• EN 60950 Safety of information technology equipment, including electricalbusiness equipment, 1995

• EN 61000-3-2 Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) Part 3: Limits, Section2:Limits for harmonic current emissions

• EN 61000-3-3 Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) Part 3: Limits, Section3:Limitation of voltage fluctuations and flicker in low voltage supply systems forequipment with rated current≤ 16A

• EN 61000-4-1 Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) Basic EMC Publication (IEC1000-4-1:1995) Part 4: Testing and measurement techniques Section1: Overview ofimmunity tests. Basic EMC Publication Part 4: Testing and measurement techniquesSection 5: Surges immunity tests

• EN 61000-4-5 Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) Basic EMC Publication (IEC1000-4-5:1995)

• EN 61000-4-12 Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) Basic EMC Publication (IEC1000-4-12:1995) Part 4: Testing and measurement techniques Section12: Oscillatorywaves immunity tests. Basic EMC Publication


...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

9-28 363-211-585Issue 8, September 2008

• EN 61429 Marking of secondary cells and batteries with the international recyclingsymbol ISO 7000-1135

• EN 300 253 Equipment Engineering (EE); Earthing and bonding oftelecommunication equipment in telecommunication centers (1/95)

• EN 300 386 Electro-Magnetic Compatibility and Radio spectrum Matters (ERM);Telecommunication network equipment; Electro-Magnetic Compatibility (EMC)requirements

• EN 300386-2 (Draft) Equipment Engineering (EE); Public telecommunicationnetwork equipment, Electro-Magnetic Compatibility (EMC) requirements, Part 2:Product family standard

ETS specifications

Within the AnyMedia® Access System the applicable sections of the following ETSspecifications are considered:

• ETSI TS 101 135 Transmission and Multiplexing (TM): High bit-rate DigitalSubscriber Line (HDSL) transmission system on metallic local lines; HDSL corespecifications and applications for 2 048 kbps based access digital sections(February 1998)

• ETSI TS 101 388 - V01.01.01 Transmission and Multiplexing (TM); Accesstransmission systems on metallic access cables; Asymmetric Digital Subscriber Line(ADSL) - Coexistence of ADSL and ISDN-BA on the same pair (1998/11)

• ETS 300 010-1 Transmission and Multiplexing (TM); Synchronous cross connectequipment 64 and n×64 kbps cross connection rate 2048 kbps access ports; Part 1:Core functions and characteristics. May 1995

• ETS 300 019 Equipment Engineering (EE); Environmental conditions andenvironmental tests for telecommunications equipment; Part 1-0: Classification ofenvironmental conditions - Introduction (May 1994)

• ETS 300 119-3 Equipment Engineering (EE); European telecommunication standardfor equipment practice; Part 3: Engineering requirements for miscellaneous racksand cabinets (1/94)

• ETS 300 119-4 Equipment Engineering (EE); European telecommunication standardfor equipment practice; Part 4: Engineering requirements for shelves inmiscellaneous racks and cabinets (1/94)

• ETS 300 125 Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN): User-network Interfacedata link layer specification Application of CCITT Recommendations Q.920/I.440and Q.921/I.441 September 1991

• ETS 300 127 Equipment Engineering (EE); Radiated emission testing of physicallylarge telecommunication systems

• ETS 300 132-1 Equipment Engineering Power supply interface at the input totelecommunication equipment Part 1: Operated by alternating current (AC)

• ETS 300 132-2 Equipment Engineering Power supply interface at the input totelecommunication equipment Part 2: Operated by direct current (DC)


...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................363-211-585Issue 8, September 2008

9-29

• ETS 300 166 Transmission and Multiplexing (TM); Physical and electricalcharacteristics of hierarchical digital interfaces for equipment using the 2048 kbps -based plesiochronous or synchronous digital hierarchies, Issue August 1993

• ETS 300 167 Transmission and Multiplexing (TM); Functional characteristics of2048 kbps interfaces, Issue August 1993

• ETS 300 324-1 Signalling Protocols and Switching (SPS); V interfaces at thedigital Local Exchange (LE), V5.1 interface for the support of Access Network(AN), Part1: V5.1 interface specification, February 1994

• ETS 300 324-1 Signalling Protocols and Switching (SPS); V interfaces at thedigital Local Exchange (LE), V5.1 interface for the support of Access Network(AN), Part1: V5.1 interface specification, V2.1.1, April 2000

• ETS 300 324-1/A1 Signalling Protocols and Switching (SPS); V interfaces at thedigital Local Exchange (LE), V5.1 interface for the support of Access Network(AN), Part1: V5.1 interface specification, January 1996

• ETSI ETS 300 233 Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN): Access digitalsection for ISDN primary rate (May 1994)

• ETS 300 347-1 Signalling Protocols and Switching (SPS); V interfaces at thedigital Local Exchange (LE), V5.2 interface for the support of Access Network(AN), Part1: V5.2 interface specification, September 1994

• ETS 300 347-1 Signalling Protocols and Switching (SPS); V interfaces at thedigital Local Exchange (LE), V5.2 interface for the support of Access Network(AN), Part1: V5.2 interface specification, V2.2.2, December 1999

• ETS 300 347-1/A1 Signalling Protocols and Switching (SPS); V interfaces at thedigital Local Exchange (LE), V5.2 interface for the support of Access Network(AN), Part1: V5.2 interface specification, May 1997

• ETS 300 376-1 Q3 Interface at the Access Network (AN) for configurationmanagement of V5 interfaces and associated user ports

• ETS 300 377-1 Q3 Interface at the Local Exchange (LE) for configurationmanagement of V5 interfaces and associated customer profiles

• ETS 300 386-1 Equipment Engineering (EE); Public telecommunication networkequipment, Electro-Magnetic Compatibility (EMC) requirements, Part 1: Productfamily overview, compliance criteria and test levels (12/94)

• ETS 300 386-2-1 Equipment Engineering (EE) Public telecommunication networkequipment Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) requirements; Part 2: Productspecific compliance criteria and operating conditions; Subpart 1: Switchingequipment

• ETS 300 386-2-3 Equipment Engineering (EE); Public telecommunication networkequipment, Electro-Magnetic Compatibility (EMC) requirements, Part 2-3: Productspecific compliance criteria and operation conditions- Power supply equipment

• ETS 300 418 Business TeleCommunications (BTC); 2048 kbps digital unstructuredand structured leased lines (2048U and D2048S); Network interface presentation

• ETS 300 648 Public Switched Telephone Network (PSTN); Calling LineIdentification Presentation (CLIP) supplementary service; Service description


...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

9-30 363-211-585Issue 8, September 2008

• ETS 300 795, (DE/SPS-03027) Local Exchange (LE) and Access Network (AN);Performance design objectives for call handling and bearer connectionmanagement; May 1998

• ETR 080 Transmission and Multiplexing (TM); Integrated Services Digital Network(ISDN) basic rate access Digital transmission system on metallic local lines, (1993)

• ETR 283 Equipment Engineering (EE); Transient voltages at Interface A ontelecommunications direct current (dc) power distributions, May 1996

• ETR 328 Transmission and Multiplexing (TM); Asymmetric Digital SubscriberLine (ADSL); Requirements and performance, November 1996

FCC specifications

Within the AnyMedia® Access System the applicable sections of the following FCCspecifications are considered:

• FCC Part 68 compliance as CPE

• FCC Class A EMC

• FCC Rules and Regulations, Part 15, Radio frequency devices, Sections 15.105 and15.109

ANSI specifications

Within the AnyMedia® Access System the applicable sections of the following ANSIspecifications are considered:

• ANSI/IEEE Std. 802.3 Carrier Sense Multiple Access with Collision Detection(CSMA/CD) Access Method and Physical Layer Specifications

• ANSI T1.413-1998 Network and Customer Installation Interfaces - AsymmetricDigital Subscriber Line (ADSL) Metallic Interface

UL specification

Within the AnyMedia® Access System the applicable sections of the following ULspecification are considered:

• Standards for Telephone Equipment, Underwriters Laboratories 1459, October 1,1990

IETF

The following IETF MIBs are supported by the data feature ofAnyMedia® AccessSystem:

• IETF RFC-1573 (Interface MIB)

• IETF RFC-2233 (Interfaces Group MIB)

• IETF RFC 1213, Management Information Base for Network Management ofTCP/IP-based internets: MIB-II. K. McCloghrie, M.T. Rose. Mar-01-1991

• IETF RFC-2514, Definitions of Textual Conventions and OBJECT-IDENTITIES forATM Management


...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................363-211-585Issue 8, September 2008

9-31

• IETF RFC-2515, Definitions of Managed Objects for ATM Management (ATMMIB)

• IETF RFC-1407 (DS3/E3 MIB)

Year 2000 compliance

Within the AnyMedia® Access System the applicable sections of the followingspecification concerning the Year 2000 compliance are considered:

• Telcordia GR-2945


...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

9-32 363-211-585Issue 8, September 2008

10 10Safety

Overview...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Purpose

This chapter contains European conformity statements and safety instructions Moreoverit shows the appearance of safety instructions and provides information on electrostaticdischarge.

Contents

Structure of hazard statements 10-2

General safety information 10-4

Appearance of the safety instructions 10-7

Relevant safety instructions 10-9

Electrostatic discharge considerations 10-11

Laser safety guidelines 10-13

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................363-211-585Issue 8, September 2008

10-1

Structure of hazard statements...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Overview

Hazard statements describe the safety risks relevant while performing tasks onAlcatel-Lucent products during deployment and/or use. Failure to avoid the hazardsmay have serious consequences.

General structure

Hazard statements include the following structural elements:

Item Structure element Purpose

1 Personal-injury symbol Indicates the potential for personal injury(optional)

2 Hazard-type symbol Indicates hazard type (optional)

3 Signal word Indicates the severity of the hazard

4 Hazard type Describes the source of the risk of damage orinjury

5 Damage statement Consequences if protective measures fail

6 Avoidance message Protective measures to take to avoid the hazard

7 Identifier The reference ID of the hazard statement(optional)

Safety

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

10-2 363-211-585Issue 8, September 2008

Signal words

The signal words identify the hazard severity levels as follows:

Signal word Meaning

DANGER Indicates an imminently hazardous situation (high risk) which, ifnot avoided, will result in death or serious injury.

WARNING Indicates a potentially hazardous situation (medium risk) which,if not avoided, could result in death or serious injury.

CAUTION When used with the personal injury symbol:

Indicates a potentially hazardous situation (low risk) which, ifnot avoided, may result in personal injury.

When used without the personal injury symbol:

Indicates a potentially hazardous situation (low risk) which, ifnot avoided, may result in property damage, such as serviceinterruption or damage to equipment or other materials.

Safety Structure of hazard statements

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................363-211-585Issue 8, September 2008

10-3

General safety information...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Overview

This section lists the safety information needed for theAnyMedia® Access System forsystem turn-up after installation has been completed, operating, provisioning andmaintaining the system.

Make sure that you read this section carefully and that you understand all the safetyinformation in this section. The safety information in this section includes:

• Important general safety instructions

• Appearance and classification of safety instructions

• Understanding electrostatic discharge (ESD) and avoiding damage from ESD

• Lightwave safety

• Special safety instructions for handling batteries.

Important! If you do not understand any of the safety information in this section,please see your manager immediately. You should also talk with your manager ifyou feel you do not understand any procedures in this manual, or if you feel youneed additional training before performing any of these procedures.

Not only the general instructions in this chapter on safety must be observed, but alsothe specific safety instructions in the individual chapters.

Only trained service personnel should perform the procedures in this document. Theseprocedures allow exposure to high electrical energy and/or current that may result inelectric shock and/or injury to untrained personnel during servicing, maintenance, andinstallation of this system.

All safety instructions have a uniform appearance. This appearance is described indetail in “Appearance of the safety instructions” (p. 10-7).

Important! TheAnyMedia® Access System must be supplied with SafetyExtra-Low Voltage (SELV) of –48 V and the positive terminal of this source mustbe correctly connected to the protective earth. Never connect to supply voltage of–60 V, which will destroy the equipment.

General notes on safety

This system has been developed in line with the present state-of-the-art and fulfils thecurrent national and international safety requirements. It is provided with a high degreeof operational safety resulting from many years of development experience andcontinuous stringent quality checks in our company.

Safety

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

10-4 363-211-585Issue 8, September 2008

The system is safe in normal operation. There are, however, some potential sources ofdanger that cannot be completely eliminated. In particular, these arise during the

• Opening of housings or equipment covers

• Manipulation of any kind within the equipment, even if it has been disconnectedfrom the power supply

• Disconnection of optical or electrical connections

through possible contact with

• Live parts

• Laser light

• Hot surfaces

• Sharp edges, or

• Devices sensitive to electrostatic discharge.

General safety requirements

In order to keep the technically unavoidable residual risk to a minimum, it isimperative to observe the following rules:

• Installation, configuration and disassembly must be carried out only by expertpersonnel and with reference to the respective documentation.Due to the complexity of the unit/system, the personnel requires special training.

• The unit/system must be operated by expert and authorized users only.The user must operate the unit/system only after having read and understood thechapter on safety and the parts of the documentation relevant to operation. Forcomplex systems, additional training is recommended. Any obligatory training foroperating and service personnel must be carried out and documented.

• Any conversions or changes to the system or parts of the system (including thesoftware) must be carried out by qualified Alcatel-Lucent personnel or by expertpersonnel authorized by Alcatel-Lucent.All changes carried out by other persons lead to a complete exemption fromliability.No components/spare parts must be used other than those recommended by themanufacturer and those listed in the procurement documents.

• The unit/system must not be operated unless it is in perfect working order.Any faults and errors that might affect safety must be reported immediately by theuser to a person in responsibility.

• The equipment must be supplied with Safety Extra-Low Voltage (SELV) of -48 Vand the positive terminal of this source must be correctly connected to theprotective earth.Never connect to –60 V.

• The unit/system must be operated only with the connections and under theenvironmental conditions as described in the documentation.

Safety General safety information

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................363-211-585Issue 8, September 2008

10-5

• The removal or disabling of safety facilities, the clearing of faults and errors, andthe maintenance of the equipment must be carried out by specially qualifiedpersonnel only.The respective parts of the documentation must be strictly observed.The documentation must also be consulted during the selection of measuring andtest equipment.

• Transport, storage and operation of the unit/system must be under the permissibleconditions only.See accompanying documentation and information on the unit/system.

• Calibrations, special tests after repairs and regular safety checks must be carriedout, documented and archived.

• Only use tested and virus-free diskettes.

• Do not place the shelves on an unstable cart, stand, or table.The product may fall causing serious damage to the equipment.

• Never push objects of any kind into this product through cabinet slots as they maytouch dangerous voltage points or short out parts that could result in a risk of fireor electrical shock. Never spill liquid of any kind on the product.

Safety General safety information

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

10-6 363-211-585Issue 8, September 2008

Appearance of the safety instructions...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Overview

All safety instructions have a uniform appearance. They include a signal word thatclassifies the danger and a text block that contains descriptions of the type and causeof the danger, the consequences of ignoring the safety instruction and the measures thatcan be taken to minimize the danger. In some safety instructions, a warning symbol isplaced underneath the signal word.

Example:

DANGER

Arcing on removing or inserting a live power supply plug.

Arcing can cause serious burns to the hands and damage to the eyes.

Ensure that the line circuit-breaker on the fuse panel is in the “OFF” position beforeremoving or inserting the power supply plug

Warning symbols

The following warning symbols are used:

Symbol Common application

General warning about a danger

Warning about a dangerous electrical voltage

Warning about laser radiation

Warning about explosion

Warning about battery acid

Warning about devices sensitive to electrostatic dis-charge (ESD)

Safety

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................363-211-585Issue 8, September 2008

10-7

The safety instructions for the classes “Danger”, “Warning” and “Caution” always havea warning symbol, the “Important” and “Notice” safety instructions can, but do notalways have a warning symbol.

This document may contain safety labels such as WARNING, CAUTION,IMPORTANT, and NOTICE.

Special safety instructions

The aspects of “handling of components sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD)” and“laser safety” are of vital importance for equipment in theAnyMedia® Access System.The key safety instructions for these subjects are summarized in“Electrostaticdischarge considerations” (p. 10-11).

Safety Appearance of the safety instructions

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

10-8 363-211-585Issue 8, September 2008

Relevant safety instructions...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

WARNING: Risk of injury due to untrained personnelOnly trained service personnel should perform the procedures in this document.These procedures allow exposure to high electrical energy and/ or current thatmay result in electric shock and/or injury to untrained personnel during servicing,maintenance, and installation of this system. Do not allow non-service person-nel to access electrical wiring.Read and understand all instructions and warning labels.Follow all warnings and instructions marked on the product and in the manu-als.

DANGER: Injury to eyes caused by invisible laser radiation.AnyMedia Access System systems operate with invisible laser radiation. Laserradiation can cause considerable injuries to the eyes.Never look into the end of an exposed fibre or pack optical connectors as long asthe optical source is switched on. This applies particularly to the connections ofthe optical packs of the WaveStar ADM 4/1.Always observe the laser warning instructions.

DANGER: Arcing on removing or inserting a live power supply plug or the powerfilter unit (PFU).Arcing can cause burns to the hands and damage to the eyes.Ensure that the DC circuit-breaker on the fuse panel is in the "OFF" position be-fore removing or inserting the power supply plug or power filter unit.

CAUTION: Risk of injury, if only one −48 V DC power feeder is disconnected.The AnyMedia shelf maybe equipped with two −48 V DC input power feeders.Disconnecting one power feeder will not de-energize the AnyMedia shelf.Disconnect both power supply cables when removing power from the AnyMediashelf.

IMPORTANT: Destruction of packs in the event of a short-circuit.A short-circuit in the AnyMedia Access System can cause destruction of elec-tronic components and thus malfunctioning of the complete system.You must therefore not handle objects such as a screwdriver in the pack area.Never push objects of any kind into this product through slots as they may touchdangerous voltage points or cause a short-circuit.

IMPORTANT: Destruction of components by incorrect handling.Before replacing a pack, check the identification code to ensure that the properpack is being used.

Safety

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................363-211-585Issue 8, September 2008

10-9

CAUTION: Destruction of LEDs by improper handling of packsTake care to avoid damaging the LED(s) that protrude through the openings in thefaceplate of the packs during handling and pack installation.When installing a pack, place your thumbs on the rounded indentations of thelatch to lock the pack in position. Do not use your palm because your hand mayslip and break LEDs that protrude through the openings of the faceplate

Safety Relevant safety instructions

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

10-10 363-211-585Issue 8, September 2008

Electrostatic discharge considerations...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

General notes on ESD

Electrostatic discharge (ESD), for example caused by touching with the hand, candestroy semiconductor components. The correct operation of the complete system isthen no longer assured.

All semiconductor components are basically sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD).The electrostatic discharge can also affect the components indirectly via contacts orconductor tracks.

Plug-in units containing components that are especially sensitive to electrostaticdischarge are identified by warning labels bearing the barred-hand symbol.

Warning symbol:

CAUTION

ESD hazard

Warning about devices sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD).

Electronic components can be destroyed by electrostatic discharge.

To avoid electrostatic discharge conductively connected wrist straps connect to thecabinet ESP bonding point should be used.

Important! Destruction of components by electrostatic discharge.

Electronic components can be destroyed by electrostatic discharge. An electrostaticdischarge wrist strap, with a resistance between 250 kΩ and 1.5 MΩ, should beworn when handlingAnyMedia® Access Systemplug-ins to prevent possibledamage to the plug-ins. Before using the wrist strap, check the wrist strap forshorts, opens, and proper resistance value. Do not use a wrist strap that does notpass these checks.

Hold plug-in units only at the edges or on the insertion and removal facilities.

Always observe the ESD instructions.

Precautions

The following list of precautions should be observed when handling circuit packs toprevent damage by electrostatic discharge (ESD):

• Assume all circuit packs contain solid state electronic components that can bedamaged by ESD.

• Work in an area which is protected against electrostatic discharge. Use conductingfloor and bench mats which are conductively connected to the rack ESD bondingpoint.

• Wear conductively connected wrist straps and connect them to the rack ESDbonding point.

Safety

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................363-211-585Issue 8, September 2008

10-11

• Handle all circuit packs by the faceplate or latch and by the top and bottomoutermost edges. Never touch the components, conductors, or connector pins.

• Observe warning labels on bags and cartons. Whenever possible, do not removecircuit packs from antistatic packaging until ready to insert them into slots.

• If possible, open all circuit packs at a static-safe work position, using properlygrounded wrist straps and static-dissipating table mats. If a static-dissipating tablemat is used, be sure that it is clean to ensure a good discharge path.

• Always store and transport circuit packs in static-safe packaging. Shielding is notrequired unless specified.

• Ensure that the rack is grounded.

• Keep all static-generating materials such as food wrappers, plastics, and foampackaging away from all circuit packs. On removal from the shelf, immediately putcircuit packs into static-safe packages.

• Whenever possible, maintain relative humidity above 20 percent.

ESD wrist strap

To reduce the possibility of ESD damage, the shelves and the racks are equipped witha grounding jack to enable personnel to ground themselves using wrist straps with aminimum resistance of 250 kΩ while handling circuit packs or working on ashelf/shelves. The jacks are located on the left and right of the rack and are accessiblefrom the front. When grounding jacks are not provided, an alligator clip adapterenables connection to rack’s frame ground (FRMGND).

Conductively connect all test equipment and trolleys to the rack ESD bonding point.

e12:/7W-21610.dia/fig_20.cdr

ToGroundConnection

Safety Electrostatic discharge considerations

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

10-12 363-211-585Issue 8, September 2008

Laser safety guidelines...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Laser safety

In its normal operating mode, a lightwave system is totally enclosed and presents norisk of eye injury. It is a Laser Class 1/I product under the IEC schemes.

The lightguide cables that interconnect various components of a lightwave system canbe disconnected or break, and may expose people to lightwave emission. Also, certainmeasures and service procedures may expose the technician to emission from the lasercircuit pack during installation and servicing.

Observe the following instructions to avoid exposing yourself and others to risk:

• Don’t look into the end of an exposed fibre or an open connector as long as theoptical source is still switched on. Even for Class 1 lasers viewing with the unaidedeye at distances greater than 250 mm (≈10 inches) will normally not cause eyeinjury.

• Under no circumstances lightwave/lightguide operations shall be performed by atechnician before satisfactorily completing an approved training course. Onlyauthorized, trained personnel shall be permitted to carry out service, maintenanceand restoration activities.

• Read the relevant descriptions in the manuals before taking equipment intooperation or carrying out any installation and maintenance work on the opticalpacks, and follow the instructions. Ignoring the instructions can result in exposureto dangerous radiation.

• If you are not sure that the fiber is connected to a Laser Class I product ensure thatthe optical source is switched off before disconnecting optical fiber connectors.

• Under no circumstances shall any personnel scan a fiber with an optical test setwithout verifying that all lightwave sources on the fiber are turned off or that thetest set is specially approved for this test.

• In the event of doubt, check that the optical source is switched off by measuringwith an optical power meter.

Warning symbol:

CAUTION

Components with lasers and fibers

Although, at present, the transmitting power levels for Laser Class 1 are below thoseknown to cause injury to the eye at distances greater than 250 mm ( ~10 inches) directexposure should always be avoided.

Always observe the laser warning instructions (see instructions below)

Safety

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................363-211-585Issue 8, September 2008

10-13

Classification of lasers

The laser classes are defined in standards such as EC 60825 (or EN 60825) and itssupplements. A maximum laser radiation is defined for each laser class according tothe wavelength. The maximum laser radiation depends on the type of laser diode used.This results in different laser classes for the various optical plug-in units.

These standards require manufacturers to classify their laser products as belonging toone of the major classes, classes 1, 2, 3A, and 3B. Manufacturers of lasers and laserproducts in the U.S. are regulated by the Food and Drug Administration’s Center forDevices and Radiological Health FDA/CDRH) under 21 CFR 1040. Classificationschemes are similar to the IEC with categories such as class I, II, lla, IlIa or lllb. Inboth cases, laser products are classified according to the accessible emission levels andtheir potential for causing injury.

Laser classes to IEC 60825 and DIN/EN 60825

Laser class Wavelength Max. laser radiation

Class 1 1300 nm 8.85 mW

Class 1 1550 nm 10 mW

Class 3A 1300 nm 31 mW

Class 3A 1550 nm 50 mW

Class k x 3A 1300 nm 81 mW

Class k x 3A 1550 nm 50 mW

Class 3B 1300 nm 0.5 mW

Class 3B 1550 nm 0.5 mW

Optical transmission systems are identified by yellow laser warning labels on whichonly the laser class (see the labels below ) is indicated.

Lightwave systems are generally classified as class 1/I, because, under normaloperating conditions, all energized laser transmitting circuit packs are terminated onoptical fibers which enclose the laser energy with the fiber sheath forming a protectivehousing. Also, covers are typically in place over the circuit pack shelves.

The label shown below is used to identify systems belonging to laser class 1 in normaloperation.

Laser warning labels for Class 1 lasers

LASER PRODUCT

CLASS 1

Safety Laser safety guidelines

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

10-14 363-211-585Issue 8, September 2008

Appropriate labels are also available for the remaining laser classes (k x 3A, 3B); eachlabel indicates the laser class, wavelength and maximum laser radiation. These labelsare affixed in a clearly visible position on the equipment.

The following laser warning symbols can be affixed to the optical packs. The opticalconnectors from which laser radiation can be emitted can be identified by a laserwarning symbol near the connector:

Due to lack of space, laser warning labels cannot be affixed to the potential source oflaser radiation, that is, directly to the optical connectors.

Handling fibers

Never look into the end of an exposed fiber or optical connector of a pack as long asthe optical source is switched on. Always observe the laser warning instructions.

Splicing

Cutting and splicing fibers must be followed and performed by trained personnel only.Read and understand all instructions of the manual of the splicing and cuttingequipment.

After cutting/splicing, every splice has to be checked. Follow the instructions of themanual of the splicing and cutting equipment.

Routing and connecting

During installation of fibers the optical connectors of fibers must be equipped with aprotective cap until the connectors are coupled.

The fibers should by guided to the optical packs using the special protective spiralwrap of the pigtail.

If the fiber is routed from bottom to an optical connector take care if the fiber has tobe disconnected so that the fiber will not hang out of the shelf and can be bent orbroken.

CLASS 1LASER PRODUCT


...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................363-211-585Issue 8, September 2008

10-15

Optical cable break

There is a risk to cause microdefects in the fiber or a risk of a cable break if thebending radius of optical fiber cables is less than about 30 mm. Microdefects canincrease the fiber attenuation and reduce the long term stability. Ensure that thebending radius is not less than 30 mm.

Cleaning optical connectors and couplings

Cleaning optical connectors is required only if problems have occurred which indicatethat these connectors have an impurity (for example deviation of attenuation valuesbeyond the permitted maximum).

Checking fiber connectors

Before starting to clean the optical connectors, ensure that the optical source isswitched off. Never look into the end of an exposed fiber or optical connector of apack as long as the optical source is switched on. Always observe the laser warninginstructions.

To check for impurities (for example fluff, dust particles, ...), use a microscope with anenlargement factor of 40, so that the connector face can be inspected.

Checking optical couplers

Visually check the coupling for residual impurities by holding it to the light (thegeometry of the coupling does not allow the coupling to be checked under themicroscope). After cleaning with a pipe cleaner do not connect the opticalconnectors/couplings without checking them for impurities.

Use isopropanol for cleaning. Let the connector/coupling face air-dry or use purifiedcompressed air (the isopropanol must evaporate completely!).


...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

10-16 363-211-585Issue 8, September 2008

Appendix A: Product Support

Overview...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Purpose

This section provides the training and product support services associated withAlcatel-LucentAnyMedia® Access System.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................363-211-585Issue 8, September 2008

A-1

Training...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

How to get information

Consult your local Alcatel-Lucent Account Executive for more information.

Courses

The following training courses are available:

Course Title Course Number

AnyMedia® Access System Overview TR6050

AnyMedia® Access System ApplicationPlanning and Ordering

TR6051

AnyMedia® Access System LocalMaintenance

TR6052

AnyMedia® Access System LocalOperations and Provisioning

TR6053

Navis™ AnyMedia® Element ManagementSystem Operations and Maintenance

TR6054

Navis™ AnyMedia® Element ManagementSystem Advanced Maintenance

TR6055

Navis™ AnyMedia® Element ManagementSystem Administration

TR6056

Cabinet Power System (CPS) 2000 PWR3003-I/M

WaveStar® ADM 4/1 TR5881

Product Support

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

A-2 363-211-585Issue 8, September 2008

Engineering and Installation Services...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Overview

The Alcatel-Lucent Customer Operations and Program Management (COPM)organization is committed to providing customers with quality product support services.Whether you need assistance in engineering, installation, normal system maintenance,or disaster recovery, the support staff provides the quality technical support you needto get your job done. Each segment of the COPM organization regards the customer astheir highest priority and understands your obligation to maintain quality service foryour customer.

Please contact your local Account Executive for more information on these services.

Engineering and installation services group

Within the COPM organization, the Engineering and Installation Services groupprovides a highly skilled force of support personnel to provide customers with qualityengineering and installation services. These engineering and installation specialists usestate-of-the-art technology, equipment, and procedures to provide customers withhighly competent, rapid response services. These services include analyzing yourequipment request, preparing a detailed specification for installation, creating andmaintaining job records, installing the equipment, and testing and turning over aworking system.

The Engineering and Installation Services group provides the customer with anindividually tailored, quality-tested job that meets our published high standards and thecustomer’s operational requirements. The group ensures that the customer’s systemorder is integrated into a complete working system tailored to office conditions andpreferences. It includes provision for cabling, lighting, power equipment, and ancillaryconnections to local and/or remote alarm systems. The group responds to any customerchanges that occur during installation.

Testing

Equipment engineered and installed by Alcatel-Lucent is thoroughly tested andintegrated into a reliable system at cut-over. Once approved by Alcatel-Lucent’ QualityAssurance Test group, the system is turned over to your company.

The Quality and Assurance Test Group also provides any specialized engineering andinstallation services required for unusual or highly individualized applications. Thesespecialized services may include engineering consultations and database preparation.Your local Account Executive can provide more information about these services.

Product Support

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................363-211-585Issue 8, September 2008

A-3

Technical support...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Overview

This section describes the technical support available for

• AnyMedia® Access System indoor/outdoor applications

• AnyMedia® LAG System

• Navis™ AnyMedia® Element Management System.

Services

AnyMedia® service is complemented by a full range of services available to supportplanning, maintaining and operating your system. Applications testing, networkintegration, and upgrade conversion support is available.

Technical support groups

TSS is the Alcatel-Lucent business that provides ongoing operations and maintenanceservices for installed products and networks. The focus is Maintenance services for allAlcatel-Lucent products:

• Remote Technical Support Service (RTS)Telephone and Web-based access to remote engineers and tools for productinformation, network diagnostics, and trouble resolution and restoration for allAlcatel-Lucent products.

• RTS AdvantageCombines RTS for day-to-day support with software upgrade support to help ensureyour customer’s Alcatel-Lucent Data products (RTS Advantage NE/EMS)andsoftware-only products (RTS Advantage OSS/NMS) effectively sustain theirnetwork.

• Repair and Exchange Services (RES)Advanced Exchange or Return for Repair services for defective hardware,eliminating the need for the customer to purchase and maintain a costly sparesinventory

• On-site Technical Support (OTS)Network trouble resolution and restoration, at the customer’s location, for allAlcatel-Lucent products and select OEM equipment.

Contacting your Alcatel-Lucent support

• For Europe call the International Customer Management Center (ICMC): +3531692 4579 or call the toll free number: 00 800 00 58 2368

• For Asia Pacific, Caribbean and Latin America Region, Saudi Arabia, Middle Eastand Africa call the local Alcatel-Lucent Customer Technical Support Team.

Product Support

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................


Customer Assistance Requests Entry System (CARES)...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Introduction

The customer assistance requests entry system (CARES) software tool is designed toassist Alcatel-Lucent in providing quality service to our customers for a variety ofproducts. Customers can use the tool to communicate with the technical supportgroups. Support groups use CARES to track action requests (ARs) and keep themup-to-date.

Action request forms may be obtained from

• Designated local area coordinators

• Alcatel-Lucent account representatives.

CARES applications

The CARES tool allows customers to process action request information. The CARESapplication is the customer’s primary interface to Alcatel-Lucent’ support structure.Using this application, users input their varied assistance requests, including, but notlimited to:

• Product problems

• Engineering complaints

• Procedural assistance

• Installation assistance

• Dispatching.

The following assignment is to be considered in order to guarantee that the ARs aresent to the correct assignee:

ARs related to Assigned Group

AnyMedia® Access System Germany SAS Customer Technical Support

Navis™ AnyMedia® ElementManagement System (NB&BB)

SAS R&D ACCESS Spain

Support labs

For technical support, call the Local Customer Support (LCS) of Alcatel-Lucent. If noLCS is available call the Alcatel-Lucent Customer Technical Support (CTS)organization at Phone +49-911-526-3849

The Alcatel-Lucent Customer Technical Support (CTS) organization has the CustomerAdvocate System Test Lab (CASTL) in place to aid in support of the customer. Thevarious functions performed in the support lab are as follows:

• Duplication of customer-reported problems to assist in problem resolution

• Service restoration of equipment

Product Support

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................363-211-585Issue 8, September 2008

A-5

• Systems test

• Customer demonstrations

• Ensuring field-grade quality software

• Certifying product changes

• Fault mode analysis

• Providing customized training for customer and support teams

• Developing installation procedures

• Developing modification procedures

• Initial customer laboratory evaluations (ICLEs).

Product Support Customer Assistance Requests Entry System (CARES)

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................


Appendix B: Product conformance

Overview...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Purpose

This section provides the European conformity (CE) statements and theeco-environmental statements that apply to theAnyMedia® Access System.

Note that in regions such as the European Union, the statements that are required aredetermined primarily by national or multi-national regulations. However, in someregions, contact terms determine which statements are required.

The presence of the statement indicates that the product does comply with thatstatement wherever it is required to do so.

Contents

European conformity (CE) statements B-2

Eco-environmental statements B-5

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................363-211-585Issue 8, September 2008

B-1

European conformity (CE) statements...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Overview

The statements that follow are the European conformity (CE) statements that apply tothe AnyMedia® Access System.

Informal compliance statement

Language Statement

English Hereby, Alcatel-Lucent declares that thisequipment is in compliance with theessential requirements and other relevantprovisions of Directive 89/336/EEC and73/23/EEC.

Suomi Alcatel-Lucent vakuuttaa täten, että laite,jonka dokumentaatio on tässä julkaisussa,on direktiivin 89/336/ETY, 73/23/ETYoleellisten vaatimusten ja tämändirektiivin muiden ehtojen mukainen.

Nederlands Hierbij verklaart Alcatel-Lucent dat de indeze publicatie beschreven apparatuur inovereenstemming is met de essentiëleeisen en de andere relevante bepalingenvan Richtlijn 89/336/EEG, 73/23/EEG.

Français Par la présente, Alcatel-Lucent déclare quel’appareil décrit dans cette publication estconforme aux exigences essentielles et auxautres dispositions pertinentes de ladirective 89/336/CEE, 73/23/CEE.

Svenska Härmed intygar Alcatel-Lucent att denutrustning som behandlas i dennadokumentation står i överensstämmelsemed de väsentliga egenskapskraven ochövriga relevanta bestämmelser i direktiv89/336/EEG, 73/23/EEG.

Dansk Alcatel-Lucent erklærer herved, at detudstyr, der er dokumenteret i dennepublikation, overholder de grundlæggendekrav og øvrige relevante forskrifter iEuropa-Parlamentets og Rådets direktiv89/336/EOEF, 73/23/EOEF.

Product conformance

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

B-2 363-211-585Issue 8, September 2008

Language Statement

Deutsch Hiermit erklärt Alcatel-Lucent dieÜbereinstimmung des in dieserPublikation dokumentierten Gerätes mitden grundlegenden Anforderungen undden anderen relevanten Festlegungen derRichtlinie 89/336/EWG und 73/23/EWG.

Ελληνικα ΜΕ ΤΗΝ ΠΑΡΟΥΣΑ Alcatel-Lucent∆ΗΛΩΝΕΙ ΟΤΙ ΣΥΜΜΟΡΦΩΝΕΤΑΙΠΡΟΣ ΤΙΣ ΟΥΣΙΩ∆ΕΙΣ ΑΠΑΙΤΗΣΕΙΣΚΑΙ ΤΙΣ ΛΟΙΠΕΣ ΣΧΕΤΙΚΕΣ∆ΙΑΤΑΞΕΙΣ ΤΗΣ Ο∆ΗΓΙΑΣ 89/336/EOK,73/23/EOK.

Italiano La Alcatel-Lucent dichiara che leapparecchiature descritte nella presentepubblicazione sono conformi ai requisiti ealle indicazioni contenute nella direttiva89/336/CEE, 73/23/CEE.

Español Por la presente, Alcatel-Lucent declaraque el equipo descrito en esta publicacióncumple los requisitos básicos y demásdisposiciones pertinentes de la Directiva89/336/CEE, 73/23/CEE.

Português A Alcatel-Lucent declara por este meioque todo o equipamento documentadonesta publicação se encontra emconformidade com os requisitos essenciaise outras condições relevantes da Directiva89/336/CEE, 73/23/CEE.

Declaration of conformity

Hereby, Alcatel-Lucent declares that this equipment is in compliance with the essentialrequirements and other relevant provisions of the following Directive:

• Council Directive 89/336/EEC and 73/23/EEC, as amended by Directive93/68/EEC, on the approximation of the laws of the Member States relating toelectromagnetic compatibility and electrical equipment designed for use withincertain voltage limits.

This equipment is tested and conforms with the essential requirements for protection ofhealth and the safety of the user and any other person and electromagneticcompatibility.

Conformity is indicated by the CE marking affixed to the product. For moreinformation regarding CE marking and Declaration of Conformity (DoC), pleasecontact your local Alcatel-Lucent customer service organization.

Product conformance European conformity (CE) statements

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................363-211-585Issue 8, September 2008

B-3

Intended use

This equipment shall be used only in accordance with its intended use, according to theinstallation and maintenance instructions contained in this documentation. Any otheruse or modification is prohibited.

For further restrictions that apply in some regions and/or countries, please contact yourlocal Alcatel-Lucent representative.

Technical documentation

The technical documentation required by the Conformity Assessment procedure is keptat the Alcatel-Lucent location which is responsible for this product. For moreinformation, please contact your local Alcatel-Lucent representative.

Product conformance European conformity (CE) statements

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................


Eco-environmental statements...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Overview

The statements that follow are the eco-environmental statements that apply to theAnyMedia® Access System.

Packaging collection and recovery requirements

Countries, states, localities, or other jurisdictions may require that systems beestablished for the return and/or collection of packaging waste from the consumer, orother end user, or from the waste stream. Additionally, reuse, recovery, and/or recyclingtargets for the return and/or collection of the packaging waste may be established.

For more information regarding collection and recovery of packaging and packagingwaste within specific jurisdictions, please contact the Alcatel-Lucent Services -Environmental Health and Safety organization.

For installations not performed by Alcatel-Lucent, please contact the Alcatel-LucentCustomer Support Center at:

Technical Support Services

Alcatel-Lucent

Within the United States: 1 866 LUCENT8 (866 582 3688), prompt 1

From all other countries: +1 630 224 4672, prompt 2

Recycling / take-back / disposal of products and batteries

Electronic products and batteries bearing or referencing the symbols shown below shallbe collected and treated at the end of their useful life, in compliance with applicableEuropean Union and other local legislation. They shall not be disposed of as part ofunsorted municipal waste. Due to materials that may be contained in the product andbatteries, such as heavy metals, the environment and human health may be negativelyimpacted as a result of inappropriate disposal.

Note 1: For electronic products put on the market in the European Union, a solid barunder the crossed-out wheeled bin indicates that the product was put on the marketafter 13 August 2005.

Note: If a solid bar appears under the crossedout wheelie bin, it signifies the product was puton the EU market on or after 13 August 2005.

Product conformance

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................363-211-585Issue 8, September 2008

B-5

Note 2: For batteries put on the market in the European Union, a chemical symbol Hg(mercury), Cd (cadmium), or Pb (lead), or a combination of those symbols, beneath thecross-out wheeled bin indicates that the battery contains the corresponding heavymetals.

Moreover, in compliance with legal requirements and contractual agreements, whereapplicable, Alcatel-Lucent will offer to provide for the collection and treatment ofAlcatel-Lucent products bearing the logo at the end of their useful life, or productsdisplaced by Alcatel-Lucent equipment offers..

For information regarding take-back, recycling, or disposal of equipment byAlcatel-Lucent or for equipment take-back requests, visit the Alcatel-Lucent Take-Backweb page (http://www.alcatel-lucent.com/product_takeback)or contact Alcatel-LucentTakeback Support at [email protected]. For technical information onproduct treatment, consult the Alcatel-Lucent Recycling Information webpage(http://www.alcatel-lucent.com/product_recycling)

Material Content Compliance

European Union (EU) Directive 2002/95/EC,″Restriction of the use of certainHazardous Substances″ (RoHS), restricts the use of lead, mercury, cadmium,hexavalent chromium, and certain flame retardants in electrical and electronicequipment.

This Directive applies to electrical and electronic products placed on the EU marketfrom 1 July 2006, with various exemptions, including an exemption for lead solder innetwork infrastructure equipment.

Alcatel-Lucent products shipped to the EU from 1 July 2006 will comply with theRoHS Directive.

Product conformance Eco-environmental statements

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................


Glossary

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Numerics

0dBr-Point0dBr-Point is a defined digital reference point. This point is located on the digital signalside in a local exchange (LE).

1N / 3NFormats of packs which define the height according to the One GPN standard hardwarerequirement.

2B1Q2 Binary 1 Quartenary Line Code

3 kHz flat filterThe 3 kHz flat filter for noise measurements allows low frequency noise to be passedwhile still restricting the high frequencies above 3 kHz. Its characteristic shape is that ofa 3 kHz low pass filter. If a noise source is suspected to be mostly low frequencies itcan be detected by taking a measurement with the 3 kHz flat filter and then theC-message filter. A lower noise reading with the C-message filter will indicate noisefrom 20/25 Hz ringing, 50/60 Hz power line induction or some other low frequencyinterference.

4B3T4 Binary, 3 Ternary Line Code

10BaseTEthernet with 10 Mbps (IEEE 802.3)

10BaseTIEEE 802.3 standard for Ethernet transmission over unshielded twisted pair.

995A cross couple connectorA 40-pin micro-strip connector to join 2 AFMOs in duplex AFM mode via the faceplatesin order to enable transfer of transmission data between the active and the standbyAFMO

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................363-211-585Issue 8, September 2008

GL-1

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

A A&IPAlarm and Interconnection Panel

a-wireOne of the two wires of a twisted a/b copper pair. The a/b copper pairs are used forsubscriber lines connected for example with Z interfaces, U interfaces, HDSL interfacesor ADSL interfaces. The a-wire is sometimes called tip-wire.

AALATM adaptation layer - A set of internationally standardized protocols and formats thatdefine support for circuit emulation, packet video and audio, and connection-orientedand connectionless data services. There are four standard protocols defined for AAL:AAL1, AAL2, AAL3/4, and AAL5.AAL5 is used for bursty LAN traffic and uses the conventional five-byte ATM header.AAL5 does not support cell multiplexing.

AAL1ATM adaptation layer 1 - An AAL that supports constant bit rate (CBR) traffic.

AAL5ATM adaptation layer 5 - An AAL that supports variable bit rate (VBR) traffic both forreal time (rt) as well as for non real time (nrt) applications and variable packet lengthtraffic.

ACAlternating Current

AC fail alarmA power supply option which monitors the input voltage and provides an isolated logicoutput signal when there is a loss of line voltage.

Accelerated alignmentThe accelerated alignment procedure is the capability to block/unblock all user ports(PSTN, ISDN BRA and ISDN PRA) via common control protocol at V5.2 interface. Theblock accelerated alignment procedure is requested by the 2nd edition of the V5.2specification.

Access digital sectionThe concept used to allow a functional and procedural description and a definition of thenetwork requirements from V1 reference point and T reference point.

ACOAlarm cut-off

ACPAlarm Connection Panel

Activated stateThe state where transmission of data over the U interface is possible. In the activatedstate data can be transmitted in both directions between the user terminal and the LT.

Glossary

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

GL-2 363-211-585Issue 8, September 2008

The U interface and the S/T interface are activated. While in the activated state, thedeactivation can only be initiated in the downstream direction.

Activation StateThe activation state gives information if a port is enabled or disabled for service.

Active alarm messageEach alarm message contains alarm attributes, including access identifier, condition type,severity level, service-affecting characteristics, and condition description. Currentlyactive alarms are listed in order of severity and chronologically within each severityclassification.

Active imageThe peripheral image which is intended to be executed whenever it is functional.Initially it is installed on the peripheral packs in the factory and may be overwritten byperipheral SW download. There are active images for peripheral processors and for fieldprogrammable gate arrays (FPGAs).

Active packIdentifies the pack which is currently responsible for handling the service in a protectedconfiguration. An active pack may also be in a state where no service is possible, forexample faulty or moved to OOS by the operator.

Active protection physical channelA protection physical channel (timeslot) which is currently carrying a V5 logicalcommunication channel. See also standby protection physical channel.

Active provisioning variantThe provisioning variant label which is used for the V5 interface for the next V5start-up procedure. Every V5.x interface has an active provisioning variant.

Active status condition messageEach status condition message contains access identifier, condition type, condition effect,and condition description. Currently active status conditions are listed chronologically(see also status condition).

ACUAlarm Control Unit

ADMAdd/Drop Multiplexer

Administrative primary service statePrimary service state which is provisioned by the craft. Administrative primary servicestate is used on the PACKS- and the LINES-layer but not on SLOT-, EQUIPMENT- andSERVICE-layer. See also service state.

Admissible BandwidthThe amount of bandwidth allocated to a service category in the upstream anddownstream directions, except for UBR. The sum of the effective bandwidths allocatedto all connections supported by a service category, divided by the overbooking factor of

Glossary

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................363-211-585Issue 8, September 2008

GL-3

that service category, must not exceed the admissible bandwidth of this service category.The admissible bandwidth of a service category may not exceed Shelf PCR.

ADSLAsynchronous Digital Subscriber Line

ADSL (Full-rate ADSL)Asymmetric digital subscriber line - A method of data transmission over unloaded copperloops. The data rate transmitted toward the end user is typically much higher (e.g.6.144 Mbps) than the data rate transmitted by the end user (e.g. 640 kbps).

ADSL APAsymmetrical Digital Subscriber Line application pack (ATU-C) that transmits andreceives a broadband signal to/from ATU-R customer premises equipment (CPE), and ifso connected, diplexes a voice frequency signal on to the same tip and ring pair carryingthe broadband signal.

ADSL subscriberAsymmetric digital subscriber line - The subscriber lines that terminate on ADSL APs.

ADSL superframeAn ADSL superframe is composed of 68 data frames transmitted/received on an ADSLport. ADSL superframes are transmitted every 17 ms. This rate applies regardless oftrained bit rate.

ADSL-lite (Universal)A version of asymmetric digital subscriber line (ADSL) that is less expensive thanfull-rate ADSL and that operates at a lower bit rate than full-rate ADSL. This version ofADSL is specified in ITU-T G.992.2.

ADSL2/ADSL2+ADSL2 and ADSL2+ are two new standards for asymmetric digital subscriber line(ADSL) technology specified in ITU-T G.992.3 to ITU-T G.992.5. These standards arespecifically designed to improve the rate and reach of ADSL largely by achieving betterperformance on long lines in the presence of narrowband interference. ADSL2 achievesdownstream and upstream data rates of about 12 Mbps and 1 Mbps respectively,depending on loop length and other factors. ADSL2 accomplishes this by improvingmodulation efficiency, reducing framing overhead, achieving higher coding gain,improving the initialization state machine, and providing enhanced signal processingalgorithms. As a result, ADSL2 mandates higher performance for all standard-compliantdevices.

AFMATM Feeder Multiplexer

AFMAsynchronous transfer mode feeder multiplexer - The AFM serves as the sole commoncontrol and feeder interface unit forAnyMedia® Access System ATM xDSL services.

AFMDS3Electrical DS3 ATM Feeder Multiplexer (45 Mbps)

Glossary

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................


AFME1Multiple E1 ATM Feeder Multiplexer

AFME3Electrical E3 ATM Feeder Multiplexer (34 Mbps)

AFMOOptical ATM Feeder Multiplexer (155 Mbps)

AIDAccess identifier - AID is the address within a TL1 command that is used to identify thephysical or logical entity (or entities) within a network element to which the commandapplies. It has the format of a unique component identifier followed by hierarchicaladdresses of components. For example, drop-1-3-8 is an object representing thephysical subscriber line #8 of the application pack in slot #3 in theAnyMediaShelf #1.

AIPAccess interface platform - The access interface platform is a set of packs that can beused in local exchanges (LE) or in access applications to provide services to subscribers.These services include narrowband services (for example POTS, ALL, ISDN, DLL,...) aswell as ATM xDSL services such as ADSL.

AIP-1Access interface platform 1 - Access interface platform system configuration with abackplane for narrowband services only.

AIP-2Access interface platform 2 - Access interface platform system configuration with abackplane for narrowband and ATM xDSL services.

AISAlarm indication signal - A signal that replaces the normal traffic signal on an E1 linkor on an E3 feeder when a maintenance alarm indication has been activated. AIS isdefined as an unframed all ones signal (at scope of theAnyMedia® Access System indirection to the far end).

ALLAnalog leased line - Service using a 2-wire Z interface for analog subscriber terminalswithout out-band signaling and without DC feeding (normally for uses other thantelephony, for example data transmission).

ANAccess Network

Ancillary equipmentAncillary equipment refers to equipment included in the system site that is no integratedinto the system’s internal communication network. There are not assigned CLEI codesbut any associated inventory data with this equipment would include a barcode that canbe electronically scanned and interpreted. It typically includes power and cablingmaterial and hardware such as battery shelves, fan shelves, batteries etc. Ancillaryequipment is not included in any TL1 messages to retrieve inventory information.

Glossary

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................363-211-585Issue 8, September 2008

GL-5

ANEAccess network element - An access network element is a system, implemented betweenservice node (for example local exchange LE) and user, replacing part or the whole ofthe local line distribution network.

AnomalyAn anomaly is a discrepancy between the actual and desired characteristics of an item.The desired characteristics may be expressed in the form of a specification. An anomalymay or may not affect the ability of an item to perform a required function. Thisdefinition applies to No Cell Delineation and Header Error Control anomalies for ADSLservices.

ANSIAmerican National Standards Institute

AnyMedia ® Access SystemThe AnyMedia® Access System is an access network element which supports variousnarrowband and ATM xDSL services, digital as well as analog.

AnyMedia ® ETSI V5 ShelfThe AnyMediaMainshelf consists of a metal mechanical structure that serves to guideand fasten packs, locate and mount a multi-layer backplane. It allows mounting intosupporting structures such as racks and provides an interface for internal and externalconnections. OneAnyMediaMainshelf houses up to 16 physical E1 links and up to 16subscriber distribution application packs.

AnyMedia ® LAG 1900 ShelfThe AnyMedia® LAG 1900 Shelf is a specific LAG Shelf. It contains seven 1N highslots for 1N-sized common packs and 17 3N high slots for common packs (COMDAC,CIU, IPFM, AFM) and application packs with subscriber interfaces. TheAnyMedia®

LAG 1900 Shelf can house narrowband services, ATM xDSL services and/or IP-basedservices.

AnyMedia ® LAG 200 ShelfThe AnyMediaLAG 200 Shelf consists of a high speed IP spoke architecture that servesup to three IP-based application packs for supporting Ethernet, VDSL and VoIP services.The shelf provides three 3N high slots (3 APs or 2 APs and one controller) and three 1Ndouble wide slots. The LAG 200 Shelf with door could be deployed in LAG 200 cabinetas well as in the customer supplied cabinet with 19”, ETSI or 23” racks. It providesinterfaces for internal and external connections and can operate in controlled mode withcombined uplink and stand-alone mode with separate uplinks.

AnyMedia ® LAG 4300 ShelfThe AnyMedia® LAG 4300 Shelf is a double row shelf. The upper row contains six 1Nhigh slots and 22 3N high slots. The lower row contains 24 3N high slots. The 1N highslots are designated for circuit packs with network interfaces, while certain of the 3Nhigh slots are designated for control (COMDAC, CIU, ..) and the other 3N high slots aredesignated for circuit packs with subscriber interfaces.

Glossary

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................


AnyMedia LAG 4300 SystemThe AnyMediaLAG 4300 System is housed in an EMI protected indoor cabinet and canbe delivered in three configurations equipped with

• oneAnyMedia® LAG 4300 Shelf

• two AnyMedia® LAG 4300 Shelves

• two AnyMedia® LAG 4300 Shelves and twoAnyMedia® ETSI V5 Shelves.The Power Filter Units, Passive Clock Distributions, Ringing Filter Units, AlarmConnection Panels and fan units are also housed in the indoor cabinet.

APSee application pack

APOGApplications, Planning, and Ordering Guide

APPApparatus Code

Apparatus codeThe apparatus code is an 8-byte item of ASCII information stored in the nonvolatile datastorage (NVDS) of a pack (for example LPZ100, DTP500,...). It is a unique identifierwhich specifies the function of the pack.

Application interfaceAn interface at the user side to provide ISDN PRA or n×64 kbps digital leased linesservices. Examples for application interfaces are G. 703, V.35, V.36, ...

Application modeSee HDSL application mode.

Application packA circuit pack which is located in any of the AP slots and supports subscriber interfacesfor certain services. Some examples for application packs are LPZ100, LPA416,LPU430.

AP_ E1 portAn AP based E1 port, currently available on SHDSL AP (LPS510) supportingunstructured services only.

ARAction Request

Asymmetric digital subscriber line (ADSL)A method of data transmission over unloaded copper loops. The data rate transmittedtoward the end user is typically much higher (e.g., 6 Mbps) than the data ratetransmitted by the end user (e.g., 640 Kbps).

ATMAsynchronous transfer mode - A high-speed connection-oriented multiplexing andswitching method that utilizes fixed-length cells to support multiple types of traffic.Transmission is synchronized at the start and end of each character, allowing different

Glossary

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................363-211-585Issue 8, September 2008

GL-7

types of services to be carried over one system.

ATM adaptation layer (AAL)A set of internationally standardized protocols and formats that define support for circuitemulation, packet video and audio, and connection-oriented and connectionless dataservices. There are four standard protocols defined for AAL—AAL1, AAL2, AAL3/4,and AAL5.AAL5 is used for bursty LAN traffic and uses the conventional five-byte ATM header.AAL5 does not support cell multiplexing.

ATM feederThe connection from the AFM to the ATM transport network. This connection may beeither E3, DS3, E1, STM-1 or OC-3c. The ATM feeder may connect directly to an ATMswitch or access concentrator device. In addition, the connection between the AFM andthe switch or access concentrator may incorporate a multiplexer. In daisy-chainedconfigurations, the ATM feeder for each AFM, except the one closest to the switch oraccess concentrator, connects to the previous AFM in the chain. This connection may bedirect or through a multiplexer. Note that daisy-chaining is available only with E3, DS3,STM-1 and OC-3c AFMs.

ATM switchThe ATM switch is a general term for ATM network elements performing ATM switchingfunctions. The ATM access concentrators and ATM edge switches are special types ofthem.

ATM technologyAsynchronous transfer mode technology - Asynchronous transfer mode is a datacommunications format in which transmission is synchronized at the start and end ofeach character, allowing different types of services to be carried over one system.

ATM traffic statisticsFor theAnyMediaAccess System, ATM traffic statistics refers to the performancemonitoring function for ATM cell counts. ATM traffic statistics can be collected either atthe shelf level, or for specific connections. At the connection level, the technician maychoose to activate ATM traffic statistics for all connections on an AP, for all connectionson an end-user port, or for an individual connection.

ATM xDSL servicesHigh speed data and asynchronous transfer mode services.

ATSAccess transmission system - Refers to the line system using metallic pairs, opticalfibers, or radio systems. The line transceivers of the U port and of the HDSL port arealso part of the access transmission system. The concept of ATS is used to describe thecharacteristics of an implementation, using a specific medium to support ISDN BRA,ISDN PRA, DLL or n×64 kbps digital leased lines.

Attenuation of ADSL lineThe difference in dB between the power received at the far end and the powertransmitted by the near end.

Glossary

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................


AUCAwaiting unblocking complete (a secondary service state) - The system is waiting untilthe switch sets the V5 subscriber or link in service; that is, until it sends an″unblock″.

AuthenticationProcess used to verify the integrity of transmitted data, especially that of a message.

AUXIDAuxiliary ID code - The AUXID facilitates distinguishing of packs that have identicalmain ID codes. The AUXID is 2 characters long. Currently not used in theAnyMedia®

Access System.

AvailabilityThe probability that a system is in operable state at a given instant in time.

Available timeFor a digital transmission channel, a new period of available time begins with the firstsecond of a period of 10 consecutive seconds, each of which has a bit error ratio (BER)of better than 10-3. These 10 seconds are considered to be available time (see alsounavailable time).

AWGAmerican Wire Gauge

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

B B-channelAn ISDN bearer service channel that can carry either voice or data at a speed of 64kbps.

b-wireOne of the two wires of a twisted a/b copper pair. The a/b copper pairs are used forsubscriber lines connected for example with Z interfaces, U interfaces, [S]HDSL inter-faces or ADSL interfaces. The b-wire is sometimes called ring-wire.

Backup imageThe peripheral image which is intended to be executed when no active image isfunctional. It is installed on the peripheral packs in the factory and normally cannot beoverwritten by peripheral SW download. It is not of the latest SW version but isintended to provide basic services and features as much as possible. Additionally itprovides the functions of the boot program. There are backup images for peripheralprocessors and for field programmable gate array (FPGAs).

Backward directionThe direction that is opposite to that followed by monitored user cells. Unlike thedefinition of upstream and downstream direction, the forward and backward directionsare relative to a reference point (e.g., the point where a failure occurs).

Battery backupIn addition to a power plant a battery pack is supplied to provide power backup in casesof AC power failures.

Glossary

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................363-211-585Issue 8, September 2008

GL-9

Bay alarm summary LEDThis is an alarm indication LED visible with closed cabinet doors forAnyMediaLAGSystems. Each indoor cabinet bay has a related alarm indication LED, so a cabinet hastwo alarm indication LEDs, one on the front side bay and another one on the rear sidebay. The bay alarm summary LED is operated if a failure in any system housed in therelated cabinet side’s bay is detected.

BB subsystemThe AnyMedia® Access System components that are needed to provide ATM xDSLservices. That is, the AFM, ADSL AP, SDSL AP and SHDSL AP. Components that onlycarry narrowband service (e.g., the COMDAC) are not included in the broadbandsubsystem. OneAnyMediaLAG Shelf may contain up to two independent BBsubsystems.

BCC protocolBearer channel connection protocol - This is a V5.2 protocol which allocates bearerchannels on demand.

Bearer channelA 64-kbps timeslot within the V5.x interface allocated for a B-channel of an ISDN userport or a channel from a POTS user port.

BERBit error ratio - The quality of transmission is measured in the number of errored bitsper number of bits received.

BHCABusy hour call attempts - BHCA indicates the number of call attempts by one subscriberduring the busy hour time.

BHCCBusy hour completed calls - BHCC indicates the number of successfully completed callsduring the busy hour time.

BISBattery Isolation Switch

BISTBuilt-in Self-Test - The BIST is a procedure executed by a pack either after power-up oron demand. The task is to check the functions of the hardware.

BLKBlocked (a secondary service state) - The switch forces the V5 subscriber to go inblocked status. For example if a V5 subscriber is administratively set to OOS in theswitch.

BMANBoard metallic access network - Connects or disconnects the line pack bus (LPB) to thetest in or test out bus on the backplane. An ISDN AP and an HDSL AP contain oneBMAN.

Glossary

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................


Boot programA program providing some basic communication and error handling functions. It is longterm stable and version independent.

BORSCHTBORSCHT is an abbreviation for interface functions provided by Z ports for POTS.

• Battery (Subscriber loop feeding)

• Overvoltage/Overcurrent protection

• Ringing (Ringing signal provided for subscriber’s terminal)

• Supervision (Loop signaling)

• Coding/Decoding (PCM)

• Hybrid (2- to 4-wire conversion)

• Test (provide a test access to subscriber’s line and line circuit).

BRABasic Rate Access

BridgeA network layer device that passes packets between two or more network segments thatuse the same data link communications protocol (OSI layer 2). The network segmentsappear as one segment to protocol levels higher than the data link layer.

BridgingPort and subscriber line are connected during a test session.

Broadband subsystemThat part of theAnyMedia® Access System which supports ATM xDSL services.

BVPTBearer Virtual Path Termination

Byte integrityThe assurance, that the digital information contained in n 64 kbps timeslots arrives atthe output in the same order as it was introduced at the input.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

C C-message filterThe C-message filter for noise measurements greatly attenuates low frequencies such as60 Hz and its harmonics as well as frequencies above 3200 Hz. From 600 to 3000 Hz itis relatively flat and therefore very useful in measuring the noise that will affect voiceband frequencies most.

C-message notch filterThe C-message notch filter is the same as the C-message filter with a notch at 1004 Hz.This notch filters the 1004 Hz holding tone inserted by additional test equipment at thefar end of the subscriber line.

CACConnection Admission Control

Glossary

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................363-211-585Issue 8, September 2008

GL-11

Call processingSummarizes all actions to establish a transmission path for telephony between thesubscriber and the LE. This includes the transfer of signaling information too. Inaddition to call build-up, all functions for tearing down a call are also included.

CARESCustomer Assistance Requests Entry System

CASTLCustomer Advocate System Test Lab

CBRConstant Bit Rate

CCCommunication Channel

CCNCustomer Change Notice

CDPClock Distribution Panel

CDVCell Delay Variation

CDVTCell Delay Variation Tolerance

CECommunauté Européenne

CellA fixed-length 53-octet packet used in ATM. The ATM cell has a 5-octet header and a48-octet payload.

Cell delay variation (CDV)The amount of difference between a cell’s expected arrival time and its actual arrivaltime. Also called″jitter″

Cell delay variation tolerance (CDVT)A parameter which, in CBR transmissions, determines the level of jitter (i.e., cell delayvariation). The upper bound on the jitter measurement is the CDVT.

Cell DelineationThe cell delineation function permits the identification of cell boundaries in the payload.It uses the HEC field in the cell header of ADSL frames.

Cell headerA 5-octet header that defines control information used in processing, multiplexing, andswitching cells.

Glossary

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................


Cell loss priority (CLP)A field in the ATM cell header showing two levels of priority for ATM cells. CLP=0cells are a higher priority than CLP=1 cells and may be discarded if there is acongestion to preserve the cell loss ratio of CLP=0 cells.

Cell loss ratio (CLR)The value the network agrees to offer as an objective over the lifetime of theconnection. This value is specified per service class at the turn-up.

Cell transfer delay (CTD)The transit delay of an ATM cell successfully passed between two designated boundarieson the AnyMedia Access System, when the system is loaded conservatively.

Cells receivedThe total number of cells that theAnyMedia® Access System received from the CPE.

Centralized poweringThe AnyMedia® Access System is powered by a central DC power plant. This powerplant normally feeds other telecommunication equipment as well.

CircuitSee port.

Circuit packA general term for any plug-in unit that is determined to be inserted into the slot of ashelf, regardless of the slot size (1N-sized or 3N-sized) and the functionality. Commonpacks and application packs are subsets of circuit packs.

Circuit testingVerifies the ability of an AP port to provide proper transmission and signaling. Theactual circuit tests needed depend on the particular service being provided; that is,POTS, and ISDN need different circuit tests. In theAnyMedia® Access System only theself-test capability of the AP is used. (See also drop testing.)

CITCraft Interface Terminal - The Craft Interface Terminal is used to enter and receive TL1(Transaction Language 1) messages. A CIT emulation is running on the GSI.

CIT interfaceInterface for the Craft Interface Terminal - A serial EIA-232C interface (9-pin Dsub) onthe faceplate of the communication interface unit (CIU) where a craft interface terminal(CIT) or a graphical system interface (GSI) is connected to theAnyMedia® AccessSystem.

CIUCommunication interface unit - This is a pack used to provide several OAM&P interfaceterminations to theAnyMedia® Access System.

CLClear Condition

Glossary

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................363-211-585Issue 8, September 2008

GL-13

CL channelUsed to transfer information concerning operation, maintenance andactivation/deactivation of the access transmission system (ATS) in both directionsbetween the LT and the NT.

CLEICommon Language Equipment Identifier

CLEICommon language equipment ID code - The CLEI is a 10-character code assigned byBellcore identifying each pack. The CLEI information relates to the function of the pack,the condition of use, the source document used in creating the CLEI code etc. If twopacks have the same first seven characters in the CLEI code, then the packs areelectrically and mechanically interchangeable. Knowledge of CLEI is useful in planning,engineering and provisioning.

CLIPCalling line identification presentation - A supplementary service which provides thecalled party with the possibility of receiving identification of the calling party.

CLPCell Loss Priority

CLRCell Loss Ratio

CNChange Notification

COCentral Office

Coding violation (CV)A coding violation is observed when a CRC violation occurs in an ADSL superframe.

Cold startRecovery of the AFM due to a soft reset or a SW upgrade with database evolution iscalled ″warm start″. For all other types of AFM recovery″cold start″ applies. In bothcases the user will be informed by a status condition report.

CollocationGrouping entities in the same physical location.

COM501

ComcodeThe comcode is a unique nine-digit code with the ECI being represented by the digits 2through 7. The comcode is used by various Alcatel-Lucent organizations for the orderingof components.

Glossary

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................


COMDACCommon data and control - Pack which provides the central control and transmissionfabric for theAnyMedia® Access System. The COMDAC supports multiple systemapplications, including V5.x switched services and analog and digital leased lines (ALLand DLL) and a variety of application packs.

Command/IndicationAn interface to control the ISDN echo cancellation circuit. In downstream directioncommands can be issued, in upstream direction indications are received.

Common control protocolThis protocol provides the necessary procedures for:

• Coordinated re-provisioning

• Checks of identification parameters, commonly used with the LE

• Coordinated restart of the PSTN FSMs.

Common packA circuit pack providing system functionality that is not limited to a specific applicationlike POTS or ADSL. All circuit packs that are not defined as application packs, arecommon packs. Some examples for common packs are COMDAC, CIU, AFM, RGUs.

Communication channelA group of one or more communication paths, all of different types. A communicationchannel is associated to a 64-kbps timeslot on a V5.x interface. This association may bechanged by a protection switch (only V5.2).

Communication pathA communication path carries any one of the following information types:

• layer 2 data links carrying the control protocol, link control protocol, PSTN protocol,protection protocol and BCC protocol,

• all the ISDN Ds-type data (ISDND) (signaling), ISDN p-type data (ISDNP) and ISDNf-type data (ISDNF) from one or more user ports.

It should be noted that this definition includes the possibility that there is more than onecommunication path of the same information type, each allocated to a different logicalcommunication channel.

ComponentSee device.

Concentration ratioThe ratio between the number of required 64-kbps channels for ISDN and POTSsubscribers and the available number of bearer channels.

Configuration managementConsists of a set of functions to exercise control over elements in the network, includinginitialization, parameter setting, starting and stopping, and collection of informationabout the configuration.

Glossary

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................363-211-585Issue 8, September 2008

GL-15

Connection admission control (CAC)CAC is a set of actions taken by the network during the call set-up phase to determinewhether a connection request can be accepted, should be rejected, or may be re-allocatedbased on QoS definitions.

Constant Bit Rate service (CBR)A type of telecommunication service characterized by a service bit rate specified by aconstant value.

Controlling entityA controlling entity has a control relationship to another entity where the operationalcondition of the other (controlled) entity depends on the operational condition of theentity concerned.

COSETThe header error co-setting (55 hex by ATM standards) is used to maintain a value otherthan zero in the header error code (HEC) field. If the first four bytes in the header arezero, the HEC derived from these bytes is also zero. When this occurs and there are astring of zeros in the data, the receiver cannot determine the cell boundaries. Therefore,it is recommended that the value 55 hex be added to the HEC before transmission.

Coverage factor cThe coverage factor c is the probability that a protection switch successfully restoresservice.

Coverage factor dThe coverage factor d is the probability that a failure in the standby unit is detected.

CPECustomer premises equipment - CPE covers the subscriber’s installation and thesubscriber’s terminal.

CPSCabinet Power System

CRCritical

CRCCyclic Redundancy Check

CRC-4 multiframeCyclic redundancy check-4 multiframe - The CRC-4 multiframe is composed of 16alternating basic frames numbered 0 to 15. It is divided into two eight-framesub-multiframes (SMF), designated SMF I and SMF II, which signifies their respectiveorder of occurrence within the CRC-4 multiframe structure. The SMF is the CRC-4block size (that is 8 frames x 256 bits/frame = 2048 bits).

CRC-4 procedureCyclic redundancy check-4 procedure - A multiplication/division process, specified inITU-T G.704, to provide additional protection against simulation of the frame alignment

Glossary

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................


signal and capability for enhanced error monitoring.

Cross-connectionA term for a logical association between two objects, for example between a subscriberport and a network interface. A physical cross-connection may additionally beestablished in the case of a network interface where bandwidth allocation is done on aprovisioning basis (V5.1). In the case of V5.2 the bearer channel allocation is done on aper-call basis by the BCC protocol.

Cross-connection objectA provisioning object which reflects a logical association necessary for establishing across-connection.

CSACarrier Serving Area

CTDCell Transfer Delay

CTSClear To Send

Customer key codeThe provisionable customer key code defines which customer specific settings are usedby the AnyMedia® Access System.

Customer- specific settingsThese parameters are only valid for specific configurations for one customer (forexample line termination impedances, signaling timings etc.).

Customer-specificReflects the particular configuration needs of a customer. Customer-specificconfiguration of the system is achieved by constant data which is part of the code. Forexample customer-specific application pack data or PSTN protocol data belong to thiskind of configuration data. Colloquially customer-specific is sometimes calledcountry-specific.

CVCControl Virtual Channel

CVPControl Virtual Path

CVPTControl Virtual Path Termination

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

D D filterA filter according to IEEE 743-1995 consisting of a high pass filter of 300 Hz and a lowpass filter of 3400 Hz with an attenuation of 3 dB.

Glossary

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................363-211-585Issue 8, September 2008

GL-17

D-channelThe ISDN out-of-band (16 kbps in BRA) signaling channel that carries the ISDN usersignals or can be used to carry packet-mode data.

DACSDigital Access Cross Connect System

Data communications (or circuit termination) equipment (DCE)A modem or network communications interface device.

Data ServiceIt is a broadband service whichAnyMedia® Access System supports by ATM transportand switching (PVCs) only. It’s used for example for internet access via IP over ATM.The data service’s protocols are terminated outside theAnyMedia® Access System andtherefore the system is transparent to these services.

Data terminal equipment (DTE)Data processing equipment that interfaces to the communications network (DCE).

Database evolutionWhen AFM software is upgraded to provide new features, it is usually necessary toadapt or extend the database structure to accommodate these features. This is doneautomatically as part of software activation and is termed database evolution.

Database transformationThe transformation of database entries from one database structure to another. The aimof the transformation of database entries between different database structures is tocompletely retain a site-specific configuration when upgrading a system.

DBSFDouble Board Single Fiber

DCDirect Current

DCCData Communications Channel

DCEData Communications Equipment

DCNData Communications Network

DDFDigital Distribution Frame

Default configurationThe configuration that is achieved by initially programming the COMDAC’s nonvolatiledata storage (NVDS). With a″default configuration″ the system should be able torecover with default values in the system database.

Glossary

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................


DefaultsDefaults are the parameter values built into theAnyMedia® Access System when it isshipped from the factory. The sum of all defaults forms the default configuration.(Default values are restored upon execution of an Initialize-System command.) For TL1commands there are defined defaults for parameter values used for parameters not givenin the command line.

DefectA defect is a limited interruption in the ability of an item to perform a required function.It may or may not lead to maintenance action depending on the results of additionalanalysis. The system ’detects’ a defect. This definition applies to the ADSL performancemanagement parameter Loss of Cell Delineation.

DegrowthThe removal of circuit packs or traffic from a system via a provisioning operation (maybe accompanied by the physical removal of associated equipment, but this is notrequired).

Design lifeThe design life is the length of time that a maintained system is expected to operatewith a declining or constant failure rate.

DeviceAny electrical part (IC, diode, capacitor, resistor, etc.) with distinct electricalcharacteristics. This term is used interchangeably with component.

DiagnosisThe pack diagnosis includes the sanity check performed autonomously by the pack andthe built-in self test (BIST).

Digital local lineA metallic local line that is able to simultaneously carry bidirectional digitaltransmission providing ISDN BRA subscribers and leased lines subscribers, between LTand NT1/NTU.

Digital transmission systemThe concept used to describe the characteristics of an implementation, using a specificmedium, in support of the access digital section.

Disable informationDisable information is sent by the lines layer. The information is relevant for HDSLpayload timeslots and POTS, ISDN and HDSL ports.

Discarded CellsCells that are dropped to avoid exceeding a particular connection’s traffic contract.

Distance-to-openFor deciding whether a line is broken (open), a distance-to-open measurement is to beimplemented. Such a measurement could be based upon several techniques: capacitanceor impedance measurement, or even pulse-reflection. TAP10x/LPZ200 may produceparameters, with which the operator can decide on the location of the cable-fault (based

Glossary

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................363-211-585Issue 8, September 2008

GL-19

on the operator’s knowledge of the applied cable type).

DLLDigital leased line - Used for point to point connections. The DLL bypasses the LE. Thetransmission rate of DLL is n×64 kbps (n=1,2) using U interface as transmissionmedium.

DMTDiscrete Multi-tone

DOTSDigital office timing supply

Double board single fiber (DBSF) protection modeA protection mode which can be used for optical AFMs (AFMOs). This protection modeprovides pack protection and feeder facility protection for the feeder section between theAFMO and an external optical coupler. The optical coupler is splitting the receivedsignal to two physical feeders and in transmit direction it is combing the two transmitsignals to one.

DownloadA binary data transfer from the GSI to theAnyMedia® Access System.

Download a load imageRefers to transferring software (load image) via the GSI or the EMS.

Downloadable packAny peripheral pack which is designed for download of the peripheral SW image. Forexample peripheral SW download via COMDAC.

DownstreamThe bitstream direction from the network towards the NT or the customer.

Downstream directionTransmission direction from ATM data network or telephony switch to customer.

Downstream VPIn a daisy chain, a VP that terminates on a shelf that is farther away from the ATMtransport network than the shelf being addressed.″Downstream″ here does not refer tothe direction of transmission.

DowntimeUsed to describe the time during which a system is not available for service. Inengineering applications downtime is associated with unavailability.

Downtime per portDowntime, in minutes per year, for a single bidirectional path terminating on aninterface port on an add/drop multiplexer or a digital cross connect system. Any serviceinterruption longer than 50 milliseconds contributes to this measure.

DropSee subscriber loop.

Glossary

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................


Drop testingChecks for opens, shorts, leakages to ground, foreign voltages, or other faults on thesubscriber loop.

Dropped cellsThe number of cells that are dropped as a result of exceeding either a particularconnection’s traffic contract or the total allowable bandwidth of the system.

DS3 cabling

DSLDigital subscriber line - Provides full duplex service on one or two metallic pairs at bitrates which are capable of supporting ISDN BRA, ISDN PRA, DLL or n×64 kbpsdigital leased lines and additional framing, timing recovery and operations andmaintenance functions.

DTEData Terminal Equipment

DTP500Communication interface unit (CIU)

Duplex 1+1 protection modeA protection mode which can be used for optical AFMs (AFMOs). This protection modeprovides pack protection as well as feeder facility protection, i.e., both, the feeder andthe AFMO are doubled. For SDH it applies to unidirectional 1+1 linear MultiplexSection Protection (MSP) per ITU-T G.841, for SONET it applies to unidirectional 1+1line protection per Telcordia, GR-253.

Duplex modeA facility protection scheme in which two identical facilities (packs or feeders) areinstalled on a shelf; one is running in the active mode, the other is in the standby mode.The standby facility takes over when the active one fails or on an external command.Such a take-over (″protection switch″) guarantees that a facility failure does not disruptthe services.

Dying gaspA message the CPE transmits to the ADSL AP when its electrical power is being shutoff. The message indicates to a service technician or an administrator that an interruptionon an ADSL line was caused by a power interruption at the CPE and not caused by atransmission failure or anAnyMedia® Access System failure.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

E E1E1 is the standard acronym for the 2.048-Mbps interface defined in the ITU standardsG.703/G.704.

E1 linkLink between theAnyMedia® Access System and a service node.

Glossary

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................363-211-585Issue 8, September 2008

GL-21

E3 cabling

Early Packet Discard (EPD)The EPD function ensures that the ATM equipment discards entire AAL5 packets duringperiods of congestion. This is especially important when a relatively large number ofTransmission Control Protocol (TCP) sources contend for particular bottleneck.

EBErrored Block

ECIEquipment catalog item - Equipment catalog item code is a 6-character code assigned byBellcore identifying each pack. This code corresponds to the bar-coded label on thefaceplate of the pack, and is uniquely equivalent to the CLEI code - for a given CLEIthere is a unique ECI. It is used internally in the databases of external inventory systemsfor cataloging of equipment and is useful in accounting and inventory control.

ECMExternal condition mismatch (a secondary service state) - Connected subscriberequipment, for example the HDSL NTU does not match the provisioning of theAnyMedia® Access System.

Edge switchA switch that is located at the meeting point between the access and the core network.

EFaddrEnvelope function address - An EFaddr is an address used in the LAPV5-EF frame toidentify different V5-enveloping function sublayer connections, each of them used tosupport a relaying mechanism for the LAPD/LAPF frames of each of the ISDN user portor messages corresponding to the V5.x-layer 3 protocols (for example PSTN protocol,control protocol). It is present in every LAPV5-EF frame and its purpose is to provide acommon envelope in frames in which either the LAPV5-EF information field isterminated by theAnyMedia® Access System (for example LAPV5-DL frames used bythe PSTN protocol and control protocol) or those where the payload is terminatedoutside theAnyMedia® Access System (ISDN LAPD/LAPF frames from the ISDN userports).

Effective bandwidthA measure of the amount of bandwidth a connection uses. It is PCR for CBRconnections. It is a function of PCR, SCR, MBS and CLR for VBR connections. Thismeasure for VBR connections is defined differently for different congestion points onthe same connection. The CAC algorithm uses this measure at potential congestionpoints when determining whether to admit a new connection.

EIA-232CAmerican Standard for Serial Interface (the same as EIA-RS-232C; similar to V.24)

EIDREnhanced inventory data record - Enhanced inventory data record is a set of parametersthat are stored in the non-volatile memory of packs. The parameters relate to thefunction performed by the pack, the manufacturing information, ordering information etc.

Glossary

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................


that is of importance in provisioning a new service, maintaining the service, and inrestoring the service quickly in event of a failure.

EMCElectromagnetic Compatibility

EMSElement Management System (SW)

Enable informationEnable information is sent by the lines layer. The information is relevant for HDSLpayload timeslots and POTS, ISDN and HDSL ports.

End of lifeThe instant when a device parameter reaches a specified failure threshold. The failurethreshold is device-dependent. For instance, an aluminum electrolytic capacitor reachesits end of life when its equivalent series resistance (ESR) exceeds twice its initial value.

Engineering work orderIn order to build up a system on site or to grow or degrow a running system, anengineering work order is necessary. By means of this order, the installation group canplan and carry out the construction. The engineering work order is made out of the sitesurvey with the installation group and agreement to the customer. The engineering workorder contains for example floor plan data sheet, application schematic, interconnections.

EntityThe term entity or object represents an entry in a TL1 administrative view, that is anentity (or object) may be entered, changed, deleted or retrieved by a TL1 command.

Envelope function addressUsed for addressing the different ISDN user ports within the V5.x protocols (forexample BCC, Control Protocol etc.).

EOCEmbedded operations channel - Twenty four bits of the maintenance channel frame ofthe U interface (see maintenance channel).

EPDSee early packet discard

Equipment layerRepresents in the layered structure of theAnyMedia® Access System services the layerfor a port. It reflects the physical status of a port. A port can be for example anHDSL port, a U port, a Z port or an E1 port.

Equipment pairThe equipment pair of the TAP-B interface consists of the 2 wires towards the customerpremises equipment (outward direction).

Error correction (EC)An error correction is observed whenever the FEC algorithm indicates that at least onebit error has been corrected in an ADSL superframe.

Glossary

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................363-211-585Issue 8, September 2008

GL-23

Errored cellsCells received with an invalid header field after HEC procedures are completed.

Errored cells receivedThe number of cells that the system received from the CPE with detected errors.

ESErrored Seconds

ESFExtended Superframe

ETRETSI Technical Report

ETSEuropean Telecommunication Standard

ETSIEuropean Telecommunication Standards Institute

External interfaceAny operations or user interface system connected locally or remotely to theAnyMedia®

Access System. For example: CIT, GSI, EMS.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

F FAC500/FAC500BQuad E1 Interface pack (IO_E1)

Facility pairThe facility pair of the TAP-B interface consists of the 2 wires towards the applicationpack circuitry (inward direction).

Facility protectionThe capability for a system to choose which signal from two facilities to pass along tothe internal, unprotected transmission paths. A system switches from one facility to theother, for example, when the facility being used fails or when an administrator issues anOAM&P command.

FailureA condition in which the system is not performing its intended function, either in part orin whole.

Fall backThe act of switching over from the active image to the backup image on a peripheralpack.

Far endThe transmission termination or network element terminating the remote end of a feederconnected to the system. Examples include the edge switch and anotherAnyMediashelfwithin a daisy chain. The far end is also referred to as remote end.

Glossary

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................


FASFrame alignment signal - The distinctive signal inserted in every frame or once in everyn frames on an E1 link, always occupying the same relative position within the frame,and used to establish and maintain frame alignment.

Fault isolationThe task of identifying and isolating a faulty unit so that other operational units are notaffected and the faulty unit can be replaced without service interruption for the otherunits not concerned.

Fault isolation busThe fault isolation bus allows the AFM inAnyMediaMainshelf applications toindividually reset any ATM xDSL AP, and to retrieve status indications from the ATMxDSL APs. The bus consists of a clock driven by the AFM and a bidirectional serial datasignal and is also called I2C Bus.

Fault managementConsists of a set of functions, such as testing, that enable the detection, isolation, andcorrection of abnormal operation of the telecommunications network and itsenvironment.

FDIFeeder Distribution Interface

FEFar End

FEACFar End Alarm Code

Feature packagingCustomization mechanism where a subset of the overall set of software packages isselected and incorporated in a load image to support a certain functionality (for examplePOTS-only, ISDN-only, V5.2-only). Feature packaging allows to sell exclusively thefunctionality requested by a customer as opposed to the complete functionality thesystem can provide.

FEBEFar end block errors - Bit errors in the downstream direction from the LTU to the NTUin case of a 2B1Q U interface and in case of an HDSL interface. They are reported viaFEBE bit in the maintenance channel to the LTU.

FEFFamily of equipment failed (a secondary service state) - A whole group is not accessible.

FEFFamily of Equipment Failed

FFCUFan Filter and Clock Unit

Glossary

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................363-211-585Issue 8, September 2008

GL-25

FFUFan Filter Unit

FITFailures in time - A unit of failure rate used in reliability analysis. One FIT is equivalentto one failure per 10+9 operating hours.

FITLFiber In The Loop

Flag monitoringThe flag monitoring function requires that flags, sent on V5 communication channelstowards the ANE by the LE, must be monitored in the ANE. Flag monitoring ismandatory for V5.2 interfaces and optional for V5.1 interfaces; flag sending ismandatory in any case for both directions, that is ANE to LE and LE to ANE.

FLTFault (a secondary service state) - Hardware fault detected, for example a circuit packhas a fault condition.

FLTFault

FMECAFailure modes, effects and critically analysis - identifies potential design weaknesses(silent failures, unprotected failures, etc.) through a systematic documentation of alllikely ways in which a component can fail, causes of failure, and the effects of eachfailure.

Forced modeRefers to the mode of changing to administrative primary service state OOS. In forcedmode the resources are freed immediately and the administrative primary service stateOOS is entered.

Forward directionThe direction followed by monitored user cells. Unlike the definition of upstream anddownstream direction, the forward and backward directions are relative to a referencepoint (e.g., the point where a failure occurs).

FPGAField programmable gate array - A hardware device which is (re)programmable in thefield; for example hardware configuration may be changed by reprogramming thisdevice.

FrameA cyclic set of consecutive timeslots in which the relative position of each timeslot canbe identified.

Frame relay functionThe statistical multiplexing of frames, for example ISDN D-channel frames from anaccess layer 2 into a V5-communication channel and demultiplexing for ISDN D-channel

Glossary

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................


frames received on a V5-communication channel.

Frame slot integrityThe assurance that multiple 64 kbps time slots contained in one 125 ms frame at theinput arrive in one 125 ms frame at the output.

Framed path termination groupA framed path termination group is a collection of four framed path terminations basedon the hardware architecture. The hardware architecture allows only either the mutuallyexclusive connection of such a group of framed path terminations to the timeslotinterchange or the connection of a (related) IO slot to the timeslot interchange.

FTPFile Transfer Protocol

FUFan Unit

Full splitWith full-split test access, transmission is interrupted in both the transmit and receivedirections at the test access point and the tester is allowed to inject and look at thetransmitted and received signals both in the equipment (towards the end-customer) andin the facility (towards the network) directions simultaneously.

Full-rate ADSL (Classic)The version of asymmetric digital subscriber line (ADSL) defined by ANSI T1.413.

Function codeFunction code (sometimes called entity type) is the ’pet name’ of a pack. It is a set of11 characters stored in the nonvolatile data storage (NVDS) of a pack that identifies apack, backplane, or a software package (for example COMDAC, CIU,...).

FWFirmware

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

G G.LiteG.Lite is a special type of ADSL line where no splitters are used. In comparison toADSL it provides a reduced transmission rate.

GAGeneral Availability

GCRAGeneric Cell Rate Algorithm

General settingsThese are parameters which are valid for all customer-specific configurations (forexample loop-start function for all Z ports which are assigned for POTS service orsuppression of out-band signalings for Z ports which are assigned for ALL(transmission-only) service).

Glossary

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................363-211-585Issue 8, September 2008

GL-27

General userUser login allows access to all TL1 commands except those for security managementthat affect other users such as login creation and deletion, and password modification forall user classes.

Generic cell rate algorithm (GCRA)For each cell arrival the GCRA determines whether the cell conforms to the trafficcontract of the connection. The GCRA is defined with two parameters: the increment (I)and the limit (L).

GLLN×64 kbps leased lines service via G.703 interface

GLL serviceAn n×64 kbps digital leased line service via G.703 interface (n=1, ..., 31). This interfaceis provided by means of an NTU which is the far end equipment of an HDSL link.

Global ATM parametersIncludes theAnyMediaMainshelf VPI and the ATM operations channel VPI and VCI(also known as ATM permanent virtual connection [PVC] for OAM&P purposes).

GNDGround - Synonym for electrical potential of 0V.

GNEGateway Network Element

GPBGeneral purpose bus - The general purpose bus is anAnyMedia® Access System internal12-wire connection between any of the APs in theAnyMediaMainshelf and the CIU.Each AP can connect any of its circuits to the GPB via relays. The GPB is situated onthe backplane of theAnyMediaMainshelf.

GPBGeneral Purpose Bus

GSIGraphical System Interface

GSIGraphical System Interface - A user friendly front-end for communicating with a system.In the AnyMedia® Access System the GSI is installed on a Windows based PersonalComputer and used for entering and receiving TL1 (Transaction Language 1) messagesfor narrowband applications and SNMP messages for ATM xDSL applications. The GSIprovides support for managing theAnyMedia® Access System in the following functionalareas:

• Configuration management

• Fault management

• Performance management

Glossary

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................


• Security management

• Inventory management.

Guaranteed BandwidthThe portion of the feeder throughput (feeder bandwidth) made available to a servicecategory to be used during periods of sustained congestion. Guaranteed bandwidth isexplicitly specified for CBR, rt-VBR, and nrt-VBR by means of provisioning the weightsfor the Weighted Round Robin (WRR) Scheduler. The sum of all guaranteed bandwidthsmay not exceed the feeder bandwidth.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

H Half splitWith half-split test access, transmission is interrupted in both the transmit and receivedirections at the test access point, exactly as in full-split access. However, the tester isallowed to inject and look at the transmitted and received signals either in the equipment(towards the end-customer) direction or in the facility (towards the network) direction,but not in both directions simultaneously.

HBERHigh bit error rate - A U interface, E1 interface, HDSL interface or 2 Mbps payloadfailure. The bit error ratio for a certain amount of time is greater than 10-3. HBER issometimes also called excessive bit error ratio.

HDB3High Density Bipolar of Order 3 Code

HDLCHigh Level Data Link Control

HDLC D16 termination positionHigh level data link control termination position - Gives the position of a D16 HDLCtermination within a HDLC termination block. It corresponds to the quarter timeslot #used on ISDN APs which are multiplexed on D-channel packer into one 64 kbpstimeslot. It’s range is 1 to 4.

HDLC termination blockHigh level data link control termination block - A term used for specifying configurationcapabilities of HDLC terminations. It provides one or more HDLC terminations. It’sbandwidth is 64 kbps and it either can be configured as one D64 HDLC termination orfour D16 HDLC terminations.

HDSLHigh-Bit-Rate Digital Subscriber Line

HDSL APHigh bit rate digital subscriber line application pack - An application pack containingHDSL ports that provide service to ISDN PRA subscribers and n×64 kbps digital leasedlines subscribers.

Glossary

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................363-211-585Issue 8, September 2008

GL-29

HDSL application modeHigh bit rate digital subscriber line application mode - The mode in which an HDSLmodule operates. The application mode defines how data is handled and transported bythe HDSL interface. The provisionable application modes supported by an HDSL AP are:

• Single pair mode (SP): Only one HDSL port (pair) is used. 16 HDSL logical timeslots areprovided including timeslot 16. Only one NTU is connected. HDSL logical timeslots 1 to16 are mapped as provisioned one by one to the user timeslots 1 to 16 at the NTU.

• Point-to-point mode (PP): Two HDSL ports (pairs) are used in parallel. 31 HDSL logicaltimeslots are provided including timeslot 16, but timeslot 16 normally is reserved for useby G.703 (PRA or leased lines) services. Only when more than 30 timeslots areprovisioned, HDSL logical timeslot 16 can also be used by other services, for exampleV.35. Only one NTU is connected. HDSL logical timeslots 1 to 31 are mapped asprovisioned one by one to the user timeslots 1 to 31 at the NTU.

• V3 point-to-point mode (V3PP): Two HDSL ports (pairs) are used in parallel. 32 logicaltimeslots are provided including timeslots 0 and 16. All 32 timeslots are used for V3 ISDNPRA service. One NTU is connected to the HDSL AP, which provides the interface forconnecting an ISDN PRA subscriber (PABX).

• Point-to-multipoint mode (PM): Two HDSL ports (pairs) are used, but are connected totwo different NTUs. 32 HDSL logical timeslots are provided, but only 2x15 bearerchannels are available. HDSL logical timeslots 1 to 15 are mapped as provisioned one byone to the user timeslots 1 to 15 at the first NTU. HDSL logical timeslots 17 to 31 aremapped as provisioned one by one to the user timeslots 17 to 31 at the second NTU.HDSL logical timeslots 1 to 15 correspond to HDSL pair 1 and HDSL logical timeslots 17to 31 to HDSL pair 2.

• Unstructured point-to-point mode (UPP): Two HDSL ports (pairs) are used in parallel toprovide an unstructured E1 service via the IO_E1 pack. All 32 timeslots are used. Onlyone NTU is connected.

The provisionable application modes supported by an SHDSL AP are:

• Point-to-point single pair mode (PPS): In this mode, the SHDSL port operates in structuredmode. 32 logical timeslots are available including timeslot 0 and 16. The timeslot 16 isallocated only for G.703 (PRA or leased line) or 31×64 kbps leased line services.

• V3 point-to-point single pair mode (V3PPS): In this mode, the SHDSL port operates instructured mode. 32 logical timeslots are available including timeslot 0 and 16. All 32timeslots are used for V3 ISDN PRA service.

• Multi-rate single pair mode (MRS): This mode enables greater transmission distance at theexpense of maximum subscriber data rate (3×64 kbps to 31×64 kbps). The number ofmulti-rate timeslots″N″, is specified in the ENT-HDSL TL1 command and the SHDSLlogical interface creates N + 1 logical timeslots ranging from 0 to N. There are N payloadtimeslots available on the SHDSL link to carry user data. V.35, V.36, X.21 and G.703leased line services are supported in this mode. There is no support for multiple services.

• Unstructured point-to-point single pair mode (UPPS): In this mode the SHDSL AP is usedto provide an unstructured 2Mbps service via the AP_E1 port or the IO_E1 port. All 32timeslots are used.

Glossary

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................


HDSL dropHigh bit rate digital subscriber line drop - HDSL drop is the physical line. It is alsoused as AID to identify an HDSL port and the location of loopbacks or line tests.

HDSL interfaceHigh bit rate digital subscriber line interface - Includes all functions to realize HDSLtransmission. This includes the HDSL transceivers and the digital subscriber line (DSL).The 2 Mbps payload is transmitted within the HDSL frames. HDSL interface failures areLOF, HBER and LBER.

HDSL linkHigh bit rate digital subscriber line link - Connection between an HDSL module (LTU)and a network termination unit (NTU). Only one HDSL link between an HDSL moduleand a certain NTU is possible. According to this definition the following statementsapply:

• In single pair mode only one HDSL link exists

• In point-to-point mode only one HDSL link exists

• In point-to-multipoint mode two HDSL links exist.See also HDSL application mode.

HDSL logical interfaceHigh bit rate digital subscriber line logical interface - The provisioning entity providingthe logical view of an HDSL module. See also HDSL application mode.

HDSL logical timeslotsHigh bit rate digital subscriber line logical timeslots - The logical resources an HDSLmodule provides. The transmission rate of such an HDSL logical timeslot is 64 kbps.Note that this is only a logical view of resources. It neither reflects the user timeslotsfor example bearer channels of an ISDN PRA) nor the timeslots used in the internalHDSL frame. The latter ones are hidden to the operator. HDSL logical timeslots arevisible at the LINES-layer.

HDSL moduleHigh bit rate digital subscriber line module - Provides the HDSL transmission systemand consists of up to two HDSL ports. Depending on the number of HDSL ports used itprovides 17 or 32 HDSL logical timeslots. It’s properties depend on the provisionedHDSL application mode. The provisioning entity corresponding to the HDSL module iscalled HDSL logical interface. The term HDSL module is a term used by the currentsupplier of HDSL technology.

HDSL overhead bitsHigh bit rate digital subscriber line overhead bits - The HDSL overhead bits (HOH) areembedded in the HDSL frame, which is 6ms long. Besides the synchron word, eoc-,frame and stuffing bits are included.

HDSL pairHigh bit rate digital subscriber line pair - The copper pair connected to an HDSL port. Itprovides duplex transmission on 2-wire metallic local lines with a transmission rate of1168 kbps.

Glossary

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................363-211-585Issue 8, September 2008

GL-31

HDSL payload timeslotsHigh bit rate digital subscriber line payload timeslots - Physical resources provided byan HDSL interface. The transmission rate of an HDSL payload timeslot is 64 kbps. TheHDSL payload timeslots are assigned to HDSL logical timeslots, when the operatorprovisions an ISDN PRA or n×64 kbps digital leased line subscriber.

HDSL portHigh bit rate digital subscriber line port - Refers to the devices and functions built on orprovided by an HDSL AP to support HDSL transmission. Each HDSL port refers to oneHDSL pair. Two HDSL ports are mounted on one HDSL interface to enable atransmission rate of 2×1168 kbps.

Header Error Control interleaved (HEC) anomalyAn HEC anomaly occurs when an ATM cell header error check fails on the interleavedor fast data.

HECHeader Error Control

HEC anomalyA Header Error Control (HEC) anomaly occurs when an ATM cell header error checkfails. HEC anomalies are reported once per ADSL superframe.

High BER on upstream SDSL lineThe SDSL signal received from the CPE is considered to be in a high-BER conditionwhen ten consecutive SESs have occurred. The high-BER condition is cleared when tenconsecutive seconds have occurred that are not SESs. The system tracks SESs for theSDSL signal received from the CPE. An SES for upstream SDSL transmission isobserved when either of the following conditions exists during a given clock second:- If the number of HEC errors (corrected and uncorrected) divided by the number ofcells received is greater than or equal to 0.3, then SES occurs.- If at least one los or lof occurs, then SES occurs.If an auto change in bit rate occurs, start over in both cases.

High bit rate digital subscriber line (HDSL)A method of transmitting T1 over twisted-pair copper lines. Unlike other DSL types,HDSL uses four wires (two pairs). HDSL supports 1.544 Mbps full-duplex transmission.

High-impedance stateThis state refers to the Z interface and implies that the physical Z port circuit isdisabled. Consequently no feeding current can flow from the Z interface to thesubscriber’s terminal, no loop scanning will be performed and no AC signal transmissionis possible.

Hold-up timeThe time during which a power supplies output voltage remains within specificationfollowing the loss of input power.

Hook flashHook flash is a signal of POTS. A hook flash signal is a short interruption ofsubscriber’s loop, which is generated at subscriber’s terminal. Hook flash signals are

Glossary

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................


used to request additional service features (for example establishing a three partytelephone conference).

HWHardware

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

I ICAPIP COMDAC application pack

ICCInterchangeability code - The ICC is of the form Sm:n, where″m″ is the issue numberand ″n″ is the series number. This is used to accurately indicate the interchangeabilityamong packs with the same pack name and apparatus code, but different manufacturingversions. In general, a pack can be replaced by another pack that has the same apparatuscode and the same issue number regardless of the series number. Because TransactionLanguage 1 (TL1) uses the″:″ as a delimiter, for inventory retrieval using TL1 the″:″ isreplaced with a″-″. For example, an ICC will appear as S1:1 on a pack and will appearas S1-1 when retrieved using a TL1 command.

ICLEInitial Customer Laboratory Evaluation

IDIdentification

ID returnThe ID return is an autonomous UART message (AX_UPRESET) from AP to COMDACwhich is sent after a power-up condition or a HW-RESET. This message includes 4 databytes (pack class, pack subclass, number of circuits on AP and front cable presenceinformation).

IDC500/IDC500BHigh Level data Link Control Pack (IO_HDLC)

IEEEInstitute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers

IMInstallation Manual

IMAInverse Multiplexing for ATM

IMA groupAn operational collection of IMA links that functions to multiplex and de-multiplex ATMcells in a cyclical fashion among the links, to form a higher bandwidth logical pathbetween a pair of IMA terminals separated by multiple feeders. The AFME1 pack usesone group and up to eight links, with a direct, one-to-one mapping between the links andfeeders.

Glossary

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................363-211-585Issue 8, September 2008

GL-33

IMA linkA circuit path within the AFME1 that connects its feeder interface with a circuit thatcombines the link’s broadband payload (ATM cells) with the payload of other links, inthe downstream direction, and distributes the composite ATM payload cells among thelinks in the upstream direction.

IMFInfant mortality factor - Ratio of the expected number of failures in the first year ofservice to the expected number of failures in a later, steady-state year. The system infantmortality factor should be computed using methods consistent with the definition of thefirst year multiplier given in TR-332.

In-band signalingThe transfer of signaling data inside the same frequency band with a defined bandwidthas used for voice or voice grade data transmission. The bandwidth for analog subscriberservices is defined between 300 Hz and 3400 Hz.

INITInitialization (a secondary service state) - Initialization, for example during self-test of acircuit pack after insertion.

INIT-SYS commandThe INIT-SYS command is used to clear the database and to restore theAnyMedia®

Access System to default values set at factory.

Initial ringInitial ring is sent from LE to theAnyMedia® Access System. It indicates, that LE wantsto transfer CLIP information in the a/b path to the CPE.

Inrush currentInrush current is the current flowing at the moment when the power is switched on.

Installation timeThe period of time beginning when the transfer of software to the peripheral pack starts.The interval ends at the point when the transfer of the peripheral image to the pack iscompleted for both peripheral processors and field programmable gate array (FPGAs).Peripheral SW version switch over is not included.

Interface IdA unique number of a V5.x interface of an access network element (ANE) which is usedby the common control protocol.

Internal frame relayingV5 frames carrying the Control-, Link control-, PSTN-, Protection- and BCC protocolwhere layer 2 is terminated in the COMDAC are concentrated within a single physicalchannel between the COMDAC and the IO_HDLC which is called the internal framerelay channel.

InventoryInventory is the summary of data stored on a pack in the NVDS during manufacturingwhich is used to identify the pack and its functionality.

Glossary

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................


Inventory managementConsists of a set of functions to track, report, and ensure adequate supplies ofequipment.

Inward directionSee facility pair.

IO_E1Quad E1 Interface Pack

IO_E1Quad E1 interface unit - A circuit pack which terminates four E1 signals.

IO_E1PIO_E1 Protection Pack

IO_E1PQuad E1 interface unit protection - An IO_E1 pack used as protection unit.

IO_HDLCHigh level data link control pack - The pack which performs the frame relaying functionnecessary for ISDN subscribers. Additionally internal frame relaying for V5 layer 3messages is performed.

IPInternet Protocol

IP-AFMIP ATM feeder multiplexer

IPFMIP feeder multiplexer

ISIn Service

ISDNIntegrated Services Digital Network

ISDN APIntegrated services digital network application pack - A pack containing 2B1Q or 4B3TU ports (defined below) that provide service to ISDN BRA subscribers and leased linessubscribers.

ISDN BRAIntegrated services digital network basic rate access - The requested bandwidth at the V5network interface is two bearer channels plus a frame relay over a communicationchannel for the 16-kbps signaling channel (that is a 2×64-kbps bearer channel connectionplus a 16-kbps D-channel). The following type of ISDN BRA subscriber is implementedin the AnyMedia® Access System:

• NT1 outside theAnyMedia® Access System at the CPE.

Glossary

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................363-211-585Issue 8, September 2008

GL-35

ISDN BRA serviceIntegrated services digital network basic rate access service - Connects ISDN BRAsubscribers to the network via dial up connection.

ISDN BRA subscriberIntegrated services digital network basic rate access subscriber - Narrowband digitalsubscriber.

ISDN dial up ROCAn ISDN dial-up ROC is a 64-kbps channel terminating within the COMDAC whichmay be established by normal call build-up procedures (dialing) form outside the ANE.This is achieved by realizing a virtual ISDN port which terminates layer 2 and layer 3ISDN protocols within the COMDAC. For this reason an additional physical channelbetween the COMDAC and the IO_HDLC is provided, where Ds-data frames for thisdedicated ISDN subscriber are transported in both directions. This channel is called ROCsupport D-channel.

ISDN portIntegrated Services digital network port - The definition covers both ISDN BRA andISDN PRA ports.

ISDN PRA serviceIntegrated services digital network primary rate access service - Connects ISDN PRAsubscribers via V5.2 interface to the network. An ISDN PRA service may have up to 30bearer channels and one 64 kbps D-channel.

ISDN PRA subscriberIntegrated services digital network primary rate access subscriber - An ISDN PRAsubscriber has the transmission capability of up to 30 B-channels (30×64 kbps) and oneD-channel (64 kbps) and is connected to a V5.2 interface.

ISDN user portIntegrated services digital network user port - Delivers digital telephony and dataservices to an ISDN subscriber. It is addressed by a logical 13 bit address (envelopefunction address) used in the relevant protocols on the V5.x interface. With respect ofV5.x interface the envelope function address uniquely identifies one ISDN user port.

ISPInternet Service Provider

ITIT is the synonym for a power distribution system having no direct connection to earth,the exposed conductive parts of the electrical installation are connected to a local earth.

ITEIntermediate transmission element - Transmission equipment which connects the DSL tothe NT or LT in order to extend the ISDN BRA or DLL services beyond the maximumdistance of the standard DSL. The ITE can be based on the scheme which converts theinformation and signal carried over the DSL into a format that can be transmitted overanother transmission system (for example E1 facilities) and converts it back into theDSL format at the remote location. The number of ITE between LT and NT is limited to

Glossary

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................


six.

ITUInternational Telecommunication Union

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

J JitterShort-term noncumulative variations of the significant instants of a digital signal fromtheir ideal positions in time.The most significant form of jitter arises from imperfectionsin the circuitry, for example quantizing distortions in phase locked loops (PLL).

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

L LAGLine Access Gateway

LANLocal Area Network

LatencyThe minimum amount of time it takes for a token to circulate around the LAN tokenring or FDDI ring in the absence of a data transmission. Latency is selected whenprovisioning data service in theAnyMedia® Access System.

Layer 3 addressUsed for addressing PSTN ports within the V5.x protocols.

LBERLow bit error rate - A U interface, E1 interface, HDSL interface or 2 Mbps payloadfailure. The bit error ratio for a certain amount of time is greater than 10-6. If LBERhappens the upperlying service on this U interface or on this HDSL interface isdegraded.

LBOLightguide Build Out

LCDLoss of Cell Delineation

LCSLocal Customer Support

LELocal Exchange

LEDLight Emitting Diode

LFPLogical Feeder Port

Glossary

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................363-211-585Issue 8, September 2008

GL-37

LIFLink ID check failed (a secondary service state) - The defined V5 link IDs onAnyMedia® Access System side and on switch side are different.

Lightguide build out (LBO)An attenuation network for optical signals between ATM circuit packs in an ATM switchor multiplexer and the AFMOs in an AnyMedia Mainshelf, or between separate AFMOsin multiple AnyMedia Mainshelves in a daisy chain. LBO guarantees the proper signallevel.

Line stateThe current state of the U interface or of the HDSL interface.

The most important states of the U interface are the deactivated state, activated state(U interface and S/T interface) and U interface activated only. Other states areloopback 1 or LOF/LOS. The line state of the U interface depends on

• the progress of the activation/deactivation procedure

• the state of the LMAN

• loopbacks and tests

• the maintenance bits.

The most important states of the HDSL interface are inactive and active-Tx/Rx state.Other states are loopback 1 or LOF. The line state of the HDSL interface depends on

• the progress of the HDSL start-up procedure

• the state of the LMAN

• loopbacks and tests

• the HDSL overhead bits.

LinkIn the V5 context a 2.048-Mbps interface to the local exchange whose physical andelectrical characteristic comply with ITU recommendation G.703 and whose functionalcharacteristics are according to ITU G.704 and G.706.

Link control protocolThis protocol provides the necessary procedures for performing a coordinated LINKmanagement at both sides of the V5.2 interface. It provides the following mechanisms:

• Coordinated 2 Mbps links blocking: Required to perform link administrative operations inboth NEs (AN and LE) with a minor impact in the subscriber service, and also to assure asynchronized link failure recovery in case of misalignment of the failure recoverypersistency detectors at both ends of the Network Interface.

• Coordinated 2Mbps links unblocking: Required to start, in an orderly way, the linkoperation, after either an administrative operation or after recovery of a link failure.

• Coordinated Link identification and continuity verification: Required, for example, atinstallation and after failure recovery to verify, by TS0 continuity check mechanisms, thecorrect link interconnection.

Glossary

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................


LLLeased line - A permanent established connection between a user port and a separatepermanent leased line service network. Leased lines bypass the LE.

LMANLine circuit metallic access network - Part of the line circuit on the ISDN AP and on theHDSL AP. On the ISDN AP the LMAN connects or disconnects the a- and b-wire withthe line circuit or the line pack bus (LPB). On the HDSL AP the LMAN connects ordisconnects one HDSL pair with the line circuit or the line pack bus (LPB). Each U portand each HDSL port include one LMAN.

LOALoss Of Alignment

LoadThe total number of call attempts offered to a telecommunication system during a giveninterval of time.

Load A0.7 Erlang average occupancy on all V5.2 bearer channels; represents the normal uppermean level of traffic load, as defined in ITU Recommendation Q.543.

Load B1.2 * Load A = 0.84 Erlang average occupancy on all V5.2 bearer channels; representsan increased level beyond the normal upper mean traffic load level as defined in ITURecommendation Q.543.

Load imageThe site-independent COMDAC software. It includes customer/country-specific constantdata. The load image resides in the COMDACs program storage.

Load setThe load image plus the site-dependent configuration data.

Local loginLogin into theAnyMedia® Access System via the CIT or External System LAN 10BaseTinterface from the collocated GSI or dumb terminal.

Local poweringThe AnyMedia® Access System is supplied from a power plant (which covers -48V DCpower and ringing generator) delivered with theAnyMedia® Access System.

Local VPA VP that is cross-connected at the VP level on the AFM.

LOFLoss of frame - A LOF condition is declared when an out of frame (OOF) conditionpersists for t seconds.

LOF on ADSL lineADSL frame synchronization has been lost at the ADSL for at least 2.5 seconds.

Glossary

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................363-211-585Issue 8, September 2008

GL-39

LOF on upstream SDSL lineThe SDSL signal from the CPE is considered to be in a LOF condition after 2.5 0.5seconds of contiguous lof defect. The LOF condition is cleared when 10 0.5 secondshave occurred that do not have the lof defect. The loss of cell delineation (LOCD) eventcounter data is mapped to lof. The firmware collects this 0.5-second interval data. Ifthere are 2.5 seconds of contiguous lof, it is considered to be LOF. This LOCD eventcounter data is accumulated and reported on a 15-minute and 1-day basis.

Logical feeder portAn entity used to address an SDH or SONET path or a protection group. The logicalfeeder port concept allows addressing of attributes or entities that are common to allphysical feeder ports associated with the logical feeder port and that are independent ofsimplex or duplex mode. The AFME3/DS3 and the AFMO have two logical feeder ports.

Logical line identityFor logical addressing of an end-customer termination either associated to a V5.1 or aV5.2 interface.

Logical linkA logical entity providing 31 64-kbps timeslots which is associated to a 2.048-Mbpsinterface. One (V5.1) or more links (only V5.2) may be related to a V5.x interface.

Loop timedThe AnyMedia® Access System is synchronized by the clock derived from the E1 link.

LOPLoss of pointer - A LOP is declared when a valid pointer can not be obtained using thepointer interpretation rules for SONET/SDH.

LOSLoss of signal - E1/E3 LOS condition is declared if N consecutive no pulses arereceived. Station clock (SC) LOS condition is declared if N consecutive no pulses arereceived.

LOS on ADSL lineReceived power has dropped to 6 dB below the reference power. The timing threshold isas follows:

• Downstream: 1.5 seconds

• Upstream: 2.5 seconds.

LOS on upstream SDSL lineThe loss of signal interrupts are timed, accumulated, and stored and are mapped to los.The loss of signal timeout (LOST) is used to time the los. If the LOST bit is set, then itis a LOS condition. The firmware collects this data, accumulates it, and reports thenumber of los occurrences on a 15-minute and 1-day basis. The LOS failure parameter isthe accumulated los.

LPA400Apparatus Code of one ADSL application pack with 4 ADSL subscriber ports and POTSsplitters

Glossary

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................


LPA400BApparatus Code of one ADSL application pack with 4 ADSL subscriber ports and POTSsplitters

LPA408Apparatus Code of one ADSL application pack with 8 ADSL subscriber ports and POTSsplitters

LPA414Apparatus Code of one ADSL application pack with 4 ADSL subscriber ports and ISDNsplitters

LPA416Apparatus Code of one ADSL application pack with 16 ADSL subscriber ports andPOTS splitters

LPA417Apparatus Code of one ADSL application pack with 16 ADSL subscriber ports and ISDNsplitters

LPA420Apparatus Code of one ADSL application pack with 16 ADSL2+ subscriber ports andPOTS splitters

LPA432Apparatus Code of one ADSL32p application pack with 32 ADSL-interfaces and 32 highpass filters for Z ports; G.992.1, Annex A

LPA434Apparatus Code of one ADSL32i application pack with 32 ADSL-interfaces and 32 highpass filters for Z ports; ANSI T1.413 Issue 2 Annex B and ITU-T G.992.1, Annex B

LPA438Apparatus Code of one ADSL32i application pack with 32 ADSL subscriber ports. TheLPA438 supports ADSL standards ADSL2 (ITU-T G.992.3 Annex B) and ADSL2+(ITU-T G.992.5 Annex B).

LPA832Apparatus Code of one P32A32 application pack with 32 subscriber ports for POTS andADSL simultaneously, as well as POTS only or ADSL only

LPA833Apparatus Code of one P32A32 application pack with 32 subscriber ports for POTS andADSL simultaneously, as well as POTS only or ADSL only (with internal splitter onboard). The LPA833 supports also the ADSL2 and ADSL2+.

LPA900Apparatus Code of one ATM Feeder Multiplexer for DS3

LPA901Apparatus Code of one ATM Feeder Multiplexer for DS3; Duplex-capable

Glossary

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................363-211-585Issue 8, September 2008

GL-41

LPA910Apparatus Code of one ATM Feeder Multiplexer for E3

LPA911Apparatus Code of one ATM Feeder Multiplexer for E3; Duplex-capable

LPBLine pack bus - The physical part between the board metallic access network (BMAN)and the line circuit metallic access network (LMAN) on the ISDN AP and on the HDSLAP. It can connect the LMAN with the BMAN. The LPB exists one time on an ISDN APand on an HDSL AP.

LPBKLoop Back

LPBKLoopback (a secondary service state) - A loopback for E1, HDSL, or ISDN is initiated.

LPP100A per port programmable POTS application pack with 24 Z ports supporting 24 analogsubscriber lines. The LPP100 supports periodic pulse metering.

LPS501Apparatus Code of one HDSL application pack

LPS503Apparatus Code of one HDSL application pack; Supports V3

LPS504Apparatus Code of one HDSL application pack; Supports V3 and Unstructured LeasedLines

LPS510Apparatus Code of one SHDSL application pack

LPS702Apparatus Code of one SHDSL application pack with 16 SHDSL ports for ATM basedservices (with 16PAM Coding)

LPS716Apparatus Code of one SDSL application pack

LPU112An ISDN application pack with 12 line circuits per pack. It supports 12 U interfaceswith 2B1Q line coding and remote power.

LPU112Apparatus Code of one ISDN application pack with 12 U Ports

LPU430An ISDN application pack with 16 line circuits per pack. It supports 16 U interfaceswith 4B3T line coding and remote power.

Glossary

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................


LPU430Apparatus Code of one ISDN application pack with 16 U Ports

LPZ100A per pack programmable POTS application pack with 32 Z ports supporting 32 analogsubscriber lines.

LPZ100Apparatus Code of one POTS application pack with 32 Z-interfaces

LPZ110Apparatus Code of one POTS application pack with 32 Z-interfaces and 32 Low PassFilters for Z Ports; G.992.1, Annex A

LTLine termination - The equipment that terminates the access transmission system on thenetwork side.

LTULine termination unit - The LTU is located at the network side of an HDSL link and actsas the master.

LTULine Termination Unit

LVDLow Voltage Disconnect

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

M M-channelMaintenance-channel - Comprises 48 bits of a superframe on the 2B1Q U interface. Theduration of a superframe is 12 ms. 24 Bits are used for EOC channel, 12 bits foroverhead bits and 12 bits for check sum. In case of a 4B3T U interface the M-channelconsists only of one bit, which is transported with a bit rate of 1 kbps.

MACMedia Access Control

MainshelfSeeAnyMediaMainshelf.

Maintenance conditionAn entity with a maintenance condition is insane. The maintenance condition is reflectedin the secondary service state.

Managed NTUA 2B1Q ISDN digital subscriber line network termination unit which is fully managedby the AnyMedia® Access System. The NTU provides the subscriber a single channeloperating at one of many speeds, depending on the NTU type and configuration, from1.2 kbps through to 128 kbps.

Glossary

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................363-211-585Issue 8, September 2008

GL-43

Management information base (MIB)See“MIB” (p. GL-44)

Management InterfaceThe Management Interface is a package of software that is used for managing traditionalDLC services and ATM xDSL services.The Management Interface allows the user toprovision a single NE at a time through its GSI, while simultaneously monitoring alarmsof multiple NEs through its Network Maintenance Manager. It is installed on a personalcomputer running under the Windows operating system.

Manual switchRefers to an EMS or GSI initiated TL1 command that instructs the system to perform aprotection switch only if the protection pack is functional.

Manual switch backRefers to an EMS or GSI initiated TL1 command that instructs the system to perform aswitch back to the service pack (only 1:N protection).

Maximum burst size (MBS)Specifies the largest burst of data above the insured rate that will be allowed temporarilyon an ATM PVC, but will not be dropped at the edge by the traffic policing function,even if it exceeds the maximum rate.In the signaling message, the burst tolerance is conveyed through the MBS, which iscoded as a number of cells. The burst tolerance together with the sustainable cell rateand the generic cell rate algorithm determine the MBS that may be transmitted at thepeak rate and still be in conformance with the generic cell rate algorithm.

MBSMaximum Burst Size

MCUMonitor and Control Unit

MDFMain Distribution Frame

MEAMismatched equipment assignment (a secondary service state) - Pack type mismatch;that is provisioning and equipped circuit pack do not match.

mesh-BNMeshed Bonding network

mesh-IBNMeshed isolated Bonding network

MGCPMedia gateway control protocol according to RFC3435

MIBManagement information base - Declaration of a collection of objects that defines thenetwork or network element for a given interface protocol. For example, there is a MIB

Glossary

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................


defined for access using the simple network management protocol (SNMP) and adifferent MIB defined for access using the protocol of the GR-303 Embedded OperationsChannel (EOC).

Minimum bit rateThe minimum rate at which the ADSL, SDSL, and SHDSL link will train, upstream anddownstream. This rate is used to in determining whether a new connection can beadmitted to the shelf.

Mismatch of equipment and attributes (MEA) alarmThis alarm signals that the equipped pack and its provisioning do not match. The alarmis cleared either by deleting the cross-connect or by replacing the pack with one thatsupports the service category.

Mixed ISDN/POTS modeAn operation mode of theAnyMedia® Access System where ISDN and POTS service ispossible. Because of ISDN subscribers are provided, the frame relay function has to beperformed. Therefore at least one IO_HDLC pack is necessary (optionally a second onefor protection). V5 communication channel information is frame relayed on theIO_HDLC pack and routed towards ISDN subscribers (for ISDN D-channel information)and to the COMDAC (for V5 layer 3 protocols) respectively.

Mixed serviceThe capability to split the 2-Mbps payload of the HDSL interface at the NTU to a G.703for ISDN PRA service and to a leased line port (V.35/V.36/X.21) for VLL/GLL service.The used timeslots of the G.703 port are routed to the V5.2 interface, while the 64 kbpstimeslots used for VLL/GLL service are routed to 2-Mbps leased line links.

MJMajor

MNMinor

MNIMultiple Network Interface

MONMonitoring (a secondary service state) - For ISDN or HDSL subscribers; external error.For example layer1 not possible to activate or HBER.

MONMonitoring

MonitoringThe operator can hear to the subscriber while the circuit is still operational and inbridged state. Additionally a speech connection can be established to allow to talk to thecustomer.

MRSMulti-Rate Single pair

Glossary

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................363-211-585Issue 8, September 2008

GL-45

MSPMultiplex Section Protection

MTBFMean time between failures - The average time that the system remains operationalbetween consecutive failures. The MTBF is usually expressed in years. In general,MTBF = MTTF + MTTR where MTTF is the mean time to failure, and MTTR is themean time to repair.

MTIEMaximum time interval error - The maximum peak-to-peak delay variation of a giventiming signal with respect to an ideal timing signal within a particular time period.

MTTFMean time to failure -The average time that the system remains operational betweenconsecutive failures, outage duration for repair or maintenance activities takes not intoconsideration. The MTTF is usually expressed in years.

MTTRMean time to repair - The average time that the system remains out of service until it isrepaired. MTTR is usually expressed in hours.

Multi-linkA collection of more than one 2.048-Mbps link which together make up a V5.2 interface(although a V5.2 interface needs not to have more than one 2.048-Mbps link).

MultiframeA cyclic set of consecutive frames in which the relative position of each frame can beidentified.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

N NACNot accessible (a secondary service state) - The entity is not accessible, for example if apack is faulty or unequipped, then all related drops are not accessible.

NAMNavis AnyMediaElement Management System (SW) - Represents computing facilities,specialized software and data storage facilities used to administer and maintain multiplenetwork elements (NEs) distributed over a wide geographical area from a centralizedlocation. Communication in both directions is accomplished via TL1 messages.

Narrowband servicesNarrowband services typically include POTS services, permanent leased line (PLL) andISDN as well as n-times 64 kbps to 2 Mbps services.

Narrowband subsystemThat part of theAnyMedia® Access System which supports narrowband services.

NASNot associated (a secondary service state) - The line termination on theAnyMedia®

Access System side is provisioned but the cross-connection to a network interface (V5,

Glossary

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................


LL,...) is not provisioned yet.

NCDNo Cell Delineation

NCD anomalyAn No Cell Delineation (NCD) anomaly occurs immediately after ATM cell start-upwhen ATM data are allocated to the buffer and as long as the cell delineation processoperating on these data is not in the SYNC state. Once cell delineation is acquired,subsequent losses of cell delineation shall be considered LCD defects. The performancemanagement parameter NCD is applicable for ADSL.

NCPNetwork connection point - NCP is the point at subscriber site on which subscriber’sinstallation and subscriber’s line are connected.

NENetwork Element

NE nameThe network element (NE) name is a unique provisioned name given to an AnyMediashelf. This name is identified by the GSI as the site ID.

Near endTermination of an external link at the access network element (ANE) site.

NEBENear end block errors - Bit errors in the upstream direction from the NTU to the LTU.They are recognized with the help of the CRC checksum in the maintenance channel orin the HDSL overhead channel received from the NTU.

Network failureA network failure (NF) is a failure within the network side. This includes failures withinthe NTU. After a failure happened, a″Block message″ is sent via V5 interface to theLE. Afterwards the failure/failure combination is analyzed and mapped to either anetwork failure or user failure and reported via V5 interface to the LE. See also userfailure.

Network maintenance managerThe network maintenance manager is part of the management interface package ofsoftware that is used to monitor alarms over multiple NEs. The network maintenancemanager allows a user to choose which NEs to monitor, to filter viewed alarms, and tomanage the display of these alarms.

NICNew Installation Concept - NIC makes use of small module containers on the MDFequipped with very compact application specific modules which are connected viasystem cables to the AnyMedia Access System.

Glossary

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................363-211-585Issue 8, September 2008

GL-47

Non-real time variable bit rate (nrt-VBR)A service category for data traffic that has no fixed timing relationships but has aguaranteed QoS. Statistical multiplexing is provided to make optimum use of networkresources.

Non-revertive modeA certain protected system resource which has become faulty and thus caused a switchto or a replacement by a certain other (standby) resource is NOT reused automatically ifthe (temporarily) faulty resource returns back to operation. Instead of this the standbyresource is used further on. A switch back may take place later on, but is independentfrom the recovery of the (temporarily) faulty resource.Examples:a) If a reference clock switch between COMDAC phase locked loop (PLL) referenceclock inputs has occurred due to a failure condition, the will not automatically return tothe primary reference, even if the failure condition has cleared.b) V5.2 protection switching of communication channels.

Non-service-affectingRefers to a condition not affecting the service (for example telephony) at the time it isdetected.

NOPNot operational (a secondary service state) - The entity is not operational because afailure condition on a lower layer exists, for example a circuit pack failure.

Normal modeRefers to the mode of changing to administrative primary service state OOS.In normalmode service functions are possible as long as the resources provided for service are stillbusy. If the resources get idle the service state OOS is entered automatically.

Normal polarityCustomer-specific definition of the feeding polarity. Some customers define normalpolarity as a-wire is more negative with respect to b-wire. Other customers definenormal polarity as b-wire is more negative with respect to a-wire.

NOSNetwork Out Of Service

nrt-VBRNon-real time variable bit rate

NSANon-Service Affecting

NSFNetwork side failed (a secondary service state) - The related network interface (V5, LL,...) has a failure and is not operational.

NTNetwork termination - The equipment that terminates the access transmission system onthe customer side. The most known network termination device is the NT1, that provides

Glossary

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................


only physical layer functionality. Other network termination devices with morefunctionality are NT-N or NT-a/b.

NT1Network Termination Type 1

NTPNetwork Time Protocol

NTRNetwork Timing Reference

NTUNetwork termination unit - The NTU is located at the customer side of an HDSL linkand acts as the slave. The NTU terminates the HDSL access transmission system on thecustomer side.

NVDSNonvolatile data storage - NVDS refers to that part of the database which is retainedeven after a power failure, for example provision parameters.

NVPSNonvolatile program storage - NVPS refers to nonvolatile memory on COMDAC and onAFM used to store the load image.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

O OAMOperations, Administration, Maintenance

OAM&POperations, Administration, Maintenance, and Provisioning

ObjectSee entity.

OC-3Optical Carrier Level 3 (155.52 Mbps)

OCDOut Of Cell Delineation

Off-hookIn the off-hook state the telephone is picked up. The off-hook state indicates the busystate.

OLIUOptical Line Interface Unit

On-demand testsOn-demand tests will be executed only by an operator TL1 command.

Glossary

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................363-211-585Issue 8, September 2008

GL-49

On-hookIn the on-hook state the telephone is not picked up. The on-hook state indicates the idlestate.

OOFOut of frame - The OOF condition is assumed, when three consecutive incorrect framealignment signals have been received.

OOSOut Of Service

Operational conditionReflects whether the entity concerned is able to take over operation or not. It depends onthe service state and may be one of the following:

• An entity is operational if the service state of the entity is IS (without any secondaryservice state), IS-SHD or OOS-SHD, that means, no failure is present.

• An entity is not operational in all other cases.

Originating callOriginating call is the type of call initiated at the subscriber side of the network userinterface. It comprises the build-up, speech and the tear-down phase. For a POTS callfor example it starts with the recognition of an off-hook by the application pack (AP)and sending a seizure message to the LE.

OSPOutside Plant

Out-band signalingFor transferring of signaling information bandwidth beside the voice transmission band(300 ... 3400 Hz) of the same transmission path is used.

OutageThe state of a system typically characterized by loss of traffic or the ability to control orreconfigure the system.

Outage durationThe length of time an outage exists.

Outage frequencyThe average number of outages the system experiences per unit time.

Outward directionSee equipment pair.

OverloadAny load which is greater than the nominal load for which the system is required towork without any performance degradation.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

P P-AISPath Alarm Indication Signal

Glossary

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................


PackSee circuit pack

Pack classPack class defines the general class of APs. This code is an 1 byte NON-ASCII codewhich maps for example to POTS AP (Z interface packs), ISDN AP (U interface packs),etc. The pack class is hard coded in the pack FW and is not visible for the operator. Seealso pack subclass.

Pack subclassPack subclass defines the specific type of a pack. This code is an 1 byte NON-ASCIIcode which maps for example to LPZ100 or LPP100. The pack subclass is hard coded inthe pack FW and is not visible for the operator. See also pack class.

Pack typeDifferent pack types can be plugged in the AP slots of theAnyMedia® Access System:

• ISDN AP (LPU112 for 2B1Q U interface, LPU430 for 4B3T U interface)

• POTS AP (LPZ100, LPP100)

• ATM xDSL pack (AFME3, AFMDS3, AFME1, AFMO, ADSL4i AP, ADSL4p AP,ADSL8p AP, ADSL16i AP, ADSL16p AP, ADSL32i AP, ADSL32p AP, SDSL16 AP,SHDSL16 AP)

• TEST AP (TAP10x)

• HDSL AP (LPS501, LPS503, LPS504)

Partial packet discard (PPD)In severe ATM traffic congestion, the traffic manager discards packets arriving from anyconnection, regardless of whether or not the traffic on the connection is exceeding itsbandwidth. The traffic manager discards all remaining cells in the packet, even if thesevere congestion clears in the meantime.

PasswordCharacter string used to authenticate the identity of a user. The password should consistof 6 to 10 case sensitive alphanumeric characters, it should be changed frequently, it isstored and transmitted in an encrypted form.

PayloadInterface rate minus frame overhead. This is the net capability for information transferprovided for the next lowest level of the digital signal hierarchy.

PCDPassive Clock Distribution

PCMPulse Code Modulation

PCRPeak Cell Rate

PDHPlesiochronous Digital Hierarchy

Glossary

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................363-211-585Issue 8, September 2008

GL-51

Peak cell rate (PCR)A traffic parameter measured in cells per second that specifies the maximum number ofcells that can be transmitted on an ATM network. PCR defines the shortest periodbetween two cells.

Performance managementConsists of a set of functions to evaluate and report on the behavior of telecommunica-tion equipment and the effectiveness of the network and/or network elements (NEs).

PFCPower factor correction - Standard AC/DC converters draw line current in pulses aroundthe peaks in line voltage. This may be undesirable for several reasons. PFC circuitsensure that the line current is drawn sinusoidally and in phase with the sinusoidal linevoltage.

PFPPhysical Feeder Port

PFUPower Filter Unit - A PFU is a pack accommodating two internal filters for dual powerdistribution to theAnyMediaMainshelf.

PFU501Apparatus Code of a Power Filter Unit

Physical feeder linkAn E1 link between theAnyMedia® Access System and a service node.

Physical feeder portCorresponds to the physical termination of the optical feeder. The physical feeder portconcept allows the addressing of SDH physical medium, regenerator section, andmultiplex section layer entities (or SONET physical medium, section, and line layerentities). AnAnyMediashelf has two physical feeder ports when using one AFMO insimplex mode and four physical feeder ports when using 2 AFMOs in duplex mode.

Physical layer convergence protocol (PLCP)The IEEE 802.6 standard that defines the physical layer that adapts the actualcapabilities of the underlying physical network to provide the services required by theATM layer.

PIDProgram identification code - Identifies the version of firmware on one or more deviceson the pack.

PlatformItems and functions in SW, HW and FW which are independent of the application.

PLCPPhysical Layer Convergence Protocol

Glossary

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................


PLLPermanent leased line - These lines may be analog (ALL) or digital (DLL). They are notswitched services and are not carried to the LE through V5 interface but on specialseparate 2-Mbps links.

PMPoint-to-Multipoint

PortRefers to the devices and functions built on or provided by a pack for one subscriber orline interface; sometimes referenced as circuit.

Port control protocolThis protocol provides the necessary procedures for a coordinated PSTN and ISDN userport management. It includes the following mechanisms:

• Coordinated user port blocking with the responsibility at the LE to support the service,because LE has the knowledge about the port call state. Therefore theAnyMedia® AccessSystem shall only perform hard blocking of user ports in case of failure conditions.

• Coordinated user port unblocking is a symmetrical procedure (unlike blocking).

POTSPlain old telephone service - Analog telephony service via a copper pair.

POTS APPlain old telephone service application pack - A pack containing Z ports that provideservice to analog subscriber interfaces.

POTS subscriberPlain old telephone service subscriber - Analog telephony subscriber.

POTS-only modeAn operation mode of theAnyMedia® Access System where only POTS service ispossible. Since no ISDN subscribers are provided, no frame relay function has to beperformed. Therefore no IO_HDLC pack is necessary. V5 communication channels viaTSI are connected directly to the COMDAC where they are terminated.

PPPoint-to-Point

PPDPartial Packet Discard

ppmparts per million

PPMPeriodic pulse metering - The LE provides the transmission of charging information tosubscriber’s home meter equipment. Charging information will be carried as periodicpulses via subscriber’s line.

Glossary

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................363-211-585Issue 8, September 2008

GL-53

PPSPoint-to-Point Single pair

PRAPrimary Rate Access

PRCPrimary Reference Clock

Pre-definedWhen a parameter is stated as being pre-defined the parameter is not required to beprovisioned via the TL1 interface. The parameter is either intrinsically provided withinthe AnyMedia® Access System or within the customer specific data set. A pre-definedparameter may take one of several values depending on the operator.

Pre-provisioningThe ability of provisioning the complete system without the existence of the completesystem hardware. Only the basic equipment is required.

Primary linkThe 2.048-Mbps link in a multi-link V5.2 interface whose physical communicationchannel in timeslot 16 carries a communication path for the protection protocol and, onV5.2 initialization, also the communication path for the control protocol, link controlprotocol, and the BCC protocol. Other communication paths may also be carried in thetimeslot 16.

Primary reference signalThe AnyMedia® Access System can use two timing inputs to synchronize the COMDACphase locked loop (PLL). The preferred reference is called primary reference and thealternate reference is called secondary reference.

Privileged userUser login allows access to all TL1 commands and GSI capabilities.

Procedural errorsMan made operation failures.

Protected configurationThe protection pack is provisioned but may be faulty or moved to OOS by the operator.

Protected packA pack for which there is a backup. Protection may be one-to one, or it may beone-to-more-than-one (1:n).

Protection group 1This is the standard group of physical communication channels consisting of theprotected logical communication channel on the primary link and the protecting standbychannel on the secondary link of a V5.2 interface, each located in timeslot 16.

Protection group 2This is an optional protection group of a V5.2 interface, consisting of up to 3 standbycommunication channels, serving as protecting channels for all logical communication

Glossary

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................


channels, not included in protection group 1.

Protection packIdentifies the pack which is responsible for providing protection for the service pack(s).In 1:N protection configuration it is a dedicated pack providing protection for the servicepacks. In 1:1 protection configuration it is the pack currently not carrying the service.

Protection permissionAn indication for a service pack which reflects whether the pack concerned is allowed toperform an automatic protection switch or not (inhibited).

Protection physical channelA physical timeslot used for carrying a logical communication channel or used forprotection of these logical communication channels. In the first case the protectionphysical channel is active and in the second case the protection physical channel isstandby.

Protection protocolThis protocol provides the procedures for protecting the communication channels, that isthose TSs carrying the signaling paths, that are established between the LE and the AN(but it does not provide any mechanism to protect the subscriber payload paths).

The protocol offers to the LE mechanisms to

• command, after a failure detection, the switch-over of a protected communication channelunit (logical CC) to a protecting one (physical CC).

• command by operator request the switch-over of a protected communication channel unit(logical CC) to a protecting one or protected (by pre-emption of the hosted logicalC-channel) one. This operation is only applicable to PG2.

• reset the transmission sequence number, upon detecting a misalignment of state variablesor at system start-up.

and allows theAnyMedia® Access System to perform the following operations:

• request, after a failure detection, the switch-over of a protected communication channelunit (logical CC) to a protecting one (physical CC).

• reset the transmission sequence number, upon detecting a misalignment of state variables.

Protection statusAn indication which reflects the actual state of the pack protection.

Protection switchA switch of the service from the service pack to the protection pack. A protection switchcan be requested manually or driven by pack fault.

Protection switch disabledProtection pack is in administrative primary service state OOS.

Protection switchingA reliability feature that causes service to switch to the backup equipment during faultsor testing.

Glossary

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................363-211-585Issue 8, September 2008

GL-55

ProvisioningThe process of providing the system with parameters needed to realize a specificcustomer and site specific behavior.

Provisioning variantThe provisioning variant is a unique label of a complete provisioning data set appliedvia the TL1 interface. These provisioning data sets must be provisioned and if necessarychanged (on ANE side by TL1 commands) consistently at both sides LE and ANE. Thesechanges have no impact on the provisioning variant. Switching over from one to anotherprovisioning variant (and thus changing the provisioning data set) is done by using thecommon control protocol.

PRUPower Rectifier Unit

PSD of ADSL transmissionThe actual ADSL transmit power level. This value may be lower than the provisionedPSDM.

PSDMPower Spectral Density Mask

PSDM of ADSL transmissionA provisionable value representing the maximum allowed ADSL transmit power level.The ADSL transceiver may choose a lower power level based on line conditions.

PSESP-bit Severely Errored Seconds

PSTNPublic Switched Telephone Network

PSTN user portPublic switched telephone network - Delivers analog telephony and data services to aPOTS subscriber. It is addressed by a logical layer 3 address used in the relevantprotocols on the V5.x interface. With respect of V5.x interface the layer 3 addressuniquely identifies one PSTN user port.

PVCPermanent virtual connection - A logical dedicated connection between two user ports ina point-to-point configuration.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Q QMCQUICC Multi-channel Controller

QMSQuality Management System

Glossary

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................


Quality of service (QoS)An indicator of the performance of a transmission system on the Internet and othernetworks. QoS is measured in transmission rate, error rates, latency, and othercharacteristics.

QUICCQuad Integrated Communications Controller

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

R RADSLRate Adaptive Digital Subscriber Line

RAIRemote alarm indication (a secondary service state) - The far end reports that it hasdetected a failure in its downstream direction.

RAMRandom Access Memory

RBLRemote blocked (a secondary service state) - Same as BLK, but used for V5 links.

RCPRack Connection Panel

RDIRemote defect indication - Indicates that the far end has detected an incoming failure ofan interface.

RDSRunning digital sum - An error counter which counts the frames with at least one linecode violation. It counts the errors which are detected in upstream as well as indownstream direction.

READSLReach Extended ADSL - A new member of the ADSL2 family. READSL extends thereach of ADSL technology as much as 3,000 feet. That means a data rate of e.g. 768kbps at 19,000 feet. This increased loop reach is achieved by transmitting at higher PSD(Power Spectral Density) levels while using less frequency bandwidth than ADSL2.

Real-time variable bit rate (rt-VBR)A service category with strict cell transfer and delay variation demands and cell lossrequirements.

RegeneratorA transmission device between LT and NT. It enhances the transmission distancebetween LT and the NT. The regenerator is remote powered from the LT and is poweringthe NT. In ETR080 the number of regenerator between LT and NT is due to reasons ofpowering limited to one.

Glossary

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................363-211-585Issue 8, September 2008

GL-57

Register recallUsed to report to the LE that a hook flash has happened at the subscriber interface.

RelationshipA dependence between two entities concerning the operational condition where theoperational condition of one entity depends on the operational condition of anotherentity. The relationship may be of two types:

• hierarchical relationship according to the provisioning and resource view where upperlyingentities depend on underlying entities; that is underlying entities have to be provisionedfirst. This also implies that the operational condition of an upperlying entity depends on theoperational condition of an underlying entity. If a pack is in a protected configuration, theEQUIPMENT-layer entity has more than one relationship to underlying PACKS-layerentities. The operational condition of the upperlying EQIPMENT layer entity is″operational″, if at least one underlying entity is also″operational″ and available for aprotection switch.

• control relationship not necessarily a relationship between entities of different layers as thehierarchical relationship. It is a relationship of two entities where the operational conditionof one of the entities (controlled entity) depends on the operational condition of the other(controlling) entity in such a way that the operational condition of the controlled entity isonly ″operational″ if the operational condition of the controlling entity is also″operational″.

Remote loginLogin into theAnyMedia® Access System via LAN, ROC, or External System LAN(over TCP/IP DCN) from EMS or GSI.

Remote power feedingRefers to the power feeding of the NT/REG by the ISDN AP. Normal powering andrestricted powering mode are distinguished. In the restricted powering mode the polarityof the feeding voltage at the S/T interface is reverse.

Normal powering mode:

• In the normal powering mode, the NT (and an optional regenerator) receive power fromthe ISDN AP. The power for all subscriber terminals on the subscriber side of theS/T interface is supplied from a mains-operated power supply unit at the CPE.

Restricted powering mode:

• The restricted powering mode occurs, when the main power at the CPE is lost. In this casethe ISDN AP must provide power for the NT (and an optional regenerator) and also to asingle designated restricted mode terminal on the subscriber side of the S/T interface.

Reports-only user - ATM xDSLUser login that allows access to GET messages for retrieving system information andtraps. Reports-only users do not have access to any SNMP messages that create, changeor remove service or to any security messages that affect other users.

Reports-only user - narrowbandUser login allows access to a limited set of TL1 commands for retrieving systeminformation and autonomous messages. Reports-only users do not have access to anyTL1 commands that create, change or remove service or to any security commands that

Glossary

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................


affect other users.

ResistibilityThe ability of telecommunication equipment or a network to withstand the effects ofcertain electrical, magnetic and electromagnetic phenomena.

Retrofit proceduresMigrating from an oldAnyMedia® Access System configuration to a new one may leadto changes in the database. Since the content of the old database should be kept aftermigration the database is transformed after recovery of the new configuration. This isdone by transformation procedures, also called database evolution.

Reverse polarityDefined as opposite to normal polarity, that means the feeding polarity is reverse.

RFCPSubrack for Fuse Panel and Connection Panel

RFIRemote Failure Indication

RFI on ADSL lineADSL frame synchronization has been lost at the CPE for at least 1.5 seconds.

RFPRack Fuse Panel

RFURinging Filter Unit

RGPRinging Generator Pack - The RGP is a dual slot ringing generator pack, which may beplugged in slot 40/41 and slot 42/43 of the AnyMedia LAG Shelf. The RGP in slot40/41 drives ringing bus 0, while the RGP in slot 42/43 drives ringing bus 1.

RGURinging Generator Unit - A pack providing the ringing voltage needed for POTSapplications.

Ringing protection modeTwo ringing sources (external or internal) on the AnyMedia LAG System are working inactive/active protection mode. Each one provides a ringing voltage to a separate ringingbus. The power ringing is taken by the POTS APs from the ringing bus according to theload sharing scheme. If one ringing voltage on one ringing bus fails, all POTS AP takethe ringing voltage from the remaining operational ringing bus.

RMSRoot mean square - The root mean square value of an electrical measured quantity.

ROCRemote operations channel - A bearer channel over a leased-line 2.048-Mbps link orover V5.x interface that conveys management information for a remote system

Glossary

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................363-211-585Issue 8, September 2008

GL-59

(AnyMedia® Access System). The ROC is expected to be used when the system isinstalled at locations where no separate network (for example LAN Ethernet) exists.

ROC support D-channelThe channel which carries the ISDN D-channel signaling Information for(de-)establishing the ISDN dial-up ROC.

RouterA LAN/WAN device that operates at OSI layers 1 (physical), 2 (data link), and 3(network). Distinguished from a bridge by its capability to switch and route data basedupon network protocols such as IP.

Routine switchRefers to an internally initiated non service affecting switch that instructs the system toperform a switch only if the protection pack is in service and has no known faults. Theswitch, which is done for preventive maintenance, is performed on a provisionable timeschedule.

RRGRing-wire for Ringing Voltage

RS-232CSerial Interface

rt-VBRreal time Variable Bit Rate

RTURemote Test Unit - An RTU is a testing equipment for subscriber lines. An RTU-2 iscollocated to the system and performs test functions (application of test signals andmeasurements) under the control of a test system controller. An RTU-1 is collocated tothe central office and not used in the 30 channel market.

RTU interfaceA serial EIA-232C interface (9-pin Dsub) in the shelf connection panel of theAnyMediaMainshelf served by the communication interface unit (CIU) for a collocated RTU-2.

RTU test sessionAn RTU test session is initiated and started by the RTU with a CONN-LPACC-MET TL1command via the control link. It is terminated from the RTU with a DISC-TACC,RST-TAP-MET or REPT-INITZN command or autonomously by the system if anyinvolved equipment on the test session fails. An RTU test session is different from a testsession using integrated test and measurement equipment. These two types of testsessions use different commands for test setup, test control and test stop.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

S SAService Affecting

SCStation clock - An external 2048 kHz synchronization signal, according to ITU-T G.703.

Glossary

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................


SCStation Clock

SCCSerial communication controller - Part of the communication processor module of themicro-controller MPC860. The SCC can be configured to implement different protocols.For most protocols, this corresponds to portions of the link layer (OSI layer 2). For aROC (64-kbps timeslot of an E1 link), the SCC is configured to implement HDLCprotocol in QMC-mode (QUICC multichannel controller mode).

SCIStation Clock Interface

SCPShelf Connection Panel

SCRSustainable Cell Rate

SDHSynchronous Digital Hierarchy

SDSLSymmetric Digital Subscriber Line

Sealing current5 mA current used (historically) to prevent oxidation buildup on a/b pairs.

Seamless Rate AdaptionCrosstalk from adjacent line drops, AM radio disturbers, temperature changes and waterin the cable binder can cause an ADSL link to degrade or force a retrain. Seamless rateadaption (SRA) allows a link to change the data rate, transmit power and bin selectionof the connection in order to adapt to the new line condition without retraining andexcessive errors.

SECSDH Equipment Clock

Secondary linkA distinguished V5.2 link with some special characteristics: timeslot 16 serves asprotection physical channel for the communication channel related to timeslot 16 of theprimary link. Both timeslots form protection group 1. The protection protocol is alsoassociated to timeslot 16 of the secondary link.

Secondary reference signalThe AnyMedia® Access System can use two timing inputs to synchronize the COMDACphase locked loop (PLL). The preferred reference is called primary reference and thealternate reference is called secondary reference.

Security managementConsists of a set of functions that protect telecommunications networks and systemsfrom unauthorized access by persons, acts, or influences, and to track and report access

Glossary

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................363-211-585Issue 8, September 2008

GL-61

attempts.

Semi-permanent leased lineA V5.x service where bearer channels for certain user ports are pre-connected onprovisioning base. Semi-permanent leased lines pass through the V5.x interface and areestablished under control of the LE by use of the BCC protocol after recovery of theV5.2 interface (V5.1 bearer connections are established anyway). No on-demandsignaling is possible.Semi-permanent leased lines are supported for both, POTS and ISDN subscribers.

Serial numberThe serial number is a 12-character code uniquely identifying each pack and indicatingthe date and place of manufacture.

Service packIdentifies the pack(s) which are responsible for handling the service. In 1:N protectionconfiguration there are dedicated pack(s) which are protected by a protection pack. In1:1 protection configuration it is the pack currently carrying the service.

Service stateEach unit in the system at any time has a defined service state. This service state issystem driven and shows the usability of the unit. The normal service state is a readonly value and can not be changed by the operator. Each service state consists of twoparts: a primary service state displaying the general usability [in service (IS) or out ofservice (OOS)] and a secondary service state displaying in case of a failure the failurereason [for example not operational (NOP)]. The secondary service state is not used inall cases. For some objects there is an administrative service state, whose primaryservice state is changeable via TL1 commands. The operator can set the desired modefor operation: IS or OOS. In this case the current availability is expressed in thesecondary state which is controlled and changed automatically by the system.

Service-affectingRefers to a condition affecting the service (for example telephony) at the time it isdetected.

SESSeverely error second - An SES is a second in which the bit error rate (BER) is greaterthan 10-3 due to all causes of degradation.

SETThe simple network management protocol (SNMP) operation used by the OS to changethe value of specified information such as a MIB variable.

SHDShutting down (a secondary service state) - SHD is a special state triggered by theoperator. A circuit pack is administratively set to OOS and the system is waiting until allestablished services are terminated.

SHDSLSingle-Pair High-Bit-Rate Digital Subscriber Line

Glossary

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................


SHDSL data linkThe SHDSL data link is transported over the EOC bits of the SHDSL frame. Ittransports maintenance and configuration messages between the SHDSL AP and theNTU.

SHDSL dropThe SHDSL drop is the physical line. It is also used as an AID to identify an SHDSLport and the location of loopbacks or line tests.

SHDSL interfaceThe SHDSL interface (I/F) includes all functions to realize SHDSL transmission. Thisincludes the SHDSL transceivers and the digital subscriber line.

SHDSL linkThe SHDSL link is a connection between an SHDSL port and an NTU.

SHDSL overhead bitsThe SHDSL overhead bits (HOH) are embedded in the SHDSL frame together with thepayload timeslots. The SHDSL overhead consists of synchronization word, CRC, EOC,stuff bits, and fixed indicator bits.

SHDSL pairThe SHDSL pair is the copper pair connected to an SHDSL port. It provides duplextransmission on 2-wire metallic local lines with a transmission rate of up to 2312 kbpsin 2-wire mode or up to 4608 kbps in 4-wire mode.

SHDSL payload timeslotsThe SHDSL payload timeslots are physical resources provided by an SHDSL port. Thetransmission rate of an SHDSL payload timeslot is 64 kbps. The SHDSL payloadtimeslots are assigned to logical timeslots, when the operator provisions a V5 ISDN PRAsubscriber or an n×64 DLL subscriber.

SHDSL portThe SHDSL port refers to the devices and functions provided by an SHDSL AP tosupportSHDSL transmission.

Shelf daisy-chainConnectingAnyMediaMainshelves to daisy-chain AFMs together for ADSL servicesonly. This can be done locally by connecting the AFM ports directly or remotely via anSDH transport network.

Shelf overbooking factorOverbooking means allocating bandwidth to connections on a port, where their totalbandwidth allocation is greater than bandwidth minus CAC Reserve. Booking can exceedbandwidth and also the bandwidth of the port, but traffic throughput can never exceedbandwidth.

Shelf PCRThe amount of bandwidth allocated by provisioning to a shelf.

Glossary

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................363-211-585Issue 8, September 2008

GL-63

Shelf VPA feeder VP for which the BB subsystem supports VC cross-connects.

SIDSystem Identification

Side select switchAn action performed on peripheral packs in case of a COMDAC protection switch inorder to receive/transmit information from/to the COMDAC which is currently active.

Side switchThe operation of deactivating the active COMDAC and activating the stand-byCOMDAC.

Silent failureA silent failure is defined to be any equipment failure that results in a loss of service ora loss of protection that does not trigger an office alarm or generate an OS autonomousmessage. Typically, these failures arise from circuit packs or a portion of circuit packswhose performance cannot be monitored by alarm circuitry (Section 2.4.3 of TR-418).

Simplex modeA mode in which an entity is not protected: only one entity is installed and its failuredisrupts the services it provides.

Single-pair high speed digital subscriber line (SHDSL)A physical layer technology used to transport digital bit stream over one or two pairs ofnonloaded existing copper distribution cable. SHDSL provides equal transmission bitrates for both the upstream and downstream directions ranging from 192 to 2312 kbps in2-wire mode or from 384 to 4608 kbps in 4-wire mode. SHDSL is based on use of theTC-PAM line coding scheme. TC-PAM is a baseband line coding scheme that does notallow the option to share the copper loop from a baseband POTS signal.

SIPSession initiation protocol

Site IDA unique provisioned name given to anAnyMediaMainshelf. This name is identified bythe AnyMediaElement Manager as the NE name.

Site-specificReflects the particular configuration of the site. Site-specific configuration is achievedby provisioning.

SNSerial Number

SNMPSimple network management protocol - Used by the GSI/EMS for theAnyMedia®

Access System ATM xDSL system for accessing the MIB objects.

SNMPSimple Network Management System

Glossary

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................


SNMP TRAPSee TRAP.

SNRSignal-to-Noise Ratio

SNR margin of ADSL lineThe increase in noise, relative to the current received noise power, that can occur with aBER of 10-7 still being met.

SNR margin of [S]HDSL lineThe SNR margin is defined as the maximum dB increase in equalized noise or themaximum dB decrease in equalized signal that a system can tolerate and maintain a BERof 10-7.

SNRMSignal to Noise Ratio Margin

Software factoryThe software factory is responsible for the pre-configuration and pre-installation of thesystem software. The software factory also creates installation files (for example CD,diskettes etc.) for delivery to the customer.

Software packageAt the architectural level, software packages are the primary vehicle for functionalpartitioning of the system. Software packages are configuration units of the system.

Software upgradeInstalling newer system software.

SONETSynchronous Optical Network

SPSingle-Pair

SPESynchronous Payload Equivalent

SPLL ROCSemi-Permanent Leased Line Remote Operations Channel - A permanent establishedconnection between a ROC transported via V5.x interface and routed through to the LE.See also ROC.

SRASeamless Rate Adaption

SSUSynchronization Supply Unit

Glossary

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................363-211-585Issue 8, September 2008

GL-65

StandbyA backup pack or system entity that may be activated during a equipment failure ortesting.

Standby packIdentifies the pack which is currently responsible for providing the protection in aprotected configuration. A stand-by pack may also be in a state where no service ispossible, for example faulty or moved to OOS by the operator.

Standby protection physical channelA protection physical channel (timeslot) which is not carrying a logical communicationchannel, but is used for protection. See also active protection physical channel.

Standby provisioning variantA provisioning variant label, which is not used for next V5 interface start-up. The LEand AN may switch via the control protocol between active and standby provisioningvariant label.

Status conditionReport of a type of standing condition that reflects abnormal conditions or otheranomalies that are not assigned a severity. Status conditions are necessary to indicate tothe EMS or the operator that the system is in an unusual state, or is performing anaction that may interfere with system operations, such as loop-back, softwareinstallation, or a forced or inhibited protection switch. A status condition is reported viaa report-event TL1 message or an SNMP trap. Two kinds of status conditions aresupported: Set/clear status conditions, which are active as long as the abnormal conditionpersists, and transient status conditions, which indicate a single abnormal event which isalready cleared again.

Status condition reportAutonomous report that is not an alarm. A status condition report is part of a reportsequence (status condition set/status condition cleared). Additionally, it is possible toretrieve whether the status condition is set or cleared.

Steady stateTime of constant failure rate between the infant mortality factor period and the end oflife period. This time represents the design life.

STM-1Synchronous Transport Module Level 1 (155.52 Mbps)

Structured leased lineA structured leased line provides byte and timeslot information for the 2Mbps bitstream.This information is given via the framing information in timeslot 0 (see alsounstructured leased line).

Structured modeIn structured mode timeslot 0 (TS0) of the 2 Mbps-bit stream according to G.704 can beidentified. Also location of TS0 within the HDSL frame is known (see also unstructuredmode).

Glossary

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................


STS-3c155 Mbps signal according to SONET standards.

SubscriberRepresents one customer entity on the LINES-layer.

Subscriber lineThe a/b copper pair between a local exchange (LE) or access network system (AN) andthe network connection point (NCP) (see ITU G.101).

Subscriber loopContains subscriber’s line, subscriber’s installation and subscriber’s terminal; sometimesreferenced as drop.

Subscriber loop feedingSubscriber loop feeding will be provided for POTS to supply subscriber’s terminal withpower and for supervisioning of subscriber’s loop.

Sustainable cell rate (SCR)The average cell transmission rate in ATM, measured in cells per second and convertedinternally to bits per second. Usually, SCR is a fraction of the peak cell rate.

SVCService Channel Access

SVGASuper Video Graphics Adapter

SWSoftware - Software is program data which is downloadable into the system.

SWDLSoftware download (a secondary service state) - Software download is in progress.

SWDLSoftWare DownLoad

Symmetric digital subscriber line (SDSL)A physical layer technology used to transport digital bit stream over one pair ofnonloaded existing copper distribution cable. SDSL provides equal transmission bit ratesfor both the upstream and downstream directions ranging from 144 to 2320 kbps. SDSLis based on use of the 2B1Q line coding scheme. 2B1Q-SDSL is a baseband line codingscheme that does not allow the option to share the copper loop from a baseband POTSsignal.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

T T/RTransmit/Receive

TATerminal Adapter

Glossary

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................363-211-585Issue 8, September 2008

GL-67

Tagged CellA lower-priority cell, i.e., a cell whose CLP bit is set to 1. A cell may be tagged by thesystem because it violates the traffic contract on its connection or by its source.

TAPTest access path - Two metallic test access paths, one consisting of two pairs (TAP-B)and the other of six pairs (TAP-A), provide both internal and external metallic testaccess to the ports and drops of the application packs.

TAP-BTest Access Path B

TAP10xTest Application Pack - TAP10x (that is TAP100, TAP100B, or TAP101) is the internaltest head executing the measurements required for the drop.

TCTAP Connected

TCAThreshold Crossing Alert

TCP/IPTransmission control protocol/Internet protocol - The combination of a network andtransport protocol developed by ARPANET for internetworking IP-based networks.

TDMTime Division Multiplexing

TETerminal Equipment

TELNETA remote terminal interface protocol which allows remote login capability into a systemon a network from any other node on that network that is also running TELNET.TELNET is a TCP/IP application.

Terminating callTerminating call is the type of call initiated at the network side of the network userinterface. It comprises the build-up, speech and the tear-down phase. For a POTS callfor example it starts with a message from the LE to theAnyMedia® Access System toseize a given subscriber and to supply ringing current.

Test sessionA test session is the procedure including all necessary functions to test a subscriber. Thisincludes the setup of the test path as well as the release of the test equipment. The testsession runs in theAnyMedia® Access System.

Threshold crossing alertA threshold is a value assigned by the system user to a certain desired level (forexample errored seconds); when the level is exceeded, a threshold crossing alert isissued.

Glossary

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................


TIDTarget Identifier

Tier 2 NMSA generic term for a network management system (NMS) that can manage multiple kindsof network elements as a connected network. Tier 3 refers to element managers and Tier1 refers to customer service support systems.

TimeslotSee TS.

Timeslot numberA timeslot number identifies a timeslot of 64 kbps within the 2048-kbps V5.x link. Therange shall be 1 to 31. It may be used as a bearer channel, communication channel orprotection physical channel. Timeslot 0 is reserved and not used for the purposesdescribed above.

Timeslot sequence integrityThe assurance that the digital information contained in the n timeslots of a multislotconnection arrives at the output in the same sequence as it was introduced.

TL1Transaction Language 1 - A Bellcore standard message language. It is the primary meansof operating and maintaining theAnyMedia® Access System. A TL1 message sessionsupports bidirectional message transmission and when a TL1 link is established, thesystem can initiate autonomous messages to monitor alarms and changes in systemstatus. This is the message protocol used on the EMS and CIT interfaces.

TL1 defaultsTransaction Language 1 defaults - TL1 defaults are the parameter values built into theAnyMedia® Access System when it is shipped from the factory. A TL1 default parameterfor example stands for none given TL1 parameters.

TL1 interfaceTransaction Language 1 interface - The message interface which is based on TL1 andused by the operator for system input and output on the EMS and CIT interfaces.

TL1SITL1 System Interface

TNTN is the synonym for a power distribution system having one point directly earthed, theexposed conductive parts of the electrical installation are connected to that point byprotective earth conductors.

Total system downtimeDowntime during which the entire system (or, NE) is out of service. This includes allfailure modes that result in a service outage of greater than 50 milliseconds. Failuremodes that may result in a total system outage often include the synchronization ortiming packs, cross-connect matrices, and matrix power supplies.

Glossary

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................363-211-585Issue 8, September 2008

GL-69

TRAPAn autonomous report in the simple network management protocol (SNMP), sent out bya network element towards an SNMP network manager, indicating an exceptional event.

TRGTip-wire for Ringing Voltage

Triple TechnologyCapability of a shelf to support three technologies:

• TDM based on narrowband services

• ATM xDSL

• IP-based services.

Trunk processingThe act of placing a call processing finite state machine in a null state. The connectionbetween the subscriber and the network interface is disconnected and an idle pattern issent towards the subscriber.

TSTimeslot - Any cyclic time interval that can be recognized and defined uniquely. Forexample a 64-kbps channel of a V5 interface that can be used either as bearer channel(carrying subscriber payload information) or as communication channel (carrying bothsubscriber and network element signaling information).

TSCTest System Controller

TSITimeslot interchanger - This is a switch able to route any timeslot on the subscriber sideto any timeslot on the feeder side and vice versa. There is a limited loopback capacityfor cross-connections on either subscriber or feeder side.

TSTTest active (a secondary service state) - Test is in progress (TAP10x/LPZ200).

TTTT is the synonym for a power distribution system having one point directly earthed, theexposed conductive parts of the electrical installation are connected to a local earth.

Turn-upThe process of bringing the system or a system component to an operational state (itincludes HW and SW installation as well as self diagnostics). After that the system canbe provisioned for service and other operational functionality.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

U U activated onlyOnly the access transmission system (ATS) is activated. The U line signal issynchronized and the transmission of maintenance bits over the U interface is possible.The S/T interface is not activated.

Glossary

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................


UADSLUniversal Digital Subscriber Line (G.lite, splitterless DSL)

UARTUniversal Asynchronous Receiver/Transmitter

UASUnavailable Second

UATUnavailable Time

UBRUnspecified Bit Rate

UDTUnstructured Data Transfer

UEQUnequipped (a secondary service state) - The hardware is not present.

UGLLAn unstructured 2 Mbps digital leased line service via G.703 interface. This interface isprovided by means of an NTU which is the far end equipment of an HDSL link.

ULLUnstructured Leased Line

UnavailabilityIn general, steady-state unavailability is defined as the fraction of time that the system isnot available, or equivalently as the average downtime per year. Unavailability is oftenexpressed in minutes per year of downtime. In engineering applications, unavailability isfrequently expressed in terms of its complement, that is the availability. For a digitalchannel, unavailability or downtime begins when the first 10 consecutive severely errorseconds (SESs) occur, and it ends when the first of 10 consecutive non-SESs occur.

Unavailable timeA digital transmission channel is considered unavailable, or in a complete downtimecondition, when its error performance falls below a given threshold. According toRecommendation G.821, a period of unavailable time begins when the bit error rate(BER) in each second is worse than 10-3 for a period of 10 consecutive seconds. These10 seconds are considered unavailable time.The unavailable time is counted from thefirst faulty (severely error) second in the sequence. The period of unavailable timeterminates when the BER in each second is better than 10-3 for a period of 10consecutive seconds.

UnbundlingConnections to multiple switches from a singleAnyMedia® Access System. Every switchcan be owned by a different provider, then theAnyMedia® Access System subscriberscan be connected to several providers.

Glossary

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................363-211-585Issue 8, September 2008

GL-71

UNIUser network interface - The point at which the user accesses the network.

Universal termination unitA universal termination unit (UTU) is an HDSL line termination unit, which can be usedas LTU or NTU. The default configuration for an UTU is NTU.

Unknown provisioning variantsAll provisioning variant labels, which are not the active or standby provisioning variantlabel.

Unprotected configurationNo protection pack is provisioned.

Unspecified bit rate (UBR)An ATM service category where traffic is allocated whatever bandwidth is available atany given time. UBR does not have a pre-connection negotiated bandwidth and there areno guarantees in terms of cell loss rate and delay.

Unstructured leased lineAn unstructured leased line provides no byte and timeslot information for the 2Mbpsbitstream. The whole 2Mbps is considered as an continuos bitstream (see also structuredleased line).

Unstructured modeThe data stream is defined by the bit rate only. There exists no knowledge about certainframes or timeslots within the data stream.

UPCUsage Parameter Control

UploadA binary data transfer from theAnyMedia® Access System to the GSI.

UPPUnstructured Point-to-Point

UPPSUnstructured Point-to-Point Single pair

UpstreamThe bitstream direction from the NT towards the network.

Upstream directionTransmission direction from customer to ATM network or telephony switch.

Upstream VPIn a daisy chain, a VP that is passed through to a shelf that is closer to the ATMtransport network than the shelf being addressed.″Upstream″ here does not refer to thedirection of transmission. Upstream VPs are not provisioned in an AFM, but arerecorded in it to help prevent errors in provisioning daisy chains.

Glossary

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................


User failureA user failure (UF) Is a failure within the transmission path at the user side. After afailure happened, a″Block message″ is sent via V5 interface to the LE. Afterwards thefailure/failure combination is analyzed and mapped to either a network failure or userfailure and reported via V5 interface to the LE. See also network failure.

User identifier (login)A unique character string consisting of up to 20 alphanumeric characters (ASCII) usedby the system to identify a particular person or user.

User security classRefers to the different user groups, each assigned with certain system access privileges.

User timeslotsThose timeslots which are to be seen at the G.703 application interface at the NTU. Itdepends on the HDSL application mode how the HDSL logical timeslots which areprovisioned by a certain service are mapped to the user timeslots. The use of these usertimeslots depends on the service. For an ISDN PRA they may be used for example asbearer channels or timeslot 16 as D64 signaling channel. See also HDSL applicationmode.

User-to-network interface (UNI)The point at which the user accesses the network.

USMUser Service Manual

UTUUniversal Transmission Unit

UVLLUnstructured 2 Mbps leased lines service via V.35, V.36 or X.21 interface

UVLL serviceAn unstructured 2 Mbps digital leased line service via V.35, V.36 or X.21 interface. Thisinterface is provided by means of an NTU which is the far end equipment of an HDSLlink.

U interfaceA 2-wire digital subscriber interface. It is used for connection of NT equipments andwill carry digital signals. In addition the U interface must provide the DC feeding ofNTs.

U portRefers to the devices and functions built on or provided by an ISDN AP to supportISDN BRA or DLL service. The U ports can be distinguished between 2B1Q and 4B3TU ports. 12 2B1Q U ports are housed on one LPU112, 16 4B3T U ports are housed onone LPU430.

Glossary

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................363-211-585Issue 8, September 2008

GL-73

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

V V3 ISDN PRA serviceIntegrated services digital network primary rate access service via V3 interface -Connects ISDN PRA subscribers via V3 interface to the network. A V3 ISDN PRAservice has 32 timeslots of one E1 port located on an IO_E1 pack.

V3PPV3 Point-to-Point

V3PPSV3 Point-to-Point Single pair

V5.x interfaceAn ETSI defined interface between a local exchange and an access network element. AV5.1 interface consists of one single 2-Mbps (E1) link containing communication andbearer channels. A V5.2 interface consists of up to sixteen 2-Mbps (E1) links containingcommunication and bearer channels. The term V5.x interface is used for clarificationthat certain facts, a certain description or requirements are relevant for both V5.1 andV5.2 interface.

V5DLaddrV5 data link address - A V5DLaddr is an address used in the LAPV5-DL frames toidentify different V5-data link sublayer connections, each of them used to support aparticular V5.x-layer 3 protocol (for example PSTN protocol, control protocol). It ispresent in every LAPV5-DL frame and is a direct copy of the EFaddr. The V5DLaddrfield has been included within the LAPV5 frames for structural compatibility with otherprotocols (for example recommendations Q.920 and Q.921).

Validity of a peripheral imageA peripheral image is determined to be valid if it is not corrupted and it’s SW versionmatches with those stored in the COMDAC for the pack type concerned (applies only toactive images).

Variable bit rate (VBR)A service category that supports variable bit rate data traffic with average and peaktraffic parameters.

VBRVariable bit rate

VCVirtual channel - One of several logical connections defined within a virtual path (VP)between two ATM devices; provides sequential, unidirectional transport of ATM cells.

VC CEPVirtual channel connection end point - A point located at the boundary between the VClevel and the AAL where the level service is provided to the AAL or to the managementplane. A VC CEP provides the VC-connection termination functions.

VCCVirtual Channel Connection

Glossary

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................


VCIVirtual channel identifier - A field within the ATM cell header that provides a uniqueidentifier for the virtual channel (VC) within a virtual path (VP) that carries a particularcell stream.

VFVoice Frequency

Virtual channel connection (VCC)The sum of all the unidirectional virtual channel links traveled by an ATM payload fromits originating point to its user destination

Virtual connectionA connection between end-users in which data may be passed over various circuitconfigurations during a single period of communication. Virtual circuits are generally setup on a per-call basis and are disconnected when the call is terminated.

Virtual ISDN portA functionality located in COMDAC which terminates layer 2 and layer 3 ISDNprotocols transported via the ROC support D-channel. The Virtual ISDN port isresponsible for (de-)establishing the ISDN dial-up ROC.

VLLN×64 kbps leased lines service via V.35, V.36 or X.21 interface

VLL serviceAn n×64 kbps digital leased line service via V.35, V.36 or X.21 interface (n=1, ..., 31).This interface is provided by means of an NTU which is the far end equipment of anHDSL link.

Voltage dipsVoltage dips are short voltage reductions or fluctuations.

Voltage gapsVoltage gaps are short voltage interruptions.

VPVirtual path - A unidirectional logical connection between two ATM devices; consists ofa set of virtual channels (VC). The VCs are associated by a common identifier value, thevirtual path identifier (VPI).

VPCVirtual Path Connection

VPIVirtual path identifier - A field within the ATM cell header that indicates the virtual path(VP) to which a cell belongs.

VPTVirtual path termination - An entity located at the boundary between the VP level andthe VC level where the level service is provided to the VC level or to the managementplane. A VPT provides the VP-connection termination functions. The standards call this

Glossary

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................363-211-585Issue 8, September 2008

GL-75

point virtual path connection end point (VP CEP).

VPTGrpVirtual Path Termination Group

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

W WANWide area network - A network that operates over a large region and commonly usescarrier facilities and services.

WanderLong-term noncumulative variations of the significant instants of a digital signal fromtheir ideal positions in time.

Warm startRecovery of the AFM due to a soft reset or a SW upgrade with database evolution. Forall other types of AFM recovery a cold start applies. In both cases the user will beinformed by a status condition report.

WaveStar ADM 4/1Compact and cost-effective SDH multiplexer. The WaveStar ADM 4/1 (former productdesignation ADM 155 C) can be used in different configurations such as terminalmultiplexer, add/drop multiplexer and repeater, and can be used in the dual terminalmode. It has a wide range of tributary interfaces. The WaveStar ADM 4/1 multiplexes 2,34, 45 Mbps, and STM-1 signals into an STM-1 or STM-4 line signal. Cross-connectscan be made at VC-12 level.

WRRWeighted Round-Robin

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

X xDSLRefers to a variety of DSL services, such as HDSL, HDSL2, SDSL, SHDSL, and ADSL.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Z Z interfaceA 2-wire analog subscriber interface. It is used for connection of analog subscriber linesand will carry signals such as speech, voice-band analog data and multi-frequency pushbutton signals, etc. In addition the Z interface must provide the DC feeding ofsubscriber’s terminal and ordinary functions such as DC signaling, ringing, metering,etc., where appropriate (see ITU Q.551 2.1.1).

Z portA Z port is circuitry built on a POTS AP to provide a Z interface for analogsubscribers. Note that more than one Z port is housed on anAnyMedia® Access SystemPOTS AP, for example the LPZ100 provides 32 Z ports.

Glossary

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................


Index

A AnyMedia® ETSI V5 Shelf

Alarming concept,7-35

Backplane,4-22

Centralized powering andringing, 7-24

Components,4-21

Connector arrangement,4-20

Fan variants,7-32

Grounding concept,7-7

Loose ETSI V5 Shelf,3-18

Powering and ringing,7-23

Shelf arrangement,4-19

AnyMedia® LAG 1900 Shelf

Alarming concept,7-37

Backplane,4-6

Centralized powering andringing, 7-14

Components,4-4

Connector arrangement,4-8,4-28

Internal and externalringing, 7-15



Backplane,4-27



Alarm conection panel,7-40

Backplane,4-14

Cabinet,3-12

Connector arrangement,4-15

Grounding concept,7-9

Housing configuration,3-12

Passive clock distribution,7-47


AnyMedia® ManagementInterface,6-8

Application packs,5-1, 5-3

Applications,2-2

Central office-siteapplication,2-2

Extension via host/remoteterminal application forlarge sites,2-6

Remote applications,2-3

.............................................................

B Backplane

ETSI V5 Shelf,4-22

LAG 1900 Shelf,4-6

LAG 200 Shelf,4-27

LAG 4300 Shelf,4-14

Baffles

ETSI V5 Shelf,3-9

LAG 1900 Shelf,3-5

BB ATM Operations Channel,9-18

.............................................................

C Cabling

DC-powered rack,3-9

LAG 1900 Shelf,3-5

LAG 4300 Shelf,3-16

Cabling for integrated testing

ETSI V5 Shelf,7-50

LAG 1900 Shelf,7-51

LAG 4300 Shelf,7-52

CE marking,9-23

Central office-site application,2-2

Circuit packs,5-1

Circuit testing,7-59

Clock

DOTS clock,7-47

Station clock,7-47

Common packs,5-1, 5-2

Configurations

AnyMedia® ETSI V5 Shelf,4-20

AnyMedia® LAG 4300Shelf, 3-12, 4-12

DC-powered rack for ETSIV5 Shelves,3-7

DC-powered rack for LAG1900 Shelves,3-3

Conformance statements

CE, B-2

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................363-211-585Issue 8, September 2008

IN-1

Connections

Protective ground,7-11

Connector arrangement

ETSI V5 Shelf,4-20

LAG 1900 Shelf,4-8, 4-28

LAG 4300 Shelf,4-15

CPE, xii

Cross-connect,8-7

Customer documentation,xiii

How to order,xv

.............................................................

D Data communications network(DCN), 8-1, 8-5, 8-29

DC-powered rack for ETSI V5Shelves,3-7


Diffusion box, 8-33

Documentation

How to order,xv

DOTS clock,7-47

.............................................................

E Eco-environmental statements,B-5

Electrostatic dischargeconsiderations,10-11

Environmental alarmsAnyMedia® LAG 1900 Shelf,7-37, 7-37

Environmental alarmsAnyMedia® LAG 4300 Shelf,7-43

Environmental conditions,7-3,9-19

ESD, 10-11

Extension via host/remoteterminal application for largesites,2-6

External synchronization mode,7-45

External test head (RTU),7-60

.............................................................

F Fan unit

AnyMedia® LAG 1900Shelf, 3-5

DC-powered rack,3-9

Free-running mode,7-45

FRMGND

LAG 4300 System,7-9

.............................................................

G General DCN configuration

ISDN dial-up DCN,8-20

MNI for PLL- orSPLL-based ROC,8-12

PLL-based ROC,8-6

PLL-based ROC using aWaveStar® ADM 4/1, 8-10

POTS dial-up DCN,8-17

Remote operations via ATMOperations Channel,8-26

SPLL-based ROC,8-15

Using BB ATM OperationsChannel,8-23

Graphical System Interface(GSI), 6-9

Grounding




Growth scenarios

Remote terminalapplications,2-6

.............................................................

H Host terminal,2-4, 2-6





.............................................................

I Integrated testing,7-49

.............................................................

L LAG 200 ShelfSee:AnyMedia® LAG 200

Shelf

Laser safety guidelines,10-13

Loop timed mode,7-45

.............................................................

M Manual testing,7-56

Miscellaneous alarm closureinputs, 7-35

Monitoring, 7-57

.............................................................

N Nailed-up leased line linktimeslot ROC,2-4

Navis™ AnyMedia® ElementManagement System,6-7

Network examples,8-30

Network Maintenance Manager,6-12

.............................................................

O OAM&P management,6-3

On-demand testing,7-48

Ordering

How to order this document,xv

Ordering Guide for theAnyMedia Access System,xiv

.............................................................

P Pack types,5-1

Index

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

IN-2 363-211-585Issue 8, September 2008

PC requirements,6-13

Power and battery plant,7-6

Power Rectifier Unit (PRU),7-30

Powering



Product support

Customer assistance requestsentry system (CARES),A-5

Engineering and installationservices,A-3

Training, A-1

.............................................................

R Rack



Related documentation,xiii

Remote applications,2-3

Remote LAN interface,8-6

Remote operations channel(ROC)

ROC for remote terminal,2-4

Remote operations via ATMOperations Channel,8-26

Remote semipermanent V5.2ROC, 2-4

Remote terminal,2-4, 2-6

Remote terminal applications,2-4, 2-6

Remote terminal interface,2-4

Remote terminal link,2-4

Ringing



ROC for remote terminal,2-4

Router/bridge,8-8

RTU test session,7-63

.............................................................

S Safety,10-1

Appearance of the safetyinstructions,10-7

Electrostatic dischargeconsiderations,10-11

General safety information,10-4

Laser safety guidelines,10-13

SDH ring network,8-10

SHDSL

Link bit rate, 9-11

Shelves and components



AnyMedia® LAG 200 Shelf,4-23


Shelves,1-9

Specific DCN configuration

PDH equipment in apoint-to-point structure,8-34

RemoteAnyMedia® AccessSystems via AM 1 overDCC, 8-45

RemoteAnyMedia® AccessSystems via an X.25,8-39

RemoteAnyMedia® AccessSystems via IP networks,8-37

RemoteAnyMedia® AccessSystems via TCP/IP overDCC, 8-42

SDH point-to-point accessnetwork, 8-30

WaveStar® ADM 4/1 ringconfiguration overF1-byte,8-32

SPLL-based ROC,8-12, 8-15

Standards compliance,9-23

Station clock,7-47

Subrack for fuse panel andconnection panel,3-4, 3-8

Subscriber line test viaexternal test head,7-60

Support

Technical Support,A-4

Switch consolidation,2-3

Synchronization and timing,7-45

System growth

Remote terminalapplications,2-6

System planning andengineering

Environment conditions,7-3

Housing configurations,7-34

Power and battery plant,7-6

............................................................

T Technical specifications

ADSL interfaces,9-12

DS3 interfaces,9-5

E1 interfaces,9-4, 9-4,9-12

E3 interfaces,9-5

Electromagneticcompatibility (EMC), 9-21

Index

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................363-211-585Issue 8, September 2008

IN-3

Environmental conditions,9-19

External timed to DOTS E1interface for LAG system,9-15

HDSL interfaces,9-10

OAM&P Interfaces,9-16,9-18

SHDSL interfaces,9-11

SHDSL interfaces (ATM),9-13

Standards compliance,9-23

Station clock interface,9-15

STM-1/OC-3c opticalinterfaces,9-6

System performance,9-1

Z interfaces,9-8, 9-9

Technical Support,A-4

Testing

Circuit test,7-59

Manual testing,7-56

Monitoring, 7-57

Wiring, 7-58

Timing and synchronization,7-45

Transport network,8-9

.............................................................

W Wiring, 7-58

Index

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

IN-4 363-211-585Issue 8, September 2008

Documents

AnyMedia Access System (30 Channel) - Nokia